IBM Printer A00 User Manual
4247 Printer  
Model A00  
IBM  
User’s Guide  
SA24-4404-02  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4247 Printer  
Model A00  
IBM  
User’s Guide  
SA24-4404-02  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note!  
Before using this information and the product it supports, be sure to read the general information under “Notices” on  
page xiii.  
Fourth Edition (September 1998)  
The following paragraph does not apply to any country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law:  
INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT  
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED  
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow  
disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions; therefore, this statement may not apply to you.  
Requests for IBM publications should be made to your IBM representative or to the IBM branch office serving your  
locality. Publications are not stocked at the address below.  
A Readers’ Comments form is provided at the back of this publication. You may send your comments by facsimile to  
1-800-524-1519, by electronic mail to [email protected], or by mail to:  
IBM Printing Systems Company  
Department H7FE Building 003G  
Information Development  
PO Box 1900  
Boulder, CO 80301-9191  
USA  
Internet  
Visit our home page at http://www.printers.ibm.com  
When you send information to IBM or the IBM Printing Systems Company, you grant a nonexclusive right to use or  
distribute the information in any way IBM or IBM Printing Systems Company believes appropriate without incurring  
any obligation to you.  
© Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1995, 1998. All rights reserved.  
Note to U.S. Government Users — Documentation related to restricted rights — Use, duplication or disclosure is  
subject to restrictions set forth in GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Notices .  
Electronic Emissions  
Trademarks and Service Marks  
Safety Information .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
xiii  
xiii  
xv  
.
.
.
.
.
. xvi  
Preface .  
How to Use this Guide.  
Related Publications  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
xix  
. xix  
.
.
xx  
Chapter 1. Printer Setup  
Information Necessary for Printer Setup .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1
1
2
3
3
4
5
5
6
7
7
7
9
13  
14  
14  
15  
17  
18  
19  
20  
20  
23  
24  
25  
25  
27  
27  
28  
29  
30  
32  
32  
Unpacking Your Printer  
Setting Up Your Printer  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Removing Packing Materials  
Installing Operator Panel Overlay.  
Installing Wire Forms Guide.  
.
.
Locating Operator Accessible Areas and Controls .  
Operator Panel  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Operator Panel Display  
Audible Alarm .  
Status Indicators .  
Function Keys .  
Default Forms Path .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Setting Up Front Push Forms Path (Default).  
Setting Front Push Tractor .  
Installing Front Push Tractor  
Installing Ribbon Cartridge .  
Connecting Electrical Power.  
Changing Display Language  
Stacking Forms for Front Push Forms Path .  
Loading Forms into Front Push Forms Path .  
Creating Print Test Sample (Self Test Printout-with Firmware Level) .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Tearing Off Forms  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Choosing Tear-Off Option.  
Checking and Adjusting Tear-Off Position .  
Checking Configuration  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Printing Power On Configuration Setup  
Printing Program Configuration Setup .  
Parking Continuous Forms .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Setting Up Manual Sheet Feed Path  
Optional Printer Stand .  
Summary  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 2. Considering Other Forms Paths .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
33  
33  
34  
35  
35  
36  
36  
36  
36  
37  
Choosing Other Forms Paths .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Choosing a Forms Path for Your Needs  
Choosing a Forms Path for Special Forms  
Other Considerations for Forms .  
Description of Each Forms Path .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Front Push Forms Path  
Rear Push Forms Path  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Dual Push Forms Paths .  
Rear Pull Forms Path .  
.
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1995, 1998  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iii  
Push Pull Forms Path .  
Manual Sheet Feed .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
37  
37  
.
Chapter 3. Setting Up Another Forms Path .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
39  
39  
41  
42  
42  
42  
44  
44  
46  
47  
50  
52  
53  
53  
54  
55  
57  
58  
59  
59  
60  
61  
63  
64  
70  
71  
71  
72  
Summarizing Forms Path Set Up .  
Changing to a Different Forms Path .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Identifying Existing Forms Path  
Identifying New Forms Path .  
.
.
.
Removing Existing Forms Tractor.  
Preparing Printer for Selected Forms Path  
Setting Forms Guide Deflector .  
Setting Push-Pull Selector  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Removing or Installing Paper Bail.  
Setting Forms Tractors.  
.
.
.
.
Setting Up and Configuring Front Push Forms Path .  
Setting Up Rear Push Forms Path .  
Installing Rear Push Tractor.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Configuring Forms Path for Rear Push .  
Loading Forms For Rear Push .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
Setting Up Dual Push Forms Paths .  
Preparing Dual Push Forms Paths .  
Configuring Printer for Linking Dual Push .  
Parking One Continuous Form and Loading Another (Dual Push) .  
Setting Up Rear Pull Forms Path .  
Installing Rear Pull Tractor .  
Configuring Forms Path for Rear Pull .  
Loading Forms For Rear Pull .  
Setting Up Push Pull Forms Path.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Installing Push Pull Tractors.  
.
Configuring Forms Path for Push Pull .  
Loading Forms For Push Pull .  
Chapter 4. Configuring Your Printer .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
79  
80  
81  
82  
82  
83  
84  
84  
84  
91  
99  
Operator Panel Function Keys Used for Configuration .  
Entering Printer Configuration .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Exiting Printer Configuration.  
Power On Configuration .  
.
.
.
Power On Configuration Menu Tree .  
Pull .  
Jam Sensors .  
Parallel Interface .  
Serial Interface  
Functions  
Sensor Tune  
Bidirectional Adjustment .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 103  
. 104  
. 104  
. 105  
. 106  
. 107  
. 108  
. 109  
. 109  
. 110  
. 111  
. 111  
. 113  
Restore Manufacturing Defaults .  
Printing Power On Configuration Setup  
Program Configuration.  
Program Configuration Menu Tree  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Tear Position Adjustment .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1 Form Per Path .  
Path  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Impact Strength .  
Perforation Safety  
Adjustments  
Form Setting .  
.
.
.
iv 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Another Path .  
Additional Entry Point to Power On Configuration Menu  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 119  
. 119  
. 120  
. 120  
. 121  
Hexadecimal Printing .  
Store Mode .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Printing Program Configuration Setup .  
Chapter 5. Attaching Your Printer .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 123  
. 123  
. 123  
. 124  
. 125  
. 126  
. 126  
. 126  
. 126  
. 127  
. 127  
. 128  
. 128  
. 131  
Attaching to Your Computer .  
Attaching Parallel Cable .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Attaching Serial Cable .  
.
.
Installing Printer Drivers .  
AIX Operating Systems Installation .  
OS/400 Operating Systems Installation.  
OS/2 and Windows Operating Environment Installation .  
AIX Driver Installation .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
OS/400 Printer Object Installation.  
OS/2 or Windows Printer Driver Installation .  
Attaching Network Print Server  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Ethernet 10BaseT or 10Base2 .  
Token-Ring UTP or STP .  
.
.
Chapter 6. Operator Tasks.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 133  
. 133  
. 133  
. 133  
. 135  
. 137  
. 137  
. 137  
. 137  
About This Chapter .  
.
.
.
Changing Ribbon Cartridge .  
Removing Ribbon Cartridge .  
Installing Ribbon Cartridge .  
Cleaning Printer .  
Cleaning Inside of Printer.  
Cleaning Covers .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Clearing Forms Jams and Restarting a Print Job .  
Chapter 7. Resolving Printer Problems .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 139  
. 139  
. 139  
. 142  
. 142  
. 143  
. 147  
. 150  
. 150  
About This Chapter .  
Status Codes and Messages  
Various Problems  
Printed Output Problems .  
Other Problems .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Print Quality and Ribbon Problems .  
Configuration Problems  
Miscellaneous Problems .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 8. Supplies, Forms, and Cables .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 151  
. 151  
. 151  
. 153  
. 154  
. 154  
. 154  
. 154  
. 155  
. 155  
. 155  
. 155  
. 157  
. 157  
Ordering Ribbon Cartridges .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Forms Specifications  
Ordering Signal Cable .  
Serial Attachment  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
RS-232C Connector Pin Assignments .  
RS-422A Connector Pin Assignments .  
Attachment Cables for PCs and Compatible Serial Ports .  
Attachment Cables for AS/400 Workstation Controllers .  
Attachment Cable for RISC System/6000 .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Cable Configurations .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
RS-232C.  
RS-422A .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
IBM Parallel Attachment .  
Contents  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix A. Specifications  
Site Location .  
Environmental Requirements  
Operating Environment  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 159  
. 159  
. 160  
. 160  
. 160  
. 160  
. 161  
. 161  
. 161  
. 161  
. 162  
. 162  
. 162  
. 162  
. 164  
. 165  
. 165  
. 165  
. 165  
. 166  
. 166  
. 166  
.
.
.
.
.
.
Nonoperating Environment .  
Shipping Environment .  
Storage Environment .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Physical Requirements  
.
.
.
.
Dimensions .  
Clearance .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Weight  
.
.
Electrical Requirements .  
Electrical Safety .  
.
.
Plugs and Receptacles by Country .  
Plug and Receptacle Depictions .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
Power Cord.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Branch Circuits and Grounding  
Power Consumption  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Heat Output  
Airflow.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Declaration of IBM Product Noise Emission Values .  
Operator and Service Clearance .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Appendix B. Optional Features .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 169  
Appendix C. Native 4247 Commands  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 171  
. 171  
. 173  
. 173  
. 175  
. 176  
. 177  
. 178  
. 178  
. 178  
. 179  
. 179  
. 180  
. 180  
. 181  
. 181  
Native Commands .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Bar Code Commands .  
SELECT Command Format .  
PRINT Command Format  
.
.
.
Bar Code Examples.  
Valid Bar Code Data  
.
.
.
.
Reinitialize Printer Command .  
Set Vertical Spacing (Inches) .  
Set Vertical Spacing (Metric)  
.
Character (Horizontal) Spacing  
Forms Path Control .  
Select Resident Font .  
Select Emulation .  
Select AFTA in Column  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Select/Deselect ASF Bin .  
Appendix D. Personal Printer Data Stream (PPDS) .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 183  
. 184  
. 184  
. 185  
. 185  
. 187  
. 188  
. 188  
. 188  
. 189  
. 189  
. 189  
. 189  
. 189  
About This Appendix  
Print Job Processing  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Page Printing Concept.  
Page Presentation .  
.
Graphic and Control Character Sequences .  
PPDS Compatibility .  
One-Byte Controls .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Null (NUL) .  
Bell (BEL) .  
.
.
.
.
Backspace (BS) .  
Horizontal Tab (HT) .  
Line Feed (LF)  
.
.
.
Vertical Tab (VT) .  
vi 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Form Feed (FF) .  
Carriage Return (CR) .  
Shift Out (SO) / Double-Wide Print .  
Shift In (SI) / Condensed Print .  
Device Control 1 (DC1) / Select or XON .  
Device Control 2 (DC2) / Select 10 CPI  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 189  
. 190  
. 190  
. 190  
. 190  
. 190  
. 191  
. 191  
. 191  
. 191  
. 191  
. 191  
. 193  
. 193  
. 193  
. 193  
. 194  
. 194  
. 194  
. 194  
. 194  
. 195  
. 195  
. 195  
. 195  
. 196  
. 196  
. 196  
. 196  
. 196  
. 197  
. 197  
. 197  
. 197  
. 197  
. 198  
. 198  
. 198  
. 198  
. 198  
. 200  
. 200  
. 200  
. 201  
. 201  
. 201  
. 201  
. 201  
. 201  
. 202  
. 203  
. 203  
. 203  
. 203  
. 204  
. 204  
.
.
.
Device Control 3 (DC3) / Deselect or XOFF .  
Device Control 4 (DC4) / Cancel Double-Wide Print .  
Cancel (CAN) .  
Escape (ESC) .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Space (SP) .  
.
Escape Sequence Controls .  
Null (ESC NUL) .  
Bell (ESC BEL)  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Backspace (ESC BS) .  
Horizontal Tab (ESC HT) .  
Line Feed (ESC LF)  
Vertical Tab (ESC VT) .  
Form Feed (ESC FF) .  
Carriage Return (ESC CR) .  
Shift Out (ESC SO) / Double-Wide Print .  
Shift In (ESC SI) / Condensed Print .  
Device Control 1 (ESC DC1) / Select or XON .  
Device Control 2 (ESC DC2) / Select 10 CPI  
Device Control 3 (ESC DC3) / Deselect or XOFF .  
Device Control 4 (ESC DC4) / Cancel Double-Wide Print .  
Cancel (ESC CAN) .  
Turn Auto Sheet Feeder On or Off (ESC EM) .  
Auto Underscore (ESC -).  
Set 1/8 Inch Line Spacing (ESC 0) .  
Set 7/72 Inch Line Spacing (ESC 1).  
Invoke Text Line Spacing (ESC 2)  
Set Graphics Line Spacing (ESC 3) .  
Set Top of Form (ESC 4) .  
Set Auto Line Feed (ESC 5).  
Select PC Character Set 2 (ESC 6) .  
Select PC Character Set 1 (ESC 7) .  
Set 12 CPI (ESC :) .  
Unidirectional Printing (ESC <).  
Character Font Image Download (ESC=) .  
Select n/72 Inch Line Spacing (ESC A)  
Set Vertical Tabs (ESC B)  
Set Page Length (ESC C)  
Set Horizontal Tabs (ESC D)  
Begin Emphasized Print (ESC E) .  
End Emphasized Print (ESC F)  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Begin Double-Strike Print (ESC G) .  
End Double-Strike Print (ESC H) .  
Change Font (ESC I) .  
Relative Move Baseline (ESC J) .  
Normal Density Bit Image Graphics (ESC K)  
Dual Density Bit Image Graphics Type 1 (ESC L) .  
Begin Skip Perforation (ESC N) .  
End Skip Perforation (ESC O) .  
Proportional Space Mode (ESC P) .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Deselect on Positive Query Reply (ESC Q) .  
Contents vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Set Default Tabs (ESC R)  
Begin Subscript / Superscript Mode (ESC S)  
End Subscript/Superscript Mode (ESC T) .  
Set Print Direction (ESC U) .  
Double-Wide Continuous Mode (ESC W) .  
Set Horizontal Margins (ESC X) .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 204  
. 204  
. 205  
. 205  
. 205  
. 205  
. 206  
. 206  
. 206  
. 206  
. 207  
. 207  
. 207  
. 207  
. 207  
. 208  
. 209  
. 209  
. 211  
. 212  
. 213  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Dual Density Bit Image Graphics Type 2 (ESC Y) .  
High Density Bit Image Graphics (ESC Z)  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Print All Characters (ESC \) .  
Reverse Line Feed (ESC ]) .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Print Single Character (ESC |).  
Continuous Overscore (ESC _)  
Relative Move Right (ESC d) .  
Relative Move Left (ESC e) .  
.
Select Line Scoring (ESC [ -) .  
Set Presentation Highlight (SPH) (ESC [ @).  
Set Font Global (SFG) (ESC [ I) .  
Set Initial Conditions (SIC) (ESC [ K)  
Select Code Page (SCP) (ESC [ T) .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Set Print Quality (SPQ) (ESC [ d).  
Buffer Terminating Conditions .  
.
.
.
.
Appendix E. Epson FX-1050 Data Stream .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 215  
. 217  
. 217  
. 217  
. 218  
. 219  
. 220  
. 220  
. 220  
. 220  
. 220  
. 221  
. 221  
. 221  
. 221  
. 221  
. 222  
. 222  
. 222  
. 222  
. 222  
. 222  
. 223  
. 223  
. 225  
. 225  
. 225  
. 225  
. 225  
. 225  
. 226  
. 226  
. 226  
. 226  
About This Appendix  
Print Job Processing  
Page Printing Concept.  
Page Presentation .  
One-Byte Controls .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Null (NUL) .  
Bell (BEL) .  
.
.
.
.
Backspace (BS) .  
Horizontal Tab (HT) .  
Line Feed (LF)  
.
.
.
.
Vertical Tab (VT) .  
Form Feed (FF) .  
Carriage Return (CR) .  
Shift Out (SO) / Double-Wide Print .  
Shift In (SI) / Condensed Print .  
.
.
Device Control 1 (DC1) / Select or XON .  
Device Control 2 (DC2) / Cancel Condensed Print  
Device Control 3 (DC3) / Deselect or XOFF .  
Device Control 4 (DC4) / Cancel Double-Wide Print .  
.
.
Cancel (CAN) .  
Space (SP) .  
Delete Character (DEL) .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Escape Sequence Controls .  
Escape (ESC) .  
Null (ESC NUL) .  
Bell (ESC BEL)  
Backspace (ESC BS) .  
Horizontal Tab (HT) .  
Line Feed (ESC LF)  
Vertical Tab (ESC VT) .  
Form Feed (ESC FF) .  
Carriage Return (ESC CR) .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Shift Out (ESC SO) / Double-Wide Print .  
viii 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Shift In (ESC SI) / Condensed Print .  
Device Control 1 (ESC DC1) / Select or XON .  
Device Control 2 (ESC DC2) / Cancel Condensed Print  
Device Control 3 (ESC DC3) / Deselect or XOFF .  
Device Control 4 (ESC DC4) / Cancel Double-Wide Print .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 226  
. 227  
. 227  
. 227  
. 227  
. 227  
. 227  
. 228  
. 228  
. 228  
. 229  
. 229  
. 229  
. 230  
. 230  
. 230  
. 230  
. 231  
. 231  
. 231  
. 231  
. 231  
. 231  
. 232  
. 232  
. 232  
. 232  
. 232  
. 232  
. 233  
. 233  
. 233  
. 233  
. 234  
. 234  
. 234  
. 234  
. 234  
. 235  
. 235  
. 235  
. 235  
. 236  
. 236  
. 236  
. 236  
. 236  
. 236  
. 237  
. 237  
. 237  
. 237  
. 238  
. 238  
. 238  
. 239  
.
.
Cancel (ESC CAN) .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Turn Auto Sheet Feeder On or Off (ESC EM) .  
Set Intercharacter Spacing (ESC SP) .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Master Select (ESC !) .  
Cancel MSB Control (ESC #) .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Set Absolute Print Position (ESC $) .  
Select User-Defined Set (ESC %)  
.
Define User-Defined Characters (ESC &) .  
Select Graphics Mode (ESC *).  
Auto Underscore (ESC –)  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Select Vertical Tab Channel (ESC /) .  
Set 1/8 Inch Line Spacing (ESC 0) .  
Set 7/72 Inch Line Spacing (ESC 1).  
Set 1/6 Inch Line Spacing (ESC 2) .  
Set n/216 Inch Line Spacing (ESC 3) .  
Select Italic Mode (ESC 4) .  
Cancel Italic Mode (ESC 5) .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Printable Code Area Expansion (ESC 6) .  
Cancel Printable Code Area Expansion (ESC 7) .  
Copy ROM into Ram (ESC : NUL) .  
Select Unidirectional Mode (one line only) (ESC <) .  
.
.
.
.
.
Set MSB to 0 (ESC =) .  
Set MSB to 1 (ESC >) .  
Reassign Graphics Mode (ESC ?)  
Initialize Printer (ESC @). .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Select n/72 Inch Line Spacing (ESC A)  
Set Vertical Tabs (ESC B)  
Set Page Length (ESC C)  
Set Horizontal Tabs (ESC D)  
Begin Emphasized Print (ESC E) .  
End Emphasized Print (ESC F)  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Begin Double-Strike Print (ESC G) .  
End Double-Strike Print (ESC H) .  
.
Printable Code Area Expansion (ESC I)  
Perform n/216 Inch Line Feed (ESC J).  
Select Single Density Graphics Mode (ESC K) .  
Select Double Density Graphics Mode (ESC L)  
Select 12 CPI (ESC M)  
Begin Skip Perforation (ESC N) .  
End Skip Perforation (ESC O) .  
Select 10 CPI (ESC P)  
Select Right Margin (ESC Q) .  
Select Character Set (ESC R) .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Begin Subscript/Superscript Mode (ESC S) .  
End Subscript/Superscript Mode (ESC T) .  
Set Print Direction (ESC U) .  
Double-Wide Continuous Mode (ESC W) .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Dual Density Bit Image Graphics Type 2 (ESC Y) .  
High Density Bit Image Graphics (ESC Z)  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Set Relative Position (ESC \) .  
.
.
.
.
.
Set Letter Quality Justification (ESC a).  
Contents ix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Select Vertical Tabs in Channels (ESC b) .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 239  
. 239  
. 239  
. 240  
. 240  
. 240  
. 240  
. 240  
. 240  
. 241  
. 241  
. 241  
. 241  
. 243  
Move Right n/120 (ESC d) .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Move Left n/120 (ESC e) .  
Set 15 CPI (ESC g).  
.
.
.
.
Feed Paper n/216 Reverse (ESC j) .  
Select NLQ Font (ESC k).  
Set Left Margin (ESC l)  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Turn Proportional Mode On/Off (ESC p) .  
Quiet Printing (ESC s) .  
Select Character Table (ESC t)  
Double High Printing (ESC w) .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Select NLQ or DP Print Quality (ESC x) .  
Buffer Terminating Conditions .  
Unsupported Command Processing .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Appendix F. Code Pages  
ASCII Code Pages .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 245  
. 245  
. 247  
. 248  
. 249  
. 250  
. 251  
. 252  
. 253  
. 254  
. 255  
. 256  
. 257  
. 258  
. 259  
. 260  
. 261  
. 262  
. 263  
. 264  
. 265  
. 266  
. 267  
. 268  
. 269  
. 270  
. 271  
. 272  
. 273  
. 274  
. 275  
. 276  
. 277  
. 278  
. 279  
. 280  
. 281  
. 282  
. 283  
. 283  
. 283  
.
.
USA (Personal Computer)  
Greek/Latin (ISO 8859-7).  
Latin 1 (ISO 8859-1)  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Multilingual .  
Old Greek .  
Latin 2/ROECE  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Turkish  
Cyrillic.  
Turkish  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Portuguese .  
Icelandic .  
Hebrew .  
.
.
Canadian French.  
Arabic .  
.
.
.
.
Danish/Norwegian .  
Cyrillic 2 (Personal Computer) .  
New Greek .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Thai  
OCR-A  
OCR-B  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Latin 2 (ISO 8859-2)  
Latin 3 (ISO 8859-3)  
Latin 4 (ISO 8859-4)  
Cyrillic (ISO 8859-5)  
Latin 8 (ISO 8859-8)  
Latin 5 (ISO 8859-8)  
Baltic Multilingual.  
.
Estonian .  
Urdu .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Arabic Extended .  
Latin 6 (ISO 8859-6)  
Farsi (Personal Computer) .  
Estonian (Personal Computer) .  
Latvian (Personal Computer)  
Lithuanian (Personal Computer) .  
.
Cyrillic Windows .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Epson FX-series Code Pages .  
Extended Graphics Character Table .  
Italic Character Table .  
.
.
.
.
.
x
4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Epson Extended Character Variables  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 284  
. 285  
. 293  
Glossary  
Index .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Contents xi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xii 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notices  
References in this publication to IBM products, programs, or services do not imply  
that IBM intends to make these available in all countries in which IBM operates. Any  
reference to an IBM product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply  
that only IBM’s product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally  
equivalent product, program, or service that does not infringe any of the intellectual  
property rights of IBM may be used instead of the IBM product, program, or service.  
The evaluation and verification of operation in conjunction with other products,  
except those expressly designated by IBM, are the responsibility of the user.  
IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter in this  
document. The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to these  
patents. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to the IBM Director of Licensing,  
IBM Corporation, 500 Columbus Avenue, Thornwood, NY 10594 USA.  
Electronic Emissions  
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Statement  
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a  
Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are  
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the  
equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates,  
uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in  
accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio  
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause  
harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the  
interference at his own expense.  
IBM is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by  
unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or  
modifications could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the  
following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)  
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may  
cause undesired operation.  
Canadian Department of Communications Compliance Statement  
This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian  
Interference-causing Equipment Regulations.  
Avis de conformité aux normes du ministère des Communications du Canada  
Cet appareil numérique de la classe A respecte toutes les exigences du Reglèment  
sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada.  
United Kingdom Telecommunications Compliance Act  
This equipment is approved under approval number NS/G/23/J/100003 for indirect  
connections to the public telecommunications systems in the United Kingdom.  
European Community (EC) Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1995, 1998  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xiii  
 
This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EU Council  
Directive 89/336/EEC on the approximation of the laws of the Member States  
relating to electromagnetic compatibility. IBM cannot accept responsibility for any  
failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a non-recommended  
modification of the product, including the fitting of non-IBM options cards.  
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class B  
Information Technology Equipment according to CISPR 22/European Standard EN  
55022. The limits of Class B equipment were derived for typical residential  
environments to provide reasonable protection against interference with licensed  
communication devices.  
Zulassungsbescheinigung laut EMVG vom 9. November 1992  
Dieses Gerät ist berechtigt in Übereinstimmung mit dem deutschen EMVG vom  
9.Nov.92 das EG-Konformitätszeichen zu führen.  
Der Außteller der Konformitätserklärung ist die IBM Deutschland  
Informationssysteme GmbH.  
Dieses Gerät erfüllt die Bedingungen der EN 55022 Klasse B.  
United Kingdom Telecommunications Compliance Act  
This equipment is approved under approval number NS/G/23/J/100003 for indirect  
connections to the public telecommunications systems in the United Kingdom.  
New Zealand Compliance Statement  
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio  
interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.  
Japanese VCCI  
xiv 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Taiwan EMI Statement  
EPA Energy Star  
The EPA ENERGY STAR program is a partnership effort with manufacturers of data  
processing equipment to promote the introduction of energy-efficient personal  
computers, monitors, printers, fax machines, and copiers to help reduce air pollution  
and global warming caused by electricity generation.  
IBM Printing Systems Company participates in this program by introducing printers  
that reduce power consumption when they are not being used.  
As an Energy Star partner, IBM Printing Systems Company has determined that this  
product meets the Energy Star guidelines for energy efficiency.  
Trademarks and Service Marks  
The following are trademarks of the IBM Corporation in the United States or other  
countries or both.  
AS/400  
IBM and the IBM logo  
Personal System/2  
Proprinter  
Notices xv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
RISC System/6000  
S/370  
S/390  
The following terms are trademarks, or registered trademarks of other companies or  
entities.  
Centronics  
ENERGY STAR  
Epson  
ESC/P  
Ethernet  
Intel  
Centronics Data Computer Corporation  
United States Environmental Protection Agency  
Seiko-Epson Corporation  
Seiko-Epson Corporation  
Xerox Corporation  
Intel Corporation  
Lexmark  
Novell  
Lexmark International, Inc.  
Novell, Incorporated  
Safety Information  
There are three levels of safety notices used in this guide.  
Danger  
Calls attention to a situation that is potentially lethal or extremely hazardous  
to people.  
Caution  
Calls attention to a situation that is potentially hazardous to people.  
Attention  
Alerts you to the possibility of damage to a program, device, system, or  
data.  
The following notices are the Dangers and Cautions used in this guide. Attention  
notices and Notes are located throughout this guide but are not listed here.  
DANGER  
<1> The construction of this printer provides extra protection against the  
risk of electric shock by grounding appropriate metal parts. The extra  
protection may not function unless the power cord is connected to a  
properly-grounded outlet. This printer has a grounding-type (3-wire) power  
cord because grounding is necessary. It is the responsibility of the  
customer or the person installing the printer to connect it to a  
properly-grounded outlet. Seek professional assistance before using an  
adapter or extension cord; such a device could interrupt the grounding  
circuit.  
If this printer is connected to an outlet that has been incorrectly connected  
to the building wiring, serious electric shock could result.  
DANGER  
<2> To prevent serious personal injury from electrical shock when  
connecting or disconnecting the interface cable, power off (O) the printer  
and disconnect the power cord from the power source at the receptacle.  
xvi 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DANGER  
<3> To avoid personal risk, do not install or reconfigure a communication  
port or a teleport during a lightning storm.  
CAUTION:  
<1> The printer (without optional features attached) weighs approximately  
24.9 kilograms (55 pounds). Before attempting to lift the printer, get help from  
another person.  
CAUTION:  
<2> The printhead may get hot during operation. Be careful when removing or  
replacing the ribbon cartridge.  
CAUTION:  
<3> The paper feed motor may get hot during operation. Avoid contact when  
installing or removing the front tractor.  
CAUTION:  
<4> Close the gear protector cover immediately after removing the front  
tractor.  
Do not plug in the power cord or power on (|) the printer until instructed to do  
so.  
Notices xvii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xviii 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preface  
The 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide describes the operating procedures for  
the IBM 4247 Printer Model A00. This guide should be read and used by those who  
install or operate the printer, or supervise printer operations.  
You can use the printer for many different types of applications. This guide includes  
the procedures necessary for you to put together step-by-step instructions tailored  
to your operation.  
Some editorial changes have been made to this User’s Guide to correct formatting  
and printing errors.  
How to Use this Guide  
The following list describes the contents of each chapter and each appendix:  
v “Chapter 1. Printer Setup” on page 1 provides information about unpacking,  
setting up, connecting, and operating your printer. You should complete all of this  
chapter to prepare the printer for your environment.  
v “Chapter 2. Considering Other Forms Paths” on page 33 describes how to select  
a different forms path.  
v “Chapter 3. Setting Up Another Forms Path” on page 39 describes setting up a  
forms path for your printer other than the default path.  
v “Chapter 4. Configuring Your Printer” on page 79 describes how to configure the  
printer for your operating environment.  
v “Chapter 5. Attaching Your Printer” on page 123 describes how to attach the  
printer to your computer.  
v “Chapter 6. Operator Tasks” on page 133 provides the information you need for  
ordering new supplies, replacing worn ribbons, and available printer options.  
v “Chapter 7. Resolving Printer Problems” on page 139 describes how to diagnose  
and solve printer problems. Always start your problem determination procedure  
with this chapter.  
v “Chapter 8. Supplies, Forms, and Cables” on page 151 provides information  
about ordering ribbon cartridges and cables, and specifying forms.  
v “Appendix A. Specifications” on page 159 contains general printer information and  
planning requirements. It also contains information on the electrical and  
environmental requirements, cabling information, and forms specifications.  
v “Appendix B. Optional Features” on page 169 lists the optional features available  
for your printer.  
v “Appendix C. Native 4247 Commands” on page 171 provides information about  
the 4247 Native commands.  
v “Appendix D. Personal Printer Data Stream (PPDS)” on page 183 contains the  
programming information for the Personal Printer Data Stream (PPDS)  
commands.  
v “Appendix E. Epson FX-1050 Data Stream” on page 215 contains the  
programming information for the Epson FX printers data stream commands.  
v “Appendix F. Code Pages” on page 245 lists all code pages supported by the  
4247 Printer Model A00.  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1995, 1998  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xix  
 
Related Publications  
The following publications provide information about the 4247 Printer. Contact your  
IBM marketing representative to order a publication.  
v 4247 Printer Model A00 Quick Reference Guide (SA24-4405). This guide shows  
the key functions and the available configuration values, and the process for  
setting the values. This item is often shipped with the printer.  
v 4247 Printer Models A00, 001, and 002 Maintenance Information Manual  
(SA24-4400). This manual provides detailed maintenance procedures for problem  
determination and repair and also contains a parts listing and illustrations of all  
replacement assemblies and detailed parts for the printer.  
v 4247 Printer Safety Notices (SA24-4406). This manual lists in English and other  
languages the safety information that is contained in the 4247 Printer customer  
and service documentation. This manual is not shipped with the printer in the  
United States.  
v 4247 Printer Automatic Sheet Feeder Guide (SA24-4407). This guide describes  
how to install and operate the optional Automatic Sheet Feeder (ASF). It is  
shipped with the ASF.  
v Network Print Server for Token-Ring Networks Administrator’s Guide  
(S246-0112). This guide provides information about configuring and connecting  
your printer to a token-ring network. This guide is often shipped with your  
Network Print Server.  
The following publication provides helpful information.  
v Advanced Function Printer: Cut Sheet Paper Reference for use with IBM  
Electrophotographic Printers (G544-3915).  
xx 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 1. Printer Setup  
Information Necessary for Printer Setup .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1
2
3
3
4
5
5
6
7
Unpacking Your Printer  
Setting Up Your Printer  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Removing Packing Materials  
Installing Operator Panel Overlay.  
Installing Wire Forms Guide.  
.
.
Locating Operator Accessible Areas and Controls .  
Operator Panel  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Operator Panel Display  
Audible Alarm .  
Status Indicators .  
Function Keys .  
Default Forms Path .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
7
7
9
.
13  
14  
14  
15  
17  
18  
19  
20  
20  
23  
24  
25  
25  
25  
26  
27  
27  
28  
29  
30  
32  
32  
Setting Up Front Push Forms Path (Default).  
Setting Front Push Tractor .  
Installing Front Push Tractor  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Installing Ribbon Cartridge .  
Connecting Electrical Power.  
Changing Display Language  
.
.
.
Stacking Forms for Front Push Forms Path .  
Loading Forms into Front Push Forms Path .  
Creating Print Test Sample (Self Test Printout-with Firmware Level) .  
Tearing Off Forms  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Choosing Tear-Off Option.  
Checking and Adjusting Tear-Off Position .  
Checking Tear-off Position  
Adjusting Tear-off Position  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Checking Configuration  
.
.
.
Printing Power On Configuration Setup  
Printing Program Configuration Setup .  
Parking Continuous Forms .  
Setting Up Manual Sheet Feed Path  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Optional Printer Stand .  
Summary  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Information Necessary for Printer Setup  
You should complete all of “Chapter 1. Printer Setup” to fully prepare your printer for  
your environment. You must continue with “Chapter 2. Considering Other Forms  
Paths” on page 33 if you need to set up a different forms path.  
To set up your printer, you will need the following information:  
v Is a forms path required other than the Front Push forms path?  
The 4247 Printer is shipped to you with the Front Push forms path set as the  
default. IBM recommends you consider this your primary forms path and use it  
whenever possible. If you do not intend to keep the Front Push as your primary  
forms path, “Chapter 2. Considering Other Forms Paths” on page 33 will guide  
you through making another selection, after you verify correct operation of the  
Front Push forms path and the Manual Sheet Feed.  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1995, 1998  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
 
You can configure the printer for any one of five forms paths; the Front Push, the  
Rear Push, the Dual Push, the Rear Pull, or the Push Pull forms paths.  
One forms tractor is supplied with the printer; this allows you to setup the Front  
Push, the Rear Push, or the Rear Pull forms path. If you are setting up either the  
Dual Push or the Push Pull forms path, install a second (optional) forms tractor.  
Contact your IBM marketing representative to order this option.  
v What type of interface cable was ordered?  
See “Ordering Signal Cable” on page 153.  
v Was an optional Automatic Sheet Feeder (ASF) ordered?  
For information about setting up or using the ASF, refer to the 4247 Printer  
Automatic Sheet Feeder Guide.  
v Was an optional printer stand ordered?  
If you ordered a printer stand, you will find it in a separate shipping container.  
See “Optional Printer Stand” on page 32 for more information about the optional  
printer stand. Contact your IBM marketing representative to order this option.  
CAUTION:  
<1> The printer (without optional features attached) weighs approximately  
24.9 kilograms (55 pounds). Before attempting to lift the printer, get help from  
another person.  
Unpacking Your Printer  
Check the list below as you unpack the shipping container. Contact your local IBM  
Branch Office if any of the following items or items listed on the printer order are  
missing.  
h Printer  
h One forms tractor (and optional second unit, if ordered)  
h Ribbon cartridge  
h 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide, SA24-4400  
h 4247 Printer Model A00 Quick Reference Guide, SA24-4405  
h Printer driver diskette  
h Interface cable (if ordered)  
h Power cord  
h Operator panel overlay  
h Wire forms guide (For Push forms paths)  
h 4247 Printer Safety Notices, SA24-4406 (outside USA)  
2
4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Additionally, you can order the following options. Contact your IBM marketing  
representative.  
v Automatic Sheet Feeder - Allows feeding of envelopes or from as many as three  
additional cut sheet forms paths  
v Printer stand - Especially helpful when using Dual Push forms path  
Setting Up Your Printer  
The next few steps guide you through removing all packing materials, installing the  
operator panel overlay, and installing the wire forms guide.  
Removing Packing Materials  
1. Remove the printer from the plastic bag.  
2. Place the printer on a flat work area, printer stand, or table. Ensure that you  
have access to both the front and the rear of the printer. See “Appendix A.  
Specifications” on page 159 for dimensions of the table and the clearances  
required around the printer.  
3. Lift the bottom edge of the front tractor cover into the open position.  
Chapter 1. Printer Setup  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. Remove the packing from each side in the front tractor area.  
Packing  
5. Close the front tractor cover.  
Installing Operator Panel Overlay  
To install the operator panel overlay, perform the following:  
1. Remove the paper from the back of the operator panel overlay.  
2. Align the bottom of the overlay; align each side.  
3. Press the overlay in place at the bottom below the keys and then continue  
working upwards until the overlay is pressed into place.  
4
4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
x x x x x  
x x x x x  
x x x x x x x x x  
x x x x  
x x x x x  
x
x
x x x x x  
x x x x  
x x x x  
x x x x  
x x x x x  
x x x x x x x x  
x x x x x  
x x x x x  
x x x x  
x x x x x  
x x x x x x  
x x x x x  
x x x x x x x x  
Installing Wire Forms Guide  
The wire forms guide helps direct the forms for stacking in the Front Push and Rear  
Push forms paths.  
1. Open the acoustic cover and tilt it all the way back until it lays flat on the top  
cover.  
2. Insert one end of the wire forms guide into the hole on the right hinge block of  
the acoustic cover. See orientation in Figure 1.  
3. Insert the other end of the wire forms guide into the hole on the left hinge block  
of the acoustic cover.  
Figure 1. Installing Wire Forms Guide  
4. Close the acoustic cover.  
Locating Operator Accessible Areas and Controls  
As with many IBM printers, a part that is colored blue or has a blue decal on it is for  
your use in operating the printer. These blue marks indicate tabs and levers that  
control settings and changes for the machine.  
Chapter 1. Printer Setup  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operator Panel  
The operator panel consists of 6 status indicators, a one-line 16-character display,  
12 function keys, and an audible alarm. Figure 2 on page 7 illustrates the operator  
panel.  
6
4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 2. Operator Panel  
Throughout this book, procedures instruct you to view the display on the operator  
panel, to view a status indicator, or to press a function key. The procedure then  
describes the correct response.  
Operator Panel Display  
The 16-character display shows several types of messages:  
v Information messages  
v Intervention required messages  
v Power On Configuration messages  
v Program Configuration messages  
v Error messages  
Audible Alarm  
The audible alarm beeps to let you know of a printer status condition or an error  
such as an end-of-forms condition, forms jam, or top cover open.  
Some operations you are asked to perform, such as opening the top cover when  
the printer is online, cause the alarm to sound. In this case, press the Online key  
before you open the top cover to prevent the alarm from sounding.  
You can set the audible alarm off in the Power On Configuration menu. See “Alarm”  
on page 102 for more information.  
Status Indicators  
Table 1 on page 8 describes the six status indicators shown in Figure 3 on page 8.  
Chapter 1. Printer Setup  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 3. Status Indicators  
Table 1. Operator Panel Status Indicators  
Status Indicators  
Continuously Lighted  
Blinking  
v
v
v
Printer READY  
Data in input buffer and Printer  
offline (not ready)  
Online  
Communicating with host  
Able to receive and print  
Off  
Condition 1 Printer disabled and no data in input buffer  
Condition 2 Printer in one of following modes:  
Online  
v
v
v
Power On Configuration  
Program Configuration  
Test and Diagnostic  
v
v
Bin empty  
Forms jam  
Auto Sheet Feed  
Selected  
Selected  
Selected  
Selected  
Selected  
(optional)  
v
v
Manual tray empty  
Forms jam  
Manual Sheet Feed  
Front Push  
v
v
End of forms (EOF)  
Forms jam  
v
v
End of forms (EOF)  
Forms jam  
Rear Pull  
v
v
End of forms (EOF)  
Forms jam  
Rear Push  
8
4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 1. Operator Panel Status Indicators (continued)  
Status Indicators  
Continuously Lighted  
Blinking  
In Push Pull mode, both indicators operate together (this is one  
forms path, with one set of forms loaded).  
Front Push and Rear  
Pull  
v
v
End of forms (EOF)  
Forms jam  
Push Pull selected  
(Push Pull)  
Function Keys  
2 beginning on page 10 describes the 12 function keys shown in Figure 4 and  
Figure 5 on page 10. You often will see them referred to as keys.  
The eight keys highlighted in Figure 4 have one function each.  
Figure 4. Eight Function Keys with One Function Each  
The four keys highlighted in Figure 5 on page 10 each have two functions.  
v The Micro ↑ key and Micro ↓ key position the forms up or down. The Font key  
allows font selection and the Pitch key allows pitch selection.  
Chapter 1. Printer Setup  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 5. Four Function Keys with Two Functions Each  
v The ↑, the ↓, the ←, and the → keys are active only during Power On Configuration  
mode or Program Configuration mode to allow menu scrolling. See “Chapter 4.  
Configuring Your Printer” on page 79 for configuration information.  
Table 2. Operator Panel Function Keys  
Function Key  
Description  
Condition 1 If forms are not present in the current path and the  
printer is in a wait condition (not ready), press Path to select a  
different forms paths.  
Condition 2 If forms are present and the printer is in a wait  
condition (not ready), tear off (at the tear bar) any continuous forms  
that have been printed, and press Park to park the continuous  
forms (or eject a single sheet, if loaded). The printer then enters an  
end-of-forms (EOF) condition. You now can press Path to select the  
different path modes according to the forms path configurations  
selected in the Power On Configuration menu.  
If the printer is ready or a wait condition exists, press Tear to:  
v
Move the forms up to the tear line for tearing (see “Tearing Off  
Forms” on page 24).  
v
Move a form backward to its initial position [after a 10 second  
(approximate) timeout occurs].  
Reduces the printing noise level by two or three decibels; however,  
the printer runs at half speed and throughput is reduced by one  
half.  
10 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 2. Operator Panel Function Keys (continued)  
Function Key  
Description  
Condition 1 Press Park, if continuous forms are loaded in the print  
area. The message 94 PARK:SURE? displays.  
Press Park again (within 3 seconds), to park the continuous forms  
that are in the Front Push, Rear Push, or Push Pull forms path or to  
eject the forms in the Rear Pull path.  
Before parking a form in the Front Push or Rear Push forms path,  
press Tear and then tear the form at the tear bar.  
Before parking a form in the Rear Pull or Push Pull forms paths,  
tear the form off at the perforation below the front tractor cover.  
Condition 2 If the printer is currently in Manual Sheet Feed mode,  
press Park to eject a single cut-sheet page. The message 91 EJECT  
FORM displays.  
Condition 1 and Condition 2  
If parking or ejecting does not result in clearing the forms jam  
sensor within 24 inches, forms movement is stopped and a 02  
FORMS JAM message displays. Press Online to clear the message.  
If you wish to leave the Park function, press Online again.  
Function 1 Micro ↑ Use this key for adjusting forms.  
Press this key. The message MICRO FEED UP displays and the forms  
move up in micro steps at an increasing speed (runs at a reduced  
speed when the cover is open and the printer is offline).  
Press and hold the Micro ↑ to process a continuous movement of  
the forms.  
For safety reasons, when the cover is open and the printer is  
offline, only Micro ↑ and Micro ↓ are operational.  
Function 2 ↑ Active only in Power On Configuration or Program  
Configuration mode.  
Press ↑ to scroll backward to the previous configuration menu  
items.  
Function 1 Font Use this key to select the available fonts (DP, DP  
Text, Courier, Gothic, OCR-A, or OCR-B) for printing.  
If you press Font while a job is printing, the current line finishes  
printing before the new font takes affect.  
If you select an available font which is not compatible with the pitch  
currently selected, the default pitch for that font is automatically  
selected.  
Function 2 ← Active only in Power On Configuration mode or  
Program Configuration mode.  
Press ← to scroll backward through the previous values of a  
selected configuration menu item.  
Chapter 1. Printer Setup 11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 2. Operator Panel Function Keys (continued)  
Function Key  
Description  
Function 1 Micro ↓ Press this key to adjust forms. The message  
MICRO FEED DOWN displays, and the forms move down in micro steps  
at increasing speed (reduced speed when the cover is open and  
the printer is offline).  
Hold down Micro ↓ to continuously feed forms.  
For safety reasons, when the cover is open and the printer is  
offline, only Micro ↑ and Micro ↓ are operational.  
Function 2 ↓ Active only in Power On Configuration mode or  
Program Configuration mode.  
Press ↓ to scroll forward to the next configuration menu item.  
Function 1 Pitch Press this key to select the available horizontal  
spacings (5 CPI, 6 CPI, 7.5 CPI, 8.5 CPI, 10 CPI, 12 CPI, 15 CPI,  
17.1 CPI, 20 CPI, or Prop) on the printer.  
If you press Pitch while a job is printing, the current line finishes  
printing before the new pitch value takes affect.  
If you select an available font which is not compatible with the pitch  
currently selected, the default pitch for that font is automatically  
selected.  
Function 2 →  
Active only in Power On Configuration mode or Program  
Configuration mode.  
Press → to scroll forward through the values of a selected  
configuration menu item.  
Condition 1 If the printer is ready and forms are not loaded, press  
Load/Form Feed to automatically load the forms according to the  
forms types selected in the Program Configuration menu.  
Condition 2 If the printer is ready and forms already are loaded,  
press Load/Form Feed to clear the forms path by ejecting the  
single sheet or execute a form feed on the continuous forms. If  
ejecting does not result in clearing the paper jam sensor within 24  
inches, a 02 FORMS JAM message displays.  
Press Online to clear the message.  
Condition 3 If the ASF option is installed and selected, and the  
forms path is not empty, press Load/Form Feed to eject the single  
form. If the forms path is empty, a new single sheet will be loaded.  
Advances the forms to the next printable line.  
Press and hold Line Feed to continuously feed forms. Release the  
key to stop feeding forms.  
12 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 2. Operator Panel Function Keys (continued)  
Function Key  
Description  
Condition 1 (power on initialization) Enters test mode and prints  
the self test printout.  
Condition 2 (test mode) Stops the self test printout.  
Condition 3 (wait)  
v
Makes the printer ready if no error condition appears on the  
display.  
v
v
Clears status messages from the display and turns off the alarm.  
If an EOF condition exists, prints the data buffer when forms are  
loaded.  
v
If Tear has been previously pressed, causes the forms to move  
backward from the tear position to the print line position.  
Condition 4 (ready)  
v
v
Takes the printer offline.  
If a job is printing, stops the printer after the line is printed.  
Condition 5 (Power On Configuration) Prints the bidirectional  
adjustment test pattern.  
Condition 6 (Program Configuration) Clears the input buffer, sends  
a break signal to the host, and displays a 99 RESET message.  
Condition 1 Press and hold this key while powering on (O) the  
printer to enter the Power On Configuration menu.  
Condition 2 If the printer is in a wait condition (Online indicator off)  
or ready without printing, press Menu/Enter to enter the Program  
Configuration menu.  
Condition 3  
If the printer is in Power On Configuration mode or Program  
Configuration mode, press this key to exit configuration mode.  
Default Forms Path  
When your printer was shipped, it was configured for the Front Push forms path.  
This is the default and preferred forms path. You install the forms tractor for this  
path, and also use it in this location for the Dual Push and the Push Pull forms  
paths.  
It is important that you verify that the Front Push forms path correctly feeds forms,  
and that the printer prints with good print quality before setting up any other forms  
path. Setting up this forms path first familiarizes you with setting and installing a  
forms tractor, correctly loading, stacking, and tearing forms, and installing a ribbon.  
After this verification, you maintain the printer with this forms path, or you may  
configure the printer for any one of four other forms paths. IBM recommends you  
use the Front Push forms path. See “Chapter 2. Considering Other Forms Paths” on  
page 33 to select a different forms path, and “Preparing Printer for Selected Forms  
Path” on page 44 set up a different forms path.  
Chapter 1. Printer Setup 13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The front forms-tractor and rear forms-tractors are interchangeable. Either forms  
tractor can be used in either location after you have set it for the forms path you  
have selected.  
Setting Up Front Push Forms Path (Default)  
Figure 6 shows the Front Push forms path with the Manual Sheet Feed forms path.  
Figure 6. Front Push Forms Path (with Manual Sheet Feed)  
Setting Front Push Tractor  
The Front Push forms tractor should be set to position (2), as shown in Figure 7 on  
page 15.  
If the tractor is set to position (1), perform the following:  
1. Hold the tractor face-down with the electrical connector tab on the right side,  
and pointing toward you.  
2. Pull the bottom release levers toward you with your finger tips and push the  
movable edge of the tractor down toward the flat surface with your thumbs or  
the palms of your hands (position 2).  
14 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 7. Setting the Front Push Tractor to Straight (Viewed From Bottom)  
Installing Front Push Tractor  
Install the tractor in the Front Push forms path, as follows:  
1. Ensure the printer is powered off (O).  
2. Lift the bottom edge of the front tractor cover into the open position.  
Figure 8. Opening Front Tractor Cover  
CAUTION:  
<3> The paper feed motor may get hot during operation. Avoid contact  
when installing or removing the front tractor.  
3. Rotate the hinged gear-protector cover forward and down. The cover must be  
below the motor screw or the tractor will not seat.  
Chapter 1. Printer Setup 15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 9. Opening Gear Protector Cover  
4. If it is in place, remove the (black protective) cap from the electrical connector  
on the tractor. Save this cap for future storage or shipping of the forms tractor.  
5. Stand facing the front of the printer, holding the forms tractor with the tractor  
doors facing up and the electrical connector tab on the right.  
6. With both hands supporting the tractor shaft, hold down the tractor release lever  
while gently pushing the forms tractor upward until the forms tractor clicks into  
place on both sides. Ensure the tractor release levers are locked into place. The  
electrical connector tab must be fully seated in the connector and the bottom of  
the forms tractor should be even with the base of the printer.  
Figure 10. Installing Front Tractor  
7. Close the front tractor cover.  
Your printer may have arrived with a second forms tractor. You will learn about  
installing and using this forms tractor after completing “Chapter 1. Printer Setup” on  
page 1.  
16 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing Ribbon Cartridge  
Note: IBM recommends that you use the IBM ribbon cartridge (Part Number  
1053685). To order ribbon cartridges, contact your place of printer purchase  
or call Lexmark at 1-800-438-2468.  
To install the ribbon cartridge, follow these steps:  
1. Remove the ribbon cartridge from the package. Locate the ribbon guide, snap  
arm, ribbon advance knob, and the ribbon mounting pins.  
2. Turn the ribbon advance knob in the direction of the arrow to take up any slack  
in the ribbon. If the ribbon does not move, contact your place of ribbon  
purchase to replace the ribbon cartridge.  
3. Ensure the printer is powered off (O).  
4. Open the top cover.  
5. Slide the printhead to the center of the printer.  
e61a5310  
Figure 11. Sliding the Printhead to the Center of the Printer  
6. With the snap arm raised higher than the ribbon lift assembly, insert the ribbon  
guide between the ribbon shield and the printhead. Position the snap arm with  
the small lever up onto the ribbon lift assembly. Push the snap arm down onto  
the ribbon lift assembly until it snaps into place.  
Chapter 1. Printer Setup 17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
7. Align the ribbon mounting pins on the left and right side of the ribbon cartridge  
with the slots in the cartridge supports. Snap the ribbon cartridge down into  
place.  
8. Turn the ribbon advance knob again in the direction of the arrow to take up  
slack in the ribbon.  
9. Slide the printhead back and forth to ensure that the ribbon guide runs freely  
along the ribbon.  
10. If the ribbon is not running freely, or to ensure you have installed the ribbon  
cartridge correctly, check that:  
a. The left and right ribbon mounting pins are securely snapped into the  
cartridge supports  
b. There are no twists or folds in the ribbon  
c. The ribbon is not catching on the printhead  
d. The ribbon moves when you turn the ribbon advance knob in the direction  
of the arrow. If the ribbon does not move, replace the ribbon cartridge.  
Contact your place of ribbon cartridge purchase.  
11. Close the top cover.  
You can read about removing a ribbon cartridge in “Removing Ribbon Cartridge” on  
page 133.  
Connecting Electrical Power  
Read the following safety information, and follow the steps for connecting electrical  
power to the printer.  
18 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1. The power switch is located on the lower left side of the printer. Ensure the  
printer is powered off (O). DANGER  
<1> The construction of this printer provides extra protection against  
the risk of electric shock by grounding appropriate metal parts. The  
extra protection may not function unless the power cord is connected  
to a properly-grounded outlet. This printer has a grounding-type (3-wire)  
power cord because grounding is necessary. It is the responsibility of  
the customer or the person installing the printer to connect it to a  
properly-grounded outlet. Seek professional assistance before using an  
adapter or extension cord; such a device could interrupt the grounding  
circuit.  
If this printer is connected to an outlet that has been incorrectly  
connected to the building wiring, serious electric shock could result.  
2. The power connector is located at the lower left rear of the printer. Connect the  
power cord to the power connector on the printer. Press firmly to ensure that the  
plug is securely seated.  
3. Plug the power cord into a properly-grounded electric receptacle.  
Changing Display Language  
The printer default language that appears in the operator panel display of your  
printer is English. You can change the language by following these steps:  
1. If the printer is powered on (|), power off (O) the printer.  
2. Enter Power On Configuration mode. Press and continue to hold Menu/Enter  
while powering on (|) the printer until (1) the message STARTING UP appears, (2)  
the boxes on the operator panel display are solidly filled in, and (3) the  
printhead stops. This takes about fifteen seconds. Do not release this key or  
press any other keys until this completes.  
3. Release Menu/Enter. The message PRINT OUT=NO displays.  
4. Press ↓ until the message FUNCTIONS displays.  
5. Press → and the message FRONT TEAR=NORM displays.  
6. Press ↓ until the message MENU=xxxxxxxx displays (where xxxxxxxx can be  
ENGLISH, ITALIANO, FRANCAIS, ESPANOL, DEUTSCH, PORTUGUES,  
DANSK, or NEDERLANDS).  
7. Press ← or → until the language you want to use displays.  
8. Press Menu/Enter to save the setting and exit Power On Configuration mode.  
Regardless of the language you select, STARTING UP always appears in English.  
Chapter 1. Printer Setup 19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Stacking Forms for Front Push Forms Path  
Before you load forms into the printer you must consider the stacking of forms after  
they pass through the printer. See Figure 12 for forms stacking recommendation for  
the Front Push forms path.  
The top of the input forms stack must be lower than the bottom of the printer when  
parking forms.  
Consider ordering the optional printer stand designed specifically for your printer.  
Contact your IBM marketing representative for information.  
Figure 12. Stacking Forms for Front Push. See “Optional Printer Stand” on page 32 if your  
printer uses the optional printer stand. Consider ordering this option to serve as a shelf for  
the forms stack.  
Loading Forms into Front Push Forms Path  
The term “loading forms” can have two interpretations:  
v Physically putting the forms into the forms tractor  
v Using the functions of the Load/Form Feed key  
Here you will physically load the forms into the tractor, and then use one function of  
the Load/Form Feed key to move the form to the print position. See “Function  
Keys” on page 9 for a more complete description of Load/Form Feed.  
Load the forms as follows:  
1. Ensure the printer is powered off (O).  
2. Open the front tractor cover to reveal the front forms-tractor.  
3. Move the tractor locking levers to vertical to unlock the tractors.  
4. Move the right tractor to the extreme right.  
5. Move the left tractor to the tractor alignment mark on the tractor shaft. (This  
controls the left print edge.)  
6. Pull the left locking lever forward to lock the left tractor in place at the  
alignment mark.  
20 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
7. Move the forms supports to be approximately equidistant between each other  
and the tractors.  
8. Lift the inner edge of each tractor to open the tractor doors.  
9. Place the left edge of the form on the left tractor pins so that the form engages  
about three left tractor pins. Close the left tractor door.  
10. Move the right tractor to the left and under the forms until the holes along the  
right edge of the form engage the same number of pins on the right tractor.  
Ensure that the right edge of the forms is under the forms jam sensor. Close  
the right tractor door.  
11. If necessary, slide the right tractor either left or right to remove any slack in the  
form, ensuring that the left and right tractor pins are centered in the holes of  
the forms. Hold the right tractor in place. Pull the locking lever forward to lock  
the right tractor.  
Chapter 1. Printer Setup 21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
12. Close the front tractor cover.  
13. Power on (|) the printer.  
22 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14. After the printer warms up, if the Front Push indicator is not blinking, press  
Path until the Front Push indicator is blinking and the message  
01 END OF FORMS displays.  
15. Press Load/Form Feed to feed the forms.  
16. Press Online to make the printer ready.  
Creating Print Test Sample (Self Test Printout-with Firmware Level)  
Note: This pattern is intended for 14-inch forms. For optimum analysis, if available  
load full-width [14 in. (355.6 mm)] forms before printing the Print Test  
Sample.  
The Print Test function allows you to print a sample. You can check printer  
operations and print quality by running and reviewing this “Self Test Printout.” You  
also can identify the level of firmware that is installed in your printer. The Print Test  
can be printed using any forms path.  
1. Ensure that the printer is powered off (O).  
2. Press and continue to hold Online while powering on (|) the printer until (1) the  
message STARTING UP appears, (2) the boxes on the operator panel display are  
solidly filled in, and (3) the printhead stops. This takes about fifteen seconds. Do  
not release this key or press any other keys until this completes.  
3. Release Online. The message PRINT TEST displays. The Print Test will start  
printing. Allow the test to fill at least one page.  
4. Press Online to stop the Print Test after a full page has printed, or when you  
feel you have a large enough printout to analyze.  
Once the print test stops, compare your printout with the sample illustrated on the  
next page. If you notice unsatisfactory results, see “Chapter 7. Resolving Printer  
Problems” on page 139.  
Save this printout for future reference.  
Chapter 1. Printer Setup 23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Tearing Off Forms  
The forms can be advanced to position the perforation at the serrated, top-cover  
tear line on the tear bar either automatically or by pressing Tear. Pressing Tear  
moves continuous forms up to the top cover tear line and allows you to tear off your  
printout. The forms move back to the print position after a 10-second delay.  
24 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Note: If the printer is configured for FRONT TEAR=NO or REAR TEAR=NO, you  
cannot back up the forms to park them. Break the forms at a perforation  
ahead of where they enter the printer. Press Park twice, and the forms will  
move forward until ejected from the printer.  
Choosing Tear-Off Option  
You can choose one of three tear-off options for the Front Push and the Rear Push  
forms paths.  
NORM (default)  
Pressing TEAR moves the form to the tear line. After a 10-second  
delay the forms will move back into the printer.  
AUTO  
NO  
When printing finishes, the forms automatically move up to the  
tear-off line. When the next print job arrives, the forms move back  
into the printer.  
Select NO for forms that should not be moved in a reverse  
direction through the printer, such as forms with attached labels or  
forms with overlays. Choosing NO disables the Tear key.  
Note: Setting this option modifies how forms park. See “Parking Continuous  
Forms” on page 29.  
To change or check the Tear Mode, do the following:  
1. Ensure the printer is powered off (O).  
2. Press and continue to hold Menu/Enter while powering on (|) the printer until  
(1) the message STARTING UP appears, (2) the boxes on the operator panel  
display are solidly filled in, and (3) the printhead stops. This takes about fifteen  
seconds. Do not release this key or press any other keys until this completes.  
3. After start-up is complete, release Menu/Enter and the message PRINT OUT=NO  
displays.  
4. Press ↓ until the message FUNCTIONS displays.  
5. Press → until the message FRONT TEAR=xxxx or REAR TEAR=xxxx displays. xxxx  
can be NORM, AUTO, or NO. If you want to select a value other than the one  
displayed, press ← or →.  
6. To exit from Power On Configuration, press Menu/Enter. Your new value is  
stored. The printer may take a few seconds to accept a change.  
Checking and Adjusting Tear-Off Position  
When the perforation on a form aligns with the serrated edge on the top cover, the  
forms will break easily without creasing or leaving ragged edges. If the top of the  
form that returns into the printer is ragged, ripped, torn, or creased, it may cause a  
jam.  
Checking Tear-off Position  
To check the tear-off position, follow these steps:  
1. Load forms.  
2. Press Load/Form Feed to feed one form.  
3. Press Tear to move the forms up to the top cover tear line.  
Chapter 1. Printer Setup 25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. Open the acoustic cover, grasp one side of the form, pull it toward you, and  
break the perforation against the serrated edge of the top cover.  
Figure 13. Tear-Off Location. Shown With 11-Inch Long Forms  
The perforation should align with the top cover tear line, and the tear should be  
clean.  
5. Close the acoustic cover.  
Adjusting Tear-off Position  
If, after checking the tear-off position, the perforation does not align with the top  
cover tear line or if the tear is not clean, adjust the tear-off position.  
1. Press Menu/Enter and PRINT OUT=NO displays.  
2. Press ↓ and TEAR POS. ADJUST displays.  
3. Press → and FRONT PATH=XXX displays. To adjust the tear-off position higher,  
press →, increasing XXX. To adjust the tear-off position lower, press ←,  
decreasing XXX.  
4. If your printer uses the Rear Push forms path, press ↓ and REAR PATH=XXX  
displays. To adjust the tear-off position higher, press →, increasing XXX. To  
adjust the tear-off position lower, press ←, decreasing XXX.  
To save your change:  
1. Press Menu/Enter and STORE=QUIT displays.  
26 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2. Press → and STORE=SAVE displays.  
3. Press Menu/Enter again to save your change.  
To quit without saving your change:  
1. Press Menu/Enter. STORE=QUIT displays.  
2. Press Menu/Enter to quit without saving any changes.  
Checking Configuration  
Printer configuration consists of Power On Configuration and Program  
Configuration. “Chapter 4. Configuring Your Printer” on page 79 discusses printer  
configuration.  
If you change the forms path, you will need to configure the printer for your selected  
forms path. Forms path configuration is discussed under the appropriate forms path  
information in “Chapter 3. Setting Up Another Forms Path” on page 39.  
There are many options to both Power On Configuration and Program  
Configuration. You should print and save the current configuration. See “Chapter 4.  
Configuring Your Printer” on page 79 for instructions about changing configuration  
items.  
Printing Power On Configuration Setup  
IBM recommends that you print the Power On Configuration at initial setup and  
after you have changed your configuration. Save this printout for future reference.  
To print the Power On configuration:  
1. Power off (O) the printer.  
2. Press and continue to hold Menu/Enter while powering on (|) the printer until  
(1) the message STARTING UP appears, (2) the boxes on the operator panel  
display are solidly filled in, and (3) the printhead stops. This takes about fifteen  
seconds. Do not release this key or press any other keys until this completes.  
3. After start-up is complete, release Menu/Enter and the message PRINT OUT=NO  
displays.  
4. To print the current settings on the printer, press →. The message PRINT OUT=YES  
displays and the Power On Configuration setup printout starts printing. Your  
printout will look similar to the sample in Figure 14 on page 28. This sample also  
depicts the default settings.  
Chapter 1. Printer Setup 27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 14. Power On Configuration Printout  
Printing Program Configuration Setup  
IBM recommends that you print the Program Configuration at initial setup and after  
you have changed your configuration. Save this printout for future reference.  
You can save the configuration settings for as many as five forms paths. To print  
the Program Configuration:  
1. Press Menu/Enter. The printer goes offline, and the message PRINT OUT=NO  
displays.  
2. To print the settings on the printer, press →. The message PRINT OUT=YES  
displays and the setup for the Program Configuration is printed.  
Your printout will look similar to the sample in Figure 15 on page 29. This sample  
printout shows three forms paths configured, and also depicts the default settings.  
As shown in the sample, Rear Push is included on your printout even though your  
printer may not be set up for the Rear Push forms path.  
28 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 15. Program Configuration Printout  
After printing the Program Configuration, the display returns to PRINT OUT=NO. Press  
Menu/Enter twice to exit configuration mode.  
Parking Continuous Forms  
Parking forms means that a forms type unloads from the print area, but still remains  
on the tractors. When the forms in one forms path are parked, another forms path  
or the Manual Sheet Feed can be selected, and the forms in that path will be  
loaded in the print area. This can be configured to occur automatically, but you must  
have performed the tear off. See “Checking and Adjusting Tear-Off Position” on  
page 25.  
Note: For successful forms parking, the top of the input forms stack must be lower  
than bottom of the printer. See Figure 12 on page 20.  
To park a forms type, follow these steps:  
1. Press Tear. Tear off the forms at the top cover tear line.  
2. Press Park and the message 94 PARK:SURE? displays.  
3. Press Park immediately again to park the form.  
Note: If you set TEAR=NO, tear off the forms at the forms-input side of the  
printer. When you press the Park key, the message 92 EJECT:SURE?  
displays. Press PARK to eject the forms.  
Chapter 1. Printer Setup 29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
For additional information, see “Parking One Continuous Form and Loading Another  
(Dual Push)” on page 59.  
Setting Up Manual Sheet Feed Path  
The 4247 Printer provides the ability to print on either single-part or multiple-part,  
cut-sheet forms using the Manual Sheet Feed forms path. Manual Sheet Feed can  
be used with the Front Push, the Rear Push, and the Dual Push forms paths. See  
Figure 18 on page 41 for a depiction of the various paths.  
The Manual Sheet Feed also allows you to overlay a single sheet on top of  
continuous forms from another forms path, if your total page count does not exceed  
8 parts. See “Choosing a Forms Path for Special Forms” on page 35 for limitations.  
Setup the Manual Sheet Feed as follows:  
1. Insert your thumb into the center opening and pull down to open the Manual  
Sheet Feed tray.  
2. Press Path until the Manual Sheet Feed indicator is blinking and the message  
06 MANUAL FEED displays.  
3. Move the left cut-sheet paper guide to the left alignment mark. Move the right  
cut-sheet paper guide to the extreme right. You will not use the right cut-sheet  
paper guide on this printer model.  
30 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. Push the paper into the printer until it covers the black patch on the input shelf.  
Ensure the paper is straight against the left cut-sheet paper guide (shown as  
shaded in the drawing).  
5. To verify printer operation, print the Program Configuration as described in  
“Printing Program Configuration Setup” on page 28.  
Chapter 1. Printer Setup 31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. With Automatic Load set to YES in the Power On Configuration menu, after a  
three-second timeout the paper is fed automatically into the printer, and your job  
is printed.  
7. When you are finished using the Manual Sheet Feed, return to Front Push by  
pressing Path until the Front Push indicator is blinking, and the message 01  
END OF FORMS displays.  
Optional Printer Stand  
The optional printer stand supports the printer and provides easier access to some  
of the forms paths.  
Load the forms as depicted in Figure 16. Input Front depicts where you load and  
stack forms for the Front Push, Push Pull, and Dual Push forms paths. Input Rear  
depicts where you load and stack forms for the Rear Push and Dual Push forms  
paths. The Output is the same for Input Front and Input Rear.  
Input  
Front  
Output  
Input  
Rear  
Figure 16. Optional Printer Stand  
Summary  
By completing this chapter, you have set up your printer to use the Front Push  
forms path and the Manual Sheet Feed.  
If you are setting up the printer for a different forms path, proceed to “Chapter 2.  
Considering Other Forms Paths” on page 33.  
If your printer will use only the Front Push forms path with the Manual Sheet Feed,  
and the factory default configuration is the correct choice for your printer, go to  
“Chapter 5. Attaching Your Printer” on page 123 to learn how to attach the printer to  
your computer.  
See “Chapter 4. Configuring Your Printer” on page 79 to learn about changing the  
printer configuration.  
32 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 2. Considering Other Forms Paths  
Choosing Other Forms Paths .  
Choosing a Forms Path for Your Needs  
Choosing a Forms Path for Special Forms  
Other Considerations for Forms .  
Description of Each Forms Path .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
33  
34  
35  
35  
36  
36  
36  
36  
37  
37  
37  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Front Push Forms Path  
Rear Push Forms Path  
Dual Push Forms Paths .  
Rear Pull Forms Path .  
Push Pull Forms Path .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Manual Sheet Feed .  
.
Choosing Other Forms Paths  
IBM recommends you use the Front Push forms path whenever possible. A second  
choice is the Rear Push. If the Front Push forms path does not meet your needs,  
you can set up and configure the printer for other forms paths. You use a method  
similar to that used when you set up the Front Push forms path in “Chapter 1.  
Printer Setup” on page 1.  
“Chapter 2. Considering Other Forms Paths” helps you choose a forms path other  
than the default Front Push forms path. “Chapter 3. Setting Up Another Forms Path”  
on page 39 helps you set up that forms path.  
You may configure the printer for any one of five forms paths, plus the Manual  
Sheet Feed path with the Front Push, the Rear Push, or the Dual Push paths (see  
“Preparing Printer for Selected Forms Path” on page 44). Figure 17 on page 34  
illustrates the five forms paths and the Manual Sheet Feed.  
Each forms path is shown with the necessary tractors installed, and where the  
forms input and output stacks should be located.  
Notes:  
1. The forms tractors are interchangeable between push and pull forms paths, and  
front and rear forms paths.  
2. The paper bail is installed for four of the five forms paths; it must be removed  
for the Rear Pull forms path.  
3. The Manual Sheet Feed can be used with three of the five forms paths.  
4. The adjustable edge of each pin feed assembly must be set to properly guide  
the forms in that forms path.  
5. IBM recommends you test the performance in the printer of any forms you  
intend to use.  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1995, 1998  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
33  
 
Figure 17. 4247 Printer Forms Paths  
For the Dual Push forms paths or the Push Pull forms path, you will need to have  
ordered and installed the optional, second forms tractor. Also consider ordering the  
optional printer stand (see “Optional Printer Stand” on page 32). Contact your IBM  
marketing representative for details or to order either item.  
Choosing a Forms Path for Your Needs  
Note: IBM recommends that whenever possible you use the Front Push forms path  
for all your printing needs.  
You might select a forms path based on other operating needs. Use the following  
table when you are selecting a path. See “Chapter 8. Supplies, Forms, and Cables”  
on page 151 for information about forms weights and thicknesses.  
Table 3. Considerations For Choosing a Path  
Front Rear  
Push Push  
Rear  
Pull  
Push  
Pull  
Manual Sheet  
Feed  
Function  
Comments  
Autoload  
X
X
X
X
Document on Demand  
(DOD) / Tear Off  
Tear Off Adjustment  
X
X
X
X
Dual Path Forms Input  
Requires 2 tractors. IBM  
recommends optional Printer  
Stand.  
Park  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
*
Requires manual tear off  
Quiet Key  
X
X
X
X
X
X
Reduces throughput by 50%  
AFTA  
Top of Form  
Vertical Adjustment  
Horizontal Adjustment  
ASF Mountable  
Notes:  
X
X
* See note 1.  
1. IBM recommends you remove the ASF before loading forms into the Rear Push forms path.  
2. To use the Push Pull or Dual Push forms paths you must install the optional, second forms tractor.  
34 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Choosing a Forms Path for Special Forms  
Note: IBM recommends selecting first the Front Push then the Rear Push as your  
choices for forms paths.  
The 4247 Printer can print on various sizes, dimensions, and weights of forms. IBM  
recommends you test all forms for your application before ordering large quantities.  
Use the following table when you are choosing which path to use for special forms  
or paper.  
Table 4. Selecting Forms Types  
Front  
Rear  
Push  
Rear  
Pull  
Push  
Pull  
Manual Sheet  
Feed  
Forms Type  
Push  
Comments  
Black-Back Forms  
Labels  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
For Front Push, do not use Park  
1-Part to 4-Part  
5-Part to 8-Part  
Greater than 21 lb  
X
Greater than 0.014 in.  
thick  
Prenumbered Forms  
Critical Registration  
X
X
X
X
Easiest to load in Front Push.  
Set PERF SAFE=YES for 8-part  
forms  
Form stock with stickon  
card or form, or forms of  
varying thickness  
X
X
If multiple thicknesses on each  
sheet, remove Paper Bail  
Note: This printer does not support the following types of forms:  
Greater than 8-part forms  
Greater than 40 lb paper  
Greater than 0.64 mm (0.025 in.) total forms thickness  
Less than 15 lb paper  
Less than 0.08 mm (0.003 in.) paper thickness  
Other Considerations for Forms  
Consider the following items, unless Table 3 on page 34 or Table 4 provides other  
direction.  
v IBM recommends you test the Park function when you intend to run multiple-part  
forms. If you notice forms feed problems, disable the Park function, and use the  
Push Pull forms path.  
v When your printer is loaded with different forms in the Front Push and the Rear  
Push tractors, your job (or the operator) can select the desired source and  
alternate between the two paths. The operator will need to tear off the forms for  
the path from which the printer is alternating.  
v See “Chapter 8. Supplies, Forms, and Cables” on page 151 for recommended  
paper weight and thickness.  
Chapter 2. Considering Other Forms Paths 35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v For forms stacking convenience, consider ordering the optional printer stand. See  
“Optional Printer Stand” on page 32, or contact your IBM marketing  
representative to order.  
v Consider the following when using the optional Automatic Sheet Feeder:  
– You cannot use Rear Pull or Push Pull with the optional Automatic Sheet  
Feeder installed.  
– To improve access, remove the ASF when loading the Rear Push forms path.  
Description of Each Forms Path  
Use the following information and the information in “Choosing a Forms Path for  
Your Needs” on page 34 and “Choosing a Forms Path for Special Forms” on  
page 35 to help you select an alternate forms path for your forms and needs.  
Front Push Forms Path  
The Front Push forms path is the default  
forms path that you set up in “Default Forms  
Path” on page 13.  
Rear Push Forms Path  
Dual Push Forms Paths  
The Dual Push forms paths is a combination  
of the Front Push and the Rear Push forms  
paths. This provides two paths into which the  
forms can be loaded. You can alternate  
printing between the two paths.  
36 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Rear Pull Forms Path  
Push Pull Forms Path  
Manual Sheet Feed  
The Push Pull forms path is a combination of  
the Front Push and the Rear Pull forms  
paths. Unlike the Dual Push paths into which  
you can load two forms, the Push Pull forms  
path is one path.  
Manual Sheet Feed can be used with the Front Push, the Rear Push, and the Dual  
Push forms paths. It is shown here in use with the Dual Push forms path, which is a  
combination of the Front Push and the Rear Push forms paths.  
Chapter 2. Considering Other Forms Paths 37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
38 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3. Setting Up Another Forms Path  
Summarizing Forms Path Set Up .  
Changing to a Different Forms Path .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
39  
41  
42  
42  
42  
42  
43  
44  
44  
46  
47  
48  
48  
50  
52  
53  
53  
54  
55  
57  
58  
59  
59  
59  
60  
60  
61  
63  
64  
70  
71  
71  
72  
Identifying Existing Forms Path  
Identifying New Forms Path .  
.
.
.
Removing Existing Forms Tractor.  
Removing Front Forms Tractor.  
Removing Rear Forms Tractor .  
Preparing Printer for Selected Forms Path  
Setting Forms Guide Deflector .  
Setting Push-Pull Selector  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Removing or Installing Paper Bail.  
Removing Paper Bail .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Installing Paper Bail.  
.
.
Setting Forms Tractors.  
Setting Up and Configuring Front Push Forms Path .  
Setting Up Rear Push Forms Path .  
Installing Rear Push Tractor.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Configuring Forms Path for Rear Push .  
Loading Forms For Rear Push .  
Setting Up Dual Push Forms Paths .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
Preparing Dual Push Forms Paths .  
Configuring Printer for Linking Dual Push .  
Parking One Continuous Form and Loading Another (Dual Push) .  
Parking Continuous Forms .  
Switching the Forms Path  
Setting Up Rear Pull Forms Path .  
Installing Rear Pull Tractor .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Configuring Forms Path for Rear Pull .  
Loading Forms For Rear Pull .  
Setting Up Push Pull Forms Path.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Installing Push Pull Tractors.  
.
Configuring Forms Path for Push Pull .  
Loading Forms For Push Pull .  
.
.
.
Summarizing Forms Path Set Up  
Table 5 summarizes the settings for all forms paths. See Figure 18 on page 41 to  
help you understand the numbers used in Table 5. The remainder of this chapter  
describes the settings for all the forms paths except for the Front Push and Manual  
Sheet Feed which you read about in “Chapter 1. Printer Setup” on page 1.  
Table 5. Review of Forms Paths Settings  
Forms Guide  
Deflector  
Push-Pull  
Selector  
Forms Path  
Paper Bail  
Forms Tractor  
Front Push  
Rear Push  
Open  
Open  
Push  
Push  
Installed  
Installed  
2
2
Rear, 2  
Dual Push  
Rear Pull  
Open  
Push  
Pull  
Installed  
Front, 2  
1
Closed  
Not installed  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1995, 1998  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
39  
 
Table 5. Review of Forms Paths Settings (continued)  
Forms Guide  
Deflector  
Push-Pull  
Selector  
Forms Path  
Paper Bail  
Forms Tractor  
Rear, 1  
Push-Pull  
Manual  
Closed  
Pull  
Installed  
Installed  
Front, 2  
—*  
Open  
—*  
Note: * Your choice is not affected by these settings.  
Table 6 summarizes the configuration settings for all the forms paths.  
Table 6. Review of Configuration Settings  
Press Path Key  
Until Indicator is  
Blinking for:  
Power on Configuration Menu  
Forms Path Setting  
PULL=  
SEQUENCE  
Front Push  
Rear Push  
No  
No  
None  
None  
Front Push  
Rear Push  
None if different  
forms in each path  
Front Push or  
Rear Push  
Dual Push  
No  
FR+RR if same forms  
in each path  
Rear Pull  
Push-Pull  
Manual  
Yes  
Push+Pull  
—*  
None  
None  
—*  
Rear Pull  
Rear Pull and  
Front Push  
Manual Sheet Feed  
Note: * The setting you choose is not affected by the value in this category.  
40 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 18. Tractors and Forms Paths  
Changing to a Different Forms Path  
To change the forms path, you will perform the following tasks:  
1. Identify the existing forms path (see “Identifying Existing Forms Path” on  
page 42).  
2. Identify the new forms path (see “Identifying New Forms Path” on page 42).  
3. Remove the existing forms tractor, if necessary (see “Removing Existing Forms  
Tractor” on page 42).  
4. Prepare the new forms path (see “Preparing Printer for Selected Forms Path” on  
page 44).  
Chapter 3. Setting Up Another Forms Path 41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If your printer has an optional Automatic Sheet Feeder (ASF) installed, see the  
4247 Printer Automatic Sheet Feeder Guide for any information concerning this  
option. Figure 19 illustrates the Automatic Sheet Feature.  
Figure 19. Automatic Sheet Feeder  
Identifying Existing Forms Path  
Figure 20 illustrates the five forms paths and the Manual Sheet Feed. It also depicts  
the forms tractors used in each forms path. Notice that the Manual Sheet Feed can  
be used only with the Front Push, Rear Push, and Dual Push forms paths.  
Figure 20. Forms Paths with Forms Tractor Locations  
Identifying New Forms Path  
If you have not selected a forms path, see “Chapter 2. Considering Other Forms  
Paths” on page 33.  
Removing Existing Forms Tractor  
If you need to remove a forms tractor, go to the appropriate topic listed below:  
Removing Front Forms Tractor  
1. Power off (O) the printer.  
42 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2. Open the front tractor cover.  
CAUTION:  
<3> The paper feed motor may get hot during operation. Avoid contact when  
installing or removing the front forms tractor.  
3. While holding both sides of the forms tractor by the round shaft, release the  
lever on each side of the forms tractor. Lift out the forms tractor.  
CAUTION:  
<4> Close the gear protector cover immediately after removing the front  
forms tractor.  
4. Close the gear protector cover and the front tractor cover.  
5. Reinstall the black protective cap on the electrical connector if you are not  
installing this forms tractor into the printer. Store the forms tractor.  
Removing Rear Forms Tractor  
1. Power off (O) the printer.  
2. Open the top cover and the forms guide.  
3. While holding both sides of the forms tractor by the round shaft, release the  
lever on each side of the forms tractor. Lift out the forms tractor.  
Chapter 3. Setting Up Another Forms Path 43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. Close the forms guide and the top cover.  
5. Reinstall the black protective cap on the electrical connector if you are not  
installing this forms tractor into the printer. Store the forms tractor.  
Preparing Printer for Selected Forms Path  
You must perform the following procedures for the forms path you have chosen:  
1. “Setting Forms Guide Deflector”  
2. “Setting Push-Pull Selector” on page 46  
3. “Removing or Installing Paper Bail” on page 47  
4. “Setting Forms Tractors” on page 50  
Setting Forms Guide Deflector  
See Table 7 for the correct setting for your selected forms path.  
Table 7. Setting the Forms Guide Deflector  
Front Push  
with Manual with Manual with Manual  
Rear Push  
Dual Push  
Rear Pull  
Push Pull  
Forms Guide  
Deflector  
Open  
Open  
Open  
Closed  
Closed  
Set the forms guide deflector as follows:  
1. Press Online to take the printer offline.  
2. Open the top cover and the forms guide (see Figure 21 on page 45).  
44 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 21. Forms Guide  
Figure 22 on page 46 shows the two settings for the forms guide deflector. Use  
the open position for push, and the closed position for pull (see Table 7 on  
page 44).  
Chapter 3. Setting Up Another Forms Path 45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 22. Forms Guide Deflector  
3. Grasp the forms guide deflector with one hand and the plastic rib on the forms  
guide with the other hand.  
4. While pulling the forms guide deflector and the plastic rib apart, move first the  
right side then the left side of the forms guide deflector to be either above or  
below the metal pins. The correct position is noted in Table 7 on page 44.  
Figure 22 shows the forms guide deflector being moved from the closed (pull)  
position to the open (push) position.  
5. Close the forms guide and the top cover.  
Setting Push-Pull Selector  
See Table 8 for the correct setting you will make for your selected forms path.  
Table 8. Setting the Push-Pull Selector  
Rear Push  
with Manual with Manual  
Dual Push  
Rear Pull  
Push Pull  
Push-Pull  
Selector  
Push  
Push  
Push  
Pull  
Pull  
46 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 23. The Push-Pull Selector. The arrows and words “Push” and “Pull” are provided  
here for clarity.  
Set the Push-Pull selector as follows:  
1. Press Online to take the printer offline.  
2. Open the top cover and the forms guide, and locate the Push Pull selector. Use  
Table 8 on page 46 to help you set the selector.  
Push position—Slide the Push-Pull selector down and to the rear. Ensure that  
the upper and the lower gears are correctly positioned, as shown for push.  
Pull position—Slide the Push-Pull selector up and to the front. Ensure that the  
upper and the lower gears are correctly positioned, as shown for pull.  
3. Close the forms guide and the top cover.  
Removing or Installing Paper Bail  
See Table 9 to determine if the paper bail should be installed or not installed for  
your selected forms path.  
Table 9. Installing or Not Installing the Paper Bail  
Front Push  
with Manual with Manual with Manual  
Rear Push  
Dual Push  
Rear Pull  
Push Pull  
Paper Bail  
Installed Installed Installed  
Not Installed  
Installed  
Chapter 3. Setting Up Another Forms Path 47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Removing Paper Bail  
1. Open the top cover and the forms guide.  
2. Remove the ribbon cartridge. See “Removing Ribbon Cartridge” on page 133.  
3. Move the printhead to the far right.  
4. Grasp the paper bail and rotate it toward the front of the printer until it snaps  
loose. Some force is required.  
Figure 24. Rotating the Paper Bail  
5. Using care not to damage the thin plastic strip on the paper bail, lift the paper  
bail up and out of the printer.  
Figure 25. Removing the Paper Bail  
6. Install the ribbon cartridge. See “Installing Ribbon Cartridge” on page 17.  
7. Close the forms guide and the top cover.  
8. Store the paper bail. You may need to reinstall the paper bail if you change the  
forms path.  
Installing Paper Bail  
1. Press Online to take the printer offline.  
2. Open the top cover and forms guide.  
3. Remove the ribbon. (See “Removing Ribbon Cartridge” on page 133.)  
4. Move the printhead to the far right.  
5. Hold the paper bail with the plastic strip toward you. Rotate the paper bail so  
the plastic strip is pointing down.  
48 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6. Using care not to damage the plastic strip on the paper bail, insert the ends of  
the bail into the printer frame as shown in Figure 26.  
Figure 26. Installing the Paper Bail  
7. Rotate the paper bail, moving the top toward the rear, as shown in Figure 27.  
Ensure the paper bail snaps into place.  
e61z5303  
Figure 27. Rotating the Paper Bail into Position  
8. Ensure that the paper bail (level 1 or level 2) is installed correctly. Press on the  
areas that are identified by arrows in Figure 28 on page 50. If your printer has  
a level 1 paper bail, ensure the paper bail is snapped into the closed position.  
See Figure 28 on page 50.  
Chapter 3. Setting Up Another Forms Path 49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 28. Correct Installation of Either a Level 1 or a Level 2 Paper Bail  
9. Install the ribbon cartridge. See “Installing Ribbon Cartridge” on page 17.  
10. Close the forms guide and the top cover.  
Setting Forms Tractors  
See Table 10 and Figure 29 on page 51 for the correct tractor settings for each  
forms path.  
Table 10. Setting the Tractors. Numbers in Table Match Numbers in Figure 29 on page 51.  
Front Push  
with Manual with Manual with Manual  
Rear Push  
Dual Push  
Rear Pull  
Push Pull  
2 (Front  
Push) and  
(Rear Push)  
1 (Rear Pull)  
2 (Front  
Tractor  
Settings  
2
2
1
Push)  
Set the forms tractors to Position 1 or Position 2 for your forms path, as shown in  
Figure 29 on page 51.  
50 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 29. Setting Forms Tractors  
If a forms tractor is not set to the desired position, perform the following:  
1. With the forms tractor positioned as shown in Figure 29, move the release  
levers in the direction indicated and move the edge of the forms tractor to the  
new position.  
2. Ensure that the forms tractor fully locks into position. Position 1 is for the Rear  
Pull forms tractor in either the Rear Pull or Push Pull mode.  
Next, you will perform the following tasks for your selected forms path.  
1. Install the necessary tractors.  
2. Configure the printer for the selected forms path.  
3. Load your forms.  
4. Print the configuration for future reference and to verify printer operation.  
Chapter 3. Setting Up Another Forms Path 51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 11 directs you to information about the forms path of your choice.  
Table 11. Information About Your Selected Forms Path  
Forms Path  
Front Push  
Rear Push  
Dual Push  
Rear Pull  
Where to Find Your Next Task  
“Setting Up and Configuring Front Push Forms Path”  
“Setting Up Rear Push Forms Path” on page 53  
“Setting Up Dual Push Forms Paths” on page 57  
“Setting Up Rear Pull Forms Path” on page 60  
“Setting Up Push Pull Forms Path” on page 70  
Push Pull  
Setting Up and Configuring Front Push Forms Path  
Figure 30 shows the Front Push forms path with Manual Sheet Feed.  
Figure 30. Front Push and Manual Sheet Feed Forms Paths  
The Front Push tractor is used for the Dual Push and the Push Pull forms paths, as  
well as the Front Push forms path. The printer is shipped to you with the Front  
Push forms path set as the default.  
1. Ensure the correct settings are made for the Front Push forms path. Refer to  
the tables in “Summarizing Forms Path Set Up” on page 39.  
2. Perform the steps in “Installing Front Push Tractor” on page 15.  
3. Configure the printer for the Front Push forms path by following these steps:  
a. Power off (O) the printer.  
b. Enter Power On Configuration mode. To do this, press and continue to hold  
Menu/Enter while powering on (|) the printer, until (1) the message STARTING  
UP appears, (2) the boxes on the operator panel display are solidly filled in,  
and (3) the printhead stops. This takes about fifteen seconds. Do not  
release this key or press any other keys until this completes.  
c. Release Menu/Enter and the message PRINT OUT=NO displays.  
d. Press ↓ and the message PULL=xxxxxxxxx displays, where xxxxxxxxx can be  
NO, YES, or PUSH+PULL. If xxxxxxxxx is not NO, press ← or → until NO is  
displayed.  
52 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
e. Press Menu/Enter to save the settings and exit Power On Configuration  
mode. This takes a few seconds. Do not press any keys until this  
completes.  
f. Press Path until the Front Push indicator is blinking and the message  
01 END OF FORMS displays.  
g. Press Online to quiet the alarm and put the printer online.  
4. Perform the steps in “Loading Forms into Front Push Forms Path” on page 20.  
Your 4247 Printer is ready to print. See “Printing Power On Configuration Setup” on  
page 27 and “Printing Program Configuration Setup” on page 28 to print the  
configuration. If you do not want to use the printer defaults for forms settings (such  
as Line Spacing, Page Length, or Top of Form), see “Program Configuration” on  
page 106.  
Setting Up Rear Push Forms Path  
Figure 31 shows the Rear Push forms path with Manual Sheet Feed.  
Figure 31. Rear Push Forms Path with Manual Sheet Feed  
Ensure the correct settings are made for the Rear Push forms path. Refer to the  
tables in “Summarizing Forms Path Set Up” on page 39.  
Additionally you will need to perform the following tasks:  
1. “Installing Rear Push Tractor”  
2. “Configuring Forms Path for Rear Push” on page 54  
3. “Loading Forms For Rear Push” on page 55  
Installing Rear Push Tractor  
Install the forms tractor in the Rear Push forms path as follows:  
1. Power off (O) the printer.  
2. Open the top cover and the forms guide.  
Chapter 3. Setting Up Another Forms Path 53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3. Stand facing the front of the printer. Hold the forms tractor with the tractor doors  
toward you, and the electrical connector tab on the left pointing down.  
4. Use both hands to support the forms tractor by the tractor shaft. Position the  
electrical connector tab above the rear tractor electrical connector on the left  
side of the printer and the two lowest pins on the right. The forms tractor will  
rest on the lowest pin on the right, and lock onto the next higher pin.  
Figure 32. Installing Rear Push Tractor. Paper bail shown removed for clarity.  
5. Adjust the forms tractor until it clicks on both sides and the electrical connector  
tab is fully seated in the connector receiver.  
6. Close the forms guide and the top cover.  
Configuring Forms Path for Rear Push  
To configure the printer for the Rear Push forms path:  
1. Power off (O) the printer.  
2. Enter Power On Configuration mode. To do this, press and continue to hold  
Menu/Enter while powering on (|) the printer, until (1) the message STARTING UP  
appears, (2) the boxes on the operator panel display are solidly filled in, and (3)  
the printhead stops. This takes about fifteen seconds. Do not release this key or  
press any other keys until this completes.  
3. Release Menu/Enter and the message PRINT OUT=NO displays.  
4. Press ↓ and the message PULL=xxxxxxxxx displays, where xxxxxxxxx can be NO,  
YES, or PUSH+PULL. If xxxxxxxxx is not NO, press ← or → until NO is displayed.  
5. Press Menu/Enter to save the settings and exit Power On Configuration mode.  
This takes a few seconds. Do not press any keys until this completes.  
6. Press Path until the Rear Push indicator is blinking and the message  
01 END OF FORMS displays.  
7. Press Online to quiet the alarm and put the printer online.  
54 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Loading Forms For Rear Push  
Note: IBM recommends you remove the Automatic Sheet Feeder before loading  
forms into the Rear Push forms path.  
The Rear Push forms path can accept up to 4-part forms with a maximum thickness  
of 0.35 mm (0.014 in.).  
1. Stack the forms as shown in Figure 33. The top of the input forms stack should  
be lower than the bottom of the printer.  
Figure 33. Stacking Forms for Rear Push. See page 32 if your printer uses the optional  
printer stand. Consider ordering this option to serve as a shelf for the forms stacks.  
2. Press Online to take the printer offline.  
3. Open the rear tractor door located at the back of the printer (see Figure 34 on  
page 56 for location).  
4. Open the top cover and the forms guide.  
5. Move the tractor locking levers to unlock the tractors.  
6. Move the right tractor to the extreme right.  
7. Move the left tractor to the alignment mark on the tractor shaft. This controls  
the left print edge.  
8. Move the left locking lever to the lock position to lock the left tractor in place at  
the alignment mark.  
9. Move the forms supports to support the width of the forms.  
10. Open the tractor doors.  
Chapter 3. Setting Up Another Forms Path 55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
11. From the back of the printer, insert the forms (with the print side facing down)  
through the rear tractor door. Guide the forms over the forms tractors.  
Figure 34. Installing Forms at the Rear of the Printer  
12. From the front of the printer, place the left edge of the form under the forms  
jam sensor, and on the left tractor pins so that the form engages about three  
left tractor pins. Close the left tractor door.  
13. Move the right tractor to the left and under the form until the holes along the  
right edge of the form engage the same number of pins on the right tractor.  
Close the right tractor door.  
14. If necessary, slide the right tractor either left or right to remove any slack in the  
form, ensuring that the left and right tractor pins are centered in the holes of  
the form. Hold the right tractor in place and lock the right locking-lever by  
pushing it away from you.  
56 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 35. Aligning Forms for Rear Push Forms Path  
15. Close the forms guide and the top cover.  
16. Press Load/Form Feed to load the forms.  
17. Press Online to make the printer ready.  
Your 4247 Printer is ready to print. See “Printing Power On Configuration Setup” on  
page 27 and “Printing Program Configuration Setup” on page 28 to print the  
configuration. If you do not want to use the printer defaults for forms settings (such  
as Line Spacing, Page Length, or Top of Form), see “Program Configuration” on  
page 106.  
Setting Up Dual Push Forms Paths  
This forms path configuration lets you alternate between the Front Push and Rear  
Push forms paths. You can have forms loaded in the Front Push position and  
additional forms loaded in the Rear Push position, or you can have the same type  
of forms loaded in both positions. If the same type of forms are loaded in both  
forms paths and you want the printer to alternate automatically from Front Push to  
Rear Push or vice versa, set Sequence=FR+RR in the Power On Configuration  
Menu (see “Configuring Printer for Linking Dual Push” on page 59).  
If you have different forms types loaded in the Front Push forms path than in the  
Rear Push forms path, the operator or the job must ensure that the correct forms  
path is used. See “Parking One Continuous Form and Loading Another (Dual  
Push)” on page 59.  
Figure 36 on page 58 shows the Dual Push forms paths with Manual Sheet Feed.  
Chapter 3. Setting Up Another Forms Path 57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 36. Dual Push Forms Paths with Manual Sheet Feed  
Ensure the correct settings are made for the Dual Push forms path. Refer to the  
tables in “Summarizing Forms Path Set Up” on page 39.  
Preparing Dual Push Forms Paths  
Because this forms path configuration lets you alternate (either manually or  
automatically) between the Front Push and Rear Push forms paths, you will load  
forms into both forms paths.  
1. Stack the forms as shown in Figure 37. The top of the input forms stack should  
be lower than the bottom of the printer.  
Figure 37. Stacking Forms for Dual Push. See page 32 if your printer uses the optional  
printer stand.  
2. If the Front Push forms path is not setup, go to “Setting Up and Configuring  
Front Push Forms Path” on page 52 and set up the Front Push forms path, and  
then return here to step 3.  
3. Park the forms in the Front Push forms path (see “Parking Continuous Forms”  
on page 29), and then return here to step 4.  
4. If the Rear Push forms path is not setup, go to “Setting Up Rear Push Forms  
Path” on page 53 and set up the Rear Push forms path. Return here to step 5.  
5. Park the forms in the Rear Push forms path (see “Parking Continuous Forms”  
on page 29). Return here to “Configuring Printer for Linking Dual Push” on  
page 59.  
58 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Go to “Configuring Printer for Linking Dual Push” if you intend to load the same  
forms in both the Front Push and the Rear Push forms paths. Go to “Parking One  
Continuous Form and Loading Another (Dual Push)” if you intend to load different  
forms in the Front Push forms path than in the Rear Push forms path.  
Configuring Printer for Linking Dual Push  
If you are using the same type of forms in the Front Push and Rear Push tractors  
and you want the printer when it runs out of forms in the front forms path to switch  
automatically to the forms in the rear forms path, continue with these steps. This is  
known as linking.  
Configure the printer for linked Dual Push by following these steps:  
1. Enter Power On Configuration mode:  
a. Press and hold Menu/Enter while powering on (|) the printer.  
b. Continue holding Menu/Enter until the message STARTING UP appears, the  
sixteen boxes on the operator panel are solidly filled in, and all printer  
motion has stopped.  
2. Release Menu/Enter and the message PRINT OUT=NO displays.  
3. Press ↓ until the message FUNCTIONS displays.  
4. Press → until the message FRONT TEAR=xxxx displays, where xxxx can be NORM,  
AUTO, or NO.  
5. Press ↓ until the message SEQUENCE=xxxxxx displays, where xxxxxx can be NONE,  
FR+RR, ASF1+2, or ASF123. If xxxxxx is not FR+RR, press ← or → until FR+RR is  
displayed.  
6. Press Menu/Enter to save the settings and exit Power On Configuration mode.  
This takes a few seconds. Do not press any keys until this completes.  
Your 4247 Printer is ready to print. See “Printing Power On Configuration Setup” on  
page 27 and “Printing Program Configuration Setup” on page 28 to print the  
configuration. If you do not want to use the printer defaults for forms settings (such  
as Line Spacing, Page Length, or Top of Form), see “Program Configuration” on  
page 106.  
Parking One Continuous Form and Loading Another (Dual Push)  
If you have different continuous forms loaded in the Front Push and the Rear Push  
forms paths, the operator can have the printer switch between forms paths. This  
section explains how you can take advantage of this feature and free yourself from  
having to reload forms when you need to print on a different form.  
Parking Continuous Forms  
Parking forms means that a forms type unloads from the print area, but still remains  
on the tractors. When the forms in one continuous forms path are parked, another  
forms path or the Manual Sheet Feed can be selected, and the forms in that path  
will be loaded for printing. This can be configured to occur automatically, but you  
must have performed the tear off. See “Checking and Adjusting Tear-Off Position”  
on page 25.  
For successful forms parking, the input forms stack must be lower than the printer.  
Figure 37 on page 58 provides an example.  
Chapter 3. Setting Up Another Forms Path 59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Park forms as follows:  
1. Press Tear and tear off forms at the top cover tear line.  
2. Press Park and 94 PARK:SURE? displays.  
3. Press Park immediately again to park the forms.  
If the printer is configured for FRONT TEAR=NO or REAR TEAR=NO, you cannot  
back up the forms to park them. Break the forms at a perforation before they enter  
the printer. Press Park twice, and the forms will move forward until ejected from the  
printer.  
Switching the Forms Path  
Follow these steps to select another forms path:  
1. Ensure that a form is in the tractors of the desired, alternate forms path. (You  
may want to review “Preparing Printer for Selected Forms Path” on page 44.)  
2. Press Path until the indicator for the other forms path lights. The new form will  
load automatically.  
Your 4247 Printer is ready to print. See “Printing Power On Configuration Setup” on  
page 27 and “Printing Program Configuration Setup” on page 28 to print the  
configuration. If you do not want to use the printer defaults for forms settings (such  
as Line Spacing, Page Length, or Top of Form), see “Program Configuration” on  
page 106.  
Setting Up Rear Pull Forms Path  
To use this forms path, the following must be removed from the printer:  
v Automatic Sheet Feeder (ASF)  
v Front Push forms tractor (See “Setting Front Push Tractor” on page 14.)  
v Paper bail (See “Removing or Installing Paper Bail” on page 47.)  
Note: It is not recommended to select Manual when the printer is set for either the  
Rear Pull or the Push Pull forms paths. Manual can be selected from the  
operator panel, but to use it, you will need to re-configure the forms path  
both before and after using Manual. See “Summarizing Forms Path Set Up”  
on page 39.  
Figure 38 on page 61 shows the Rear Pull forms path.  
60 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 38. Rear Pull Forms Path  
Ensure the correct settings are made for the Rear Pull forms path. Refer to the  
tables in “Summarizing Forms Path Set Up” on page 39.  
Additionally, you will need to perform the following tasks:  
1. “Installing Rear Pull Tractor”  
2. “Configuring Forms Path for Rear Pull” on page 63  
3. “Loading Forms For Rear Pull” on page 64  
Installing Rear Pull Tractor  
Install the forms tractor in the Rear Pull forms path as follows (see Figure 38):  
1. Power off (O) the printer.  
2. Open the top cover and the forms guide.  
3. Stand facing the front of the printer. Hold the forms tractor with the tractor doors  
toward you and the electrical connector tab on the left.  
Chapter 3. Setting Up Another Forms Path 61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. To install the rear forms tractor, support the tractor with both hands on the round  
tractor shaft. Position the electrical connector tab above its connector on the left  
side of the printer and the two lowest pins on the right.  
5. Adjust the forms tractor until it clicks on both sides and the electrical connector  
tab is fully seated in the connector.  
62 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Close the forms guide and top cover.  
Configuring Forms Path for Rear Pull  
To configure the printer for the Rear Pull forms path:  
1. Enter Power On Configuration mode:  
a. Press and continue to hold Menu/Enter while powering on (|) the printer,  
until (1) the message STARTING UP appears, (2) the boxes on the operator  
panel display are solidly filled in, and (3) the printhead stops. This takes  
about fifteen seconds. Do not release the key or press any other keys until  
this completes.  
b. Press Online to quiet the audible alarm.  
2. Release Menu/Enter and the message PRINT OUT=NO displays.  
3. Press ↓ and the message PULL=xxxxxxxxx displays, where xxxxxxxxx can be NO,  
YES, or PUSH+PULL. If xxxxxxxxx is not YES, press ← or → until YES is displayed.  
Chapter 3. Setting Up Another Forms Path 63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. Press Menu/Enter to save the settings and exit Power On Configuration mode.  
This takes a few seconds. Do not press any keys until this completes.  
5. Press Path until the Rear Pull indicator is blinking and the message  
01 END OF FORMS displays.  
Loading Forms For Rear Pull  
The Rear Pull forms path can accept up to 8-part forms with a maximum thickness  
of 0.64 mm (0.025 in.).  
1. Stack the forms as shown in Figure 39. The top of the input forms stack should  
be lower than the bottom of the printer.  
Figure 39. Stacking Forms for Rear Pull. See page 32 if your printer uses the optional printer  
stand.  
2. Press Load/Form Feed to move the printhead to the extreme right.  
3. If necessary, press Online to take the printer offline.  
4. Lift open the rear tractor door.  
5. Open the top cover and the forms guide.  
6. Unlock the locking levers on the tractors. Move the right tractor to the extreme  
right.  
7. Move the left tractor to the tractor alignment mark.  
64 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
8. Lock the left locking lever.  
9. Open both tractor doors.  
10. Lift open the front tractor cover.  
Chapter 3. Setting Up Another Forms Path 65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11. Insert the forms through the front tractor opening and slide them from side to  
side as you push them into the forms path.  
12. Grasp the first form as it appears from under the ribbon, and pull it up onto the  
rear forms tractor.  
13. Place the left edge of the form on the left tractor pins so that the form engages  
about three left tractor pins. Close the left tractor door.  
66 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14. Move the right tractor to the left and under the form until the holes along the  
right edge of the form engage the same number of pins as the left tractor.  
Close the right tractor door.  
15. If necessary, slide the right tractor either left or right to remove any slack in the  
form, ensuring that the left and right tractor pins are centered in the holes of  
the form.  
Chapter 3. Setting Up Another Forms Path 67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
16. While holding the right tractor in place, lock the right locking lever.  
17. Move the forms supports along the tractor shaft to support the width of the  
forms.  
18. Press Micro ↑ until the first perforation advances to be visible behind the  
ribbon.  
Note: If the perforation behind the ribbon is not plainly visible to you, you may  
want to remove the forms, mark the first perforation, and reload the  
forms into the printer.  
19. Close the front tractor cover.  
20. Close the forms guide and the top cover.  
68 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
21. Press Online.  
22. Press Load/Form Feed to feed the forms.  
Ensure the forms pass under the forms jam sensor. The printer senses a forms  
jam when the forms are not under the forms jam sensor.  
23. Ensure the forms exit through the rear tractor door (see Figure 40 on page 70).  
Chapter 3. Setting Up Another Forms Path 69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figure 40. Forms Exiting Rear of Printer  
Your 4247 Printer is ready to print. See “Printing Power On Configuration Setup” on  
page 27 and “Printing Program Configuration Setup” on page 28 to print the  
configuration. If you do not want to use the printer defaults for forms settings (such  
as Line Spacing, Page Length, or Top of Form), see “Program Configuration” on  
page 106.  
Setting Up Push Pull Forms Path  
This forms path configuration allows you to load forms into the printer through the  
Front Push forms tractor and out through the Rear Pull forms tractor. Because the  
printer will be using two forms tractors and a straight forms path, this forms path  
provides improved forms handling for difficult situations like thicker, multiple-part  
forms or a high humidity environment.  
You must remove the optional Automatic Sheet Feeder (ASF) from the printer to  
use this forms path. See the 4247 Printer Automatic Sheet Feeder Guide.  
IBM recommends that you not select Manual when the printer is set for either the  
Rear Pull or the Push Pull forms paths. Manual can be selected from the operator  
panel, but to use it you will need to re-configure the forms path both before and  
after using Manual. See “Summarizing Forms Path Set Up” on page 39.  
Figure 41 on page 71 shows the Push Pull forms path.  
70 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 41. Push Pull Forms Path  
Ensure the correct settings are made for the Push Pull forms path. Refer to the  
tables in “Summarizing Forms Path Set Up” on page 39.  
Additionally, you will need to perform the following tasks:  
1. “Installing Push Pull Tractors”  
2. “Configuring Forms Path for Push Pull”  
3. “Loading Forms For Push Pull” on page 72  
Installing Push Pull Tractors  
Install the tractors in the Front Push (see “Installing Front Push Tractor” on page 15)  
and the Rear Pull (see “Installing Rear Pull Tractor” on page 61) forms paths.  
Return here to perform “Configuring Forms Path for Push Pull”.  
Configuring Forms Path for Push Pull  
To configure the printer for the Push Pull forms path:  
1. Enter Power On Configuration mode. To do this, press and continue holding  
Menu/Enter while powering on (|) the printer, until (1) the message STARTING UP  
appears, (2) the boxes on the operator panel display are solidly filled in, and (3)  
the printhead stops. This takes about fifteen seconds. Do not release this key or  
press any other keys until this completes.  
2. Release Menu/Enter and the message PRINT OUT=NO displays.  
3. Press ↓ and the message PULL=xxxxxxxxx displays, where xxxxxxxxx can be NO,  
YES, or PUSH+PULL. If xxxxxxxxx is not PUSH+PULL, press ← or → until PUSH+PULL is  
displayed.  
4. Press Menu/Enter to save the settings and exit Power On Configuration mode.  
This takes a few seconds. Do not press any keys until this completes.  
5. Press Path. The Front Push and Rear Pull indicators are blinking and the  
message 01 END OF FORMS displays.  
Chapter 3. Setting Up Another Forms Path 71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Loading Forms For Push Pull  
Notes:  
1. Before you start this procedure, see Figure 42 for information on stacking height  
limits, and “Forms Specifications” on page 151 for information on acceptable  
forms thickness and weight.  
2. The Push Pull forms path can accept up to 8-part forms with a maximum  
thickness of 0.64 mm (0.025 in.).  
To load forms for the Push Pull forms path:  
1. Stack the forms as shown in Figure 42. The top of the input forms stack should  
be lower than the bottom of the printer.  
Figure 42. Stacking Forms for Push Pull. See page 32 if your printer uses the optional printer  
stand.  
2. Load the forms into the Front Push forms tractor. Go to “Loading Forms into  
Front Push Forms Path” on page 20, and perform the procedure through step  
11 on page 21. Return here and continue with these steps.  
3. Advance the forms to the Rear Pull forms tractor by pressing Load/Form  
Feed.  
4. Lift open the rear tractor door.  
5. Open the top cover and the forms guide.  
72 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6. Unlock the locking levers on the rear tractors. Move the right tractor to the  
extreme right.  
7. Move the left tractor to the tractor alignment mark.  
8. Lock the left locking lever.  
9. Open both tractor doors.  
10. If necessary, press Micro ↑ to feed enough forms to cover the first four holes  
of the rear tractors.  
11. While rotating the square tractor shaft, align the holes of the form with the pins  
of the left tractor.  
Chapter 3. Setting Up Another Forms Path 73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12. While holding the form in place, close the left tractor door.  
13. Move the right tractor to the left and under the form until the holes along the  
right edge of the form engage the same number of pins as the left tractor.  
Close the right tractor door.  
74 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14. If necessary, slide the right tractor either left or right to remove any slack in the  
form, ensuring that the left and right tractor pins are centered in the holes of  
the form.  
15. While holding the right tractor in place, lock the right locking lever.  
16. Move the forms supports along the tractor shaft to support the width of the  
forms.  
17. Ensure that all four tractors are aligned.  
Chapter 3. Setting Up Another Forms Path 75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
18. Close the front tractor cover.  
19. Close the forms guide and the top cover.  
20. Press Online.  
21. If the forms are not exiting through the rear tractor door, press Load/Form  
Feed to feed the forms.  
76 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ensure the forms pass under the forms jam sensor. The printer senses a forms  
jam when the forms are not under the forms jam sensor.  
22. Ensure the forms exit through the rear tractor door (see Figure 43).  
Figure 43. Forms Exiting Rear of Printer  
Note: When loading the form into the rear forms tractor, do not open the front  
tractor door or hold the form with your hand. Press Micro ↑ to advance the  
forms to the rear forms tractor.  
Your 4247 Printer is ready to print. See “Printing Power On Configuration Setup” on  
page 27 and “Printing Program Configuration Setup” on page 28 to print the  
Chapter 3. Setting Up Another Forms Path 77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
configuration. If you do not want to use the printer defaults for forms settings (such  
as Line Spacing, Page Length, or Top of Form), see “Program Configuration” on  
page 106.  
78 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4. Configuring Your Printer  
Operator Panel Function Keys Used for Configuration .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
80  
81  
82  
82  
83  
84  
84  
84  
85  
85  
86  
86  
86  
87  
87  
89  
89  
90  
90  
91  
91  
92  
92  
93  
93  
93  
94  
94  
95  
95  
97  
97  
98  
98  
99  
99  
Entering Printer Configuration .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Exiting Printer Configuration.  
Power On Configuration .  
.
.
.
Power On Configuration Menu Tree .  
Pull .  
Jam Sensors .  
Parallel Interface .  
Interface Type .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Select-In Signal .  
Data Bits.  
Buffer Size .  
Emulation  
Character Set .  
Print Language  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Automatic Carriage Return on Line Feed .  
Automatic Line Feed on Carriage Return .  
20 CPI  
NLQ  
Serial Interface  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Interface Type .  
Baud Rate .  
Data Bits.  
Parity .  
Pacing Protocol .  
Connection Type .  
Buffer Size .  
Emulation  
Character Set .  
Print Language  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Automatic Carriage Return on Line Feed .  
Automatic Line Feed on Carriage Return .  
20 CPI  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
NLQ  
.
Functions  
Front Tear Mode .  
Rear Tear Mode .  
Paper Overlay .  
Sequence  
Alarm .  
Automatic Load .  
Display Language  
. 100  
. 100  
. 101  
. 102  
. 102  
. 103  
. 103  
. 104  
. 104  
. 105  
. 106  
. 107  
. 108  
. 108  
. 108  
. 109  
. 109  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Sensor Tune  
Bidirectional Adjustment .  
Restore Manufacturing Defaults .  
Printing Power On Configuration Setup  
Program Configuration.  
Program Configuration Menu Tree  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Tear Position Adjustment .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Front Path .  
Rear Path .  
1 Form Per Path .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Path  
.
.
.
.
.
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1995, 1998  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Impact Strength .  
Perforation Safety  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 110  
. 111  
. 111  
. 111  
. 112  
. 112  
. 113  
. 113  
. 114  
. 114  
. 114  
. 115  
. 115  
. 116  
. 116  
. 117  
. 117  
. 118  
. 118  
. 119  
. 119  
. 120  
. 120  
. 121  
Adjustments  
.
.
Automatic Forms Thickness (AFTA) .  
Horizontal  
Vertical  
Form Setting .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Line Spacing .  
Line Spacing Lock .  
Page Length  
Top of Form  
.
.
.
.
.
.
Perforation Skipping  
Font  
Pitch .  
Pitch Lock .  
Left Margin .  
Right Margin  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Slashed Zero .  
Restore Manufacturing Defaults .  
Another Path .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Additional Entry Point to Power On Configuration Menu  
Hexadecimal Printing .  
Store Mode .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Printing Program Configuration Setup .  
Operator Panel Function Keys Used for Configuration  
The four keys highlighted in Figure 44 on page 81 have two functions. The ↑, the ↓,  
the ←, and the →, keys are active only during Power On Configuration mode or  
Program Configuration mode. The ↑ and ↓ keys allow you to scroll to select a  
configuration item from a configuration menu. The ← and → allow you to scroll within  
a list of values for the selected configuration item. These key functions are not  
active during normal printer operation.  
During normal printer operation, these function keys have the following functions:  
v Micro ↑ key and Micro ↓ key move the forms up or down.  
v Font key allows font selection; the Pitch key allows pitch selection.  
See Table 1 on page 8 for a discussion of each key.  
80 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 44. Function Keys with Two Functions  
The printer has two configuration modes, Power On Configuration mode and  
Program Configuration mode. The values for these parameters are stored in the  
printer nonvolatile memory (NVM), an internal printer storage location that is not  
erased when the printer is powered off or unplugged. Updating storage can take as  
long as 15 seconds to complete.  
v Power On Configuration Mode: A printer state that allows you to personalize  
hardware and emulation-specific printer parameters. A discussion of this begins  
on page 82.  
v Program Configuration Mode: A printer state that allows you to complete the  
customization of your printer. Program Configuration values can be saved for  
each of as many as five forms paths. This mode is always selected while the  
printer is in a wait condition (Online indicator off) or ready condition without  
printing. A discussion of this begins on page 106.  
See 119 for an additional entry point to the Power On Configuration menu.  
Entering Printer Configuration  
Use the Menu/Enter key to enter the Printer Configuration menus.  
Power On Configuration:  
1. Power off (O) the printer.  
2. Press and hold Menu/Enter.  
3. Power on (|) the printer.  
4. Release Menu/Enter after power-on initialization is complete.  
For more information about power-on configuration values, see “Power On  
Configuration” on page 82, and for more information about entering power on  
configuration from another path, see “Additional Entry Point to Power On  
Configuration Menu” on page 119.  
Program Configuration:  
1. Power on (|) the printer if it is not powered on).  
Chapter 4. Configuring Your Printer 81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2. Press Menu/Enter. The printer goes offline (not ready).  
For more information about program configuration values, see “Program  
Configuration” on page 106.  
To move within the Power On or Program Configuration menus, use the ↑, ↓, ←, and  
→.  
Exiting Printer Configuration  
Power On Configuration:  
After having set the desired values in the Power On Configuration menu, press  
Menu/Enter to exit. The new values will be saved automatically.  
Program Configuration:  
After having set the desired values in the Program Configuration menu, scroll down  
using the ↓ key until the message STORE=SAVE displays. Press Menu/Enter to save  
these values in nonvolatile memory (NVM).  
There are two other exit options, STORE=QUIT and STORE=CURRENT. STORE=QUIT exits  
without saving the new values; the old values remain valid. STORE=CURRENT exits  
without saving the new values in NVM, but the new values are valid until the printer  
is powered off.  
Power On Configuration  
This section lists the categories available, the options for each category, and the  
manufacturing defaults for the Power On Configuration menu. Each category is  
described in detail on the pages following Figure 45 on page 83.  
Notes:  
1. After you make configuration changes, IBM recommends that you print your  
changes and save the printout for future reference. For more information, see  
“Printing Power On Configuration Setup” on page 105.  
2. For information about entering and exiting printer configuration mode, see  
“Entering Printer Configuration” on page 81 and “Exiting Printer Configuration”  
on page 82.  
3. For information about entering power on configuration from the Program  
Configuration menu, see “Additional Entry Point to Power On Configuration  
Menu” on page 119.  
4. You can change the following configuration items only for the forms path for  
which your printer is configured:  
v Front Tear  
v Rear Tear  
v Paper Overlay  
v Sequence  
v Autoload  
82 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Power On Configuration Menu Tree  
Figure 45 provides a view of the path you can take through the Power On  
Configuration menus. An emulation other than Native 4247 provides other choices.  
Main Menu  
Submenus  
*NO  
YES  
PRINT OUT  
*NO  
YES  
PULL  
PUSH + PULL  
*YES  
NO  
JAM SENSORS  
BUFFER = *32K  
BUFFER = 64K  
BUFFER = 256  
BUFFER = 2K  
BUFFER = 12K  
EMUL =*NATIVE 4247  
EMUL = 4202 III XL  
EMUL = 2381  
INTF = *CX PARALLEL  
INTF = 1284 BYTE  
INTF = 1284 NIBBLE  
SELECT - IN = *HOST  
SELECT - IN = ON  
DATA BITS = *8  
DATA BITS = 7  
PARALLEL INTF  
EMUL = EPSON FX  
CHAR SET = *PC2  
CHAR SET = PC1  
AUTO CR = *NO  
AUTO CR = YES  
AUTO LF = *NO  
AUTO LF = YES  
20CPI = *NO  
20CPI = YES  
NLQ = *COURIER  
NLQ = GOTHIC  
LANG = *CP437  
LANG = CP1251  
INTF = *RS - 232C  
INTF = RS - 422A  
INTF = SERIAL NO.  
BAUD = *9600  
BAUD = 19200  
BAUD = 38400  
BAUD = 300  
BAUD = 600  
BAUD = 1200  
BAUD = 2400  
BAUD = 4800  
DATA BITS = *8  
DATA BITS = 7  
PARITY = *NONE  
PARITY = ODD  
PARITY = EVEN  
PARITY = MARK  
PARITY = SPACE  
PACING = *DTR  
PACING = XON / XOFF  
SERIAL INTERFACE  
BUFFER = *32K  
EMUL =*NATIVE 4247  
EMUL = 4202 III XL  
EMUL = 2381  
CHAR SET =* PC2  
CHAR SET = PC1  
CONNECT = *LOCAL  
CONNECT = REMOTE  
LANG = *CP437  
LANG = CP1251  
BUFFER = 64K  
BUFFER = 256  
BUFFER = 2K  
BUFFER = 12K  
EMUL = EPSON FX  
AUTO CR = *NO  
AUTO CR = YES  
AUTO LF = *NO  
AUTO Lf = YES  
20 CPI = *NO  
20 CPI = YES  
NLQ = *COURIER  
NLQ = GOTHIC  
FRONT TEAR = *NORM  
FRONT TEAR = AUTO  
FRONT TEAR = NO  
REAR TEAR = *NORM  
REAR TEAR = AUTO  
REAR TEAR = NO  
PAPER OVERLAY = *NO  
PAPER OVERLAY = YES  
SEQUENCE = *NONE  
ALARM = *YES  
ALARM = NO  
FUNCTIONS  
SEQUENCE = FR + RR  
SEQUENCE = ASF1+2  
SEQUENCE = ASF123  
AUTOLOAD = *YES  
AUTOLOAD = NO  
MENU = *ENGLISH  
MENU = ITALIANO  
MENU = FRANCAIS  
MENU = ESPANOL  
MENU = DEUTSCH  
MENU = PORTUGUES  
MENU = DANSK  
*NO  
YES  
SENSOR TUNE  
MENU = NEDERLANDS  
*0  
-6 to 6  
BIDI ADJUST  
*NO  
YES  
RESTORE MFG  
* Manufacturing Default  
Figure 45. Power On Configuration Menu Tree  
Chapter 4. Configuring Your Printer 83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Pull  
This category selects the physical printer configuration of the forms handling. You  
can set Pull to one of the following values:  
No (default)  
Enables the Front Push path or the Rear Push path. If a second  
optional tractor is installed, PULL=NO configures the printer for both a  
tractor in the Front Push and a tractor in the Rear Push position.  
Yes  
Enables the Rear Pull forms path.  
Push+Pull  
Enables the Front Push and Rear Pull forms path to handle the  
same continuous form. By configuring the printer in Push+Pull, you  
have the use of both tractors for forms handling.  
To change or check the Pull category:  
1. Ensure the printer is powered off (O).  
2. Press and hold Menu/Enter while powering on (|) the printer. The message  
STARTING UP displays.  
3. After start-up is complete, release Menu/Enter and the message PRINT OUT=NO  
displays.  
4. Press ↓ and the message PULL=xxx displays, where xxx can be NO, YES, or  
PUSH+PULL. If you want to select a value other than the one displayed, press ← or  
→.  
5. To exit from Power On Configuration, press Menu/Enter. Your new value is  
stored in NVM.  
Jam Sensors  
You can set Jam Sensors to either of the following values:  
Yes (default) Enables the forms jam sensors on the front and rear tractors. This  
setting alerts the operator with an 02 FORMS JAM message on the  
operator panel display when a jammed form is detected in one of  
the forms paths.  
No  
Disables the forms jam sensors.  
To change or check the Jam Sensors category:  
1. Ensure the printer is powered off (O).  
2. Press and hold Menu/Enter while powering on (|) the printer. The message  
STARTING UP displays.  
3. After start-up is complete, release Menu/Enter and the message PRINT OUT=NO  
displays.  
4. Press ↓ until the message JAM SENSORS=xxx displays, where xxx can be NO or  
YES. If you want to select a value other than the one displayed, press ← or →.  
5. To exit from Power On Configuration, press Menu/Enter. Your new value is  
stored in NVM.  
Parallel Interface  
Select this category if your printer is connected to your host computer with a  
parallel interface cable. There are several parameters available:  
v Interface Types  
84 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v Select-In Signal  
v Data Bit  
v Buffer Size  
v Emulation  
v Character Sets  
v Print Language  
v Automatic Carriage Return on Line Feed  
v Automatic Line Feed on Carriage Return  
v 20 CPI  
v NLQ  
Interface Type  
You can set the system interface to match the interface that is attached to your  
printer.  
v CX Parallel (default)  
v 1284 Byte  
v 1284 Nibble  
To change or check the Interface Types:  
1. Ensure the printer is powered off (O).  
2. Press and hold Menu/Enter while powering on (|) the printer. The message  
STARTING UP displays.  
3. After start-up is complete, release Menu/Enter and the message PRINT OUT=NO  
displays.  
4. Press ↓ until the message PARALLEL INTF displays.  
5. Press → until the message INTF=xxxxxxxxxxx displays, where xxxxxxxxxxx can  
be CX PARALLEL, 1284 BYTE, or 1284 NIBBLE. If you want to select a value other  
than the one displayed, press ← or →.  
6. To exit from Power On Configuration, press Menu/Enter. Your new value is  
stored in NVM.  
Select-In Signal  
You can set the select-in signal to:  
On  
The Select-In signal is ignored and treated as always on.  
Host (default) The printer checks the Select-In signal from the host.  
To change or check the Select-In Signal:  
1. Ensure the printer is powered off (O).  
2. Press and hold Menu/Enter while powering on (|) the printer. The message  
STARTING UP displays.  
3. After start-up is complete, release Menu/Enter and the message PRINT OUT=NO  
displays.  
4. Press ↓ until the message PARALLEL INTF displays.  
5. Press → until the message INTF=xxxxxxxxxxx displays, where xxxxxxxxxxx can  
be CX PARALLEL, 1284 BYTE, or 1284 NIBBLE.  
6. Press ↓ until the message SELECT-IN=xxxx displays, where xxxx can be ON or  
HOST. If you want to select a value other than the one displayed, press ← or →.  
Chapter 4. Configuring Your Printer 85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
7. To exit from Power On Configuration, press Menu/Enter. Your new value is  
stored in NVM.  
Data Bits  
You can set the data bit to either of the following values:  
v 8 (default)  
v 7  
To change or check the Data Bits:  
1. Ensure the printer is powered off (O).  
2. Press and hold Menu/Enter while powering on (|) the printer. The message  
STARTING UP displays.  
3. After start-up is complete, release Menu/Enter and the message PRINT OUT=NO  
displays.  
4. Press ↓ until the message PARALLEL INTF displays.  
5. Press → until the message INTF=xxxxxxxxxxx displays, where xxxxxxxxxxx can  
be CX PARALLEL, 1284 BYTE, or 1284 NIBBLE.  
6. Press ↓ until the message DATA BITS=x displays, where x can be 8 or 7. If you  
want to select a value other than the one displayed, press ← or →.  
7. To exit from Power On Configuration, press Menu/Enter. Your new value is  
stored in NVM.  
Buffer Size  
You can set the buffer to one of the following values:  
v 256  
v 2K  
v 12K  
v 32K (default)  
v 64K  
To change or check the Buffer Size:  
1. Ensure the printer is powered off (O).  
2. Press and hold Menu/Enter while powering on (|) the printer. The message  
STARTING UP displays.  
3. After start-up is complete, release Menu/Enter and the message PRINT OUT=NO  
displays.  
4. Press ↓ until the message PARALLEL INTF displays.  
5. Press → until the message INTF=xxxxxxxxxxx displays, where xxxxxxxxxxx can  
be CX PARALLEL, 1284 BYTE, or 1284 NIBBLE.  
6. Press ↓ until the message BUFFER=xxx displays, where xxx can be 256, 2K, 12K,  
32K, or 64K. If you want to select a value other than the one displayed, press ←  
or →.  
7. To exit from Power On Configuration, press Menu/Enter. Your new value is  
stored in NVM.  
Emulation  
You can set the emulation type to any of the following values:  
v Native 4247 (default)  
86 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v 4202 III XL  
v 2381  
v Epson FX  
To change or check the Emulation type:  
1. Ensure the printer is powered off (O).  
2. Press and hold Menu/Enter while powering on (|) the printer. The message  
STARTING UP displays.  
3. After start-up is complete, release Menu/Enter and the message PRINT OUT=NO  
displays.  
4. Press ↓ until the message PARALLEL INTF displays.  
5. Press → until the message INTF=xxxxxxxxxxx displays, where xxxxxxxxxxx can  
be CX PARALLEL, 1284 BYTE, or 1284 NIBBLE.  
6. Press ↓ until the message EMUL=xxxxxxxxxxx displays, where xxxxxxxxxxx can  
be NATIVE 4247, 4202 III XL, 2381, or EPSON FX. If you want to select a value  
other than the one displayed, press ← or →.  
7. To exit from Power On Configuration, press Menu/Enter. Your new value is  
stored in NVM.  
Character Set  
You can set the character set to one of the following values:  
v PC1 (PC Character Set 1)  
v PC2 (PC Character Set 2) (default)  
v Italic (Epson FX only)  
To change or check the Character Set:  
1. Ensure the printer is powered off (O).  
2. Press and hold Menu/Enter while powering on (|) the printer. The message  
STARTING UP displays.  
3. After start-up is complete, release Menu/Enter and the message PRINT OUT=NO  
displays.  
4. Press ↓ until the message PARALLEL INTF displays.  
5. Press → until the message INTF=xxxxxxxxxxx displays, where xxxxxxxxxxx can  
be CX PARALLEL, 1284 BYTE, or 1284 NIBBLE.  
6. Press ↓ until the message CHAR SET=xxxxxx displays, where xxxxxx can be PC1,  
PC2, or ITALIC. If you want to select a value other than the one displayed, press  
← or →.  
7. To exit from Power On Configuration, press Menu/Enter. Your new value is  
stored in NVM.  
Print Language  
You can select any print language that is available for your printer. The following  
print languages are available when printer emulation is set to Native 4247, 4202 III  
XL, 2381, or Epson FX:  
Arabic  
CP864  
CP1046  
CP921  
CP863  
CP855  
Arabic Extended  
Baltic Multilingual  
Canadian French  
Cyrillic  
Chapter 4. Configuring Your Printer 87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Cyrillic (ISO 8859-5)  
Cyrillic 2 (Personal Computer)  
Cyrillic Windows  
Danish/Norwegian  
Estonian  
Estonian (Personal Computer)  
Farsi (Personal Computer)  
Greek/Latin (ISO 8859-7)  
Hebrew  
CP915  
CP866  
CP1251  
CP865  
CP922  
CP1116  
CP1098  
CP813  
CP862  
CP861  
CP819  
CP912  
CP852  
CP913  
CP914  
CP920  
CP1089  
CP916  
CP1117  
CP1118  
CP850  
CP869  
CP876  
CP877  
CP851  
CP860  
CP874  
CP853  
CP857  
CP1006  
CP437  
Icelandic  
Latin 1 (ISO 8859-1)  
Latin 2 (ISO 8859-2)  
Latin 2/ROECE  
Latin 3 (ISO 8859-3)  
Latin 4 (ISO 8859-4)  
Latin 5 (ISO 8859-9)  
Latin 6 (ISO 8859-6)  
Latin 8 (ISO 8858-8)  
Latvian (Personal Computer)  
Lithuanian (Personal Computer)  
Mulitlingual  
New Greek  
OCR-A  
OCR-B  
Old Greek  
Portuguese  
Thai  
Turkish 1  
Turkish 2  
Urdu  
USA (Personal Computer)*  
* Manufacturing default with emulation set to Native 4247, 4202 III XL, or 2381  
These additional print languages are only available if the printer emulation is set to  
Epson FX:  
Denmark 1  
Denmark 2  
England  
France  
French Canadian  
Germany  
Italy  
Japan  
Latin American 1  
Latin American 2  
Norway  
Spain 1  
Spain 2  
Sweden  
USA*  
* Manufacturing default with emulation set to Epson FX  
To change or check the Print Language:  
88 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Ensure the printer is powered off (O).  
2. Press and hold Menu/Enter while powering on (|) the printer. The message  
STARTING UP displays.  
3. After start-up is complete, release Menu/Enter and the message PRINT OUT=NO  
displays.  
4. Press ↓ until the message PARALLEL INTF displays.  
5. Press → until the message INTF=xxxxxxxxxxx displays, where xxxxxxxxxxx can  
be CX PARALLEL, 1284 BYTE, or 1284 NIBBLE.  
6. Press ↓ until the message LANG=xxxxxxxx displays, where xxxxxxxx can be  
CP437 through CP1098 when emulation is set Native 4247, 4202 III XL, or 2381  
or where xxxxxxxx can be USA through CP1098 when emulation is set to Epson  
FX. If you want to select a value other than the one displayed, press ← or →.  
7. To exit from Power On Configuration, press Menu/Enter. Your new value is  
stored in NVM.  
Automatic Carriage Return on Line Feed  
You can set the printer to perform an automatic carriage return at a line feed. You  
can set this value to:  
No (default)  
Yes  
No automatic carriage return is performed at a line feed.  
An automatic carriage return is performed after a line feed.  
To change or check the Automatic Carriage Return after Line Feed:  
1. Ensure the printer is powered off (O).  
2. Press and hold Menu/Enter while powering on (|) the printer. The message  
STARTING UP displays.  
3. After start-up is complete, release Menu/Enter and the message PRINT OUT=NO  
displays.  
4. Press ↓ until the message PARALLEL INTF displays.  
5. Press → until the message INTF=xxxxxxxxxxx displays, where xxxxxxxxxxx can  
be CX PARALLEL, 1284 BYTE, or 1284 NIBBLE.  
6. Press ↓ until the message AUTO CR=xxx displays, where xxx can be NO or YES. If  
you want to select a value other than the one displayed, press ← or →.  
7. To exit from Power On Configuration, press Menu/Enter. Your new value is  
stored in NVM.  
Automatic Line Feed on Carriage Return  
You can set the printer to perform an automatic line feed at a carriage return. You  
can set this value to:  
No (default)  
Yes  
No line feed is performed after a carriage return.  
An automatic line feed is performed after a carriage return.  
Host (Epson FX only)  
Host will determine whether an automatic line feed is performed  
after a carriage return.  
To change or check the Automatic Line Feed on Carriage Return:  
1. Ensure the printer is powered off (O).  
2. Press and hold Menu/Enter while powering on (|) the printer. The message  
STARTING UP displays.  
Chapter 4. Configuring Your Printer 89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3. After start-up is complete, release Menu/Enter and the message PRINT OUT=NO  
displays.  
4. Press ↓ until the message PARALLEL INTF displays.  
5. Press → until the message INTF=xxxxxxxxxxx displays, where xxxxxxxxxxx can  
be CX PARALLEL, 1284 BYTE, or 1284 NIBBLE.  
6. Press ↓ until the message AUTO LF=xxx displays, where xxx can be NO, YES, or  
HOST. If you want to select a value other than the one displayed, press ← or →.  
7. To exit from Power On Configuration, press Menu/Enter. Your new value is  
stored in NVM.  
20 CPI  
You can set the printer to allow 20 characters-per-inch (CPI) condensed print from  
the data stream. For more information, see “Shift In (SI) / Condensed Print” on  
page 190. You can set this value to:  
No (default)  
A combination of 12 CPI and a condensed print data stream  
command (Shift In) sets the printer to 12 CPI.  
Yes  
A combination of 12 CPI and a condensed print data stream  
command (Shift In) sets the printer to 20 CPI.  
To change or check the 20 CPI value:  
1. Ensure the printer is powered off (O).  
2. Press and hold Menu/Enter while powering on (|) the printer. The message  
STARTING UP displays.  
3. After start-up is complete, release Menu/Enter and the message PRINT OUT=NO  
displays.  
4. Press ↓ until the message PARALLEL INTF displays.  
5. Press → until the message INTF=xxxxxxxxxxx displays, where xxxxxxxxxxx can  
be CX PARALLEL, 1284 BYTE, or 1284 NIBBLE.  
6. Press ↓ until the message 20 CPI=xxx displays, where xxx can be NO or YES. If  
you want to select a value other than the one displayed, press ← or →.  
7. To exit from Power On Configuration, press Menu/Enter. Your new value is  
stored in NVM.  
NLQ  
Note: Using NLQ reduces printer throughput by approximately 50%.  
You can change the font for Near Letter Quality (NLQ) printing, available through  
the operator panel Font key, to either of the following values:  
v Courier (default)  
v Gothic  
To change or check the NLQ font value:  
1. Ensure the printer is powered off (O).  
2. Press and hold Menu/Enter while powering on (|) the printer. The message  
STARTING UP displays.  
3. After start-up is complete, release Menu/Enter and the message PRINT OUT=NO  
displays.  
4. Press ↓ until the message PARALLEL INTF displays.  
90 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5. Press → until the message INTF=xxxxxxxxxxx displays, where xxxxxxxxxxx can  
be CX PARALLEL, 1284 BYTE, or 1284 NIBBLE.  
6. Press ↓ until the message NLQ=xxxxxxx displays, where xxxxxxx can be COURIER  
or GOTHIC. If you want to select a value other than the one displayed, press ← or  
→.  
7. To exit from Power On Configuration, press Menu/Enter. Your new value is  
stored in NVM.  
Serial Interface  
Select this category if your printer is connected to your host computer through an  
RS-232C or RS-422A interface. There are several different parameters available:  
v Interface Type  
v Baud Rate  
v Data Bit  
v Parity  
v Pacing Protocol  
v Connection Type  
v Buffer Size  
v Emulation  
v Character Set  
v Print Language  
v Automatic Carriage Return on Line Feed  
v Automatic Line Feed on Carriage Return  
v 20 CPI  
v NLQ  
Interface Type  
You can set the system interface to any of the following values:  
v Serial No  
v RS-232C (default)  
v RS-422A  
To change or check the Interface Types:  
1. Ensure the printer is powered off (O).  
2. Press and hold Menu/Enter while powering on (|) the printer. The message  
STARTING UP displays.  
3. After start-up is complete, release Menu/Enter and the message PRINT OUT=NO  
displays.  
4. Press ↓ until the message SERIAL INTERFACE displays.  
5. Press → until the message INTF=xxxxxxxxx displays, where xxxxxxxxx can be  
SERIAL NO, RS-232C, or RS-422A. If you want to select a value other than the one  
displayed, press ← or →.  
6. To exit from Power On Configuration, press Menu/Enter. Your new value is  
stored in NVM.  
Chapter 4. Configuring Your Printer 91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Baud Rate  
You can set baud rate to any of the following values:  
v 300  
v 600  
v 1200  
v 2400  
v 4800  
v 9600 (default)  
v 19200  
v 38400  
To change or check the Baud Rate:  
1. Ensure the printer is powered off (O).  
2. Press and hold Menu/Enter while powering on (|) the printer. The message  
STARTING UP displays.  
3. After start-up is complete, release Menu/Enter and the message PRINT OUT=NO  
displays.  
4. Press ↓ until the message SERIAL INTERFACE displays.  
5. Press → until the message INTF=xxxxxxxxx displays, where xxxxxxxxx can be  
SERIAL NO, RS-232C, or RS-422A.  
6. Press ↓ until the message BAUD=xxxxx displays, where xxxxx can be 300, 600,  
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, or 38400. If you want to select a value other than  
the one displayed, press ← or →.  
7. To exit from Power On Configuration, press Menu/Enter. Your new value is  
stored in NVM.  
Data Bits  
You can set data bit to either of the following values:  
v 8 (default)  
v 7  
To change or check the Data Bits:  
1. Ensure the printer is powered off (O).  
2. Press and hold Menu/Enter while powering on (|) the printer. The message  
STARTING UP displays.  
3. After start-up is complete, release Menu/Enter and the message PRINT OUT=NO  
displays.  
4. Press ↓ until the message SERIAL INTERFACE displays.  
5. Press → until the message INTF=xxxxxxxxx displays, where xxxxxxxxx can be  
SERIAL NO, RS-232C, or RS-422A.  
6. Press ↓ until the message DATA BITS=x displays, where x can be 8 or 7. If you  
want to select a value other than the one displayed, press ← or →.  
7. To exit from Power On Configuration, press Menu/Enter. Your new value is  
stored in NVM.  
92 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Parity  
You can set parity to any of the following values:  
v None (default)  
v Odd  
v Even  
v Mark  
v Space  
To change or check the Parity:  
1. Ensure the printer is powered off (O).  
2. Press and hold Menu/Enter while powering on (|) the printer. The message  
STARTING UP displays.  
3. After start-up is complete, release Menu/Enter and the message PRINT OUT=NO  
displays.  
4. Press ↓ until the message SERIAL INTERFACE displays.  
5. Press → until the message INTF=xxxxxxxxx displays, where xxxxxxxxx can be  
SERIAL NO, RS-232C, or RS-422A.  
6. Press ↓ until the message PARITY=xxxxx displays, where xxxxx can be NONE,  
ODD, EVEN, MARK, or SPACE. If you want to select a value other than the one  
displayed, press ← or →.  
7. To exit from Power On Configuration, press Menu/Enter. Your new value is  
stored in NVM.  
Pacing Protocol  
You can set pacing protocol to either of the following values:  
v DTR (default)  
v XON/XOFF  
To change or check the Pacing Protocol:  
1. Ensure the printer is powered off (O).  
2. Press and hold Menu/Enter while powering on (|) the printer. The message  
STARTING UP displays.  
3. After start-up is complete, release Menu/Enter and the message PRINT OUT=NO  
displays.  
4. Press ↓ until the message SERIAL INTERFACE displays.  
5. Press → until the message INTF=xxxxxxxxx displays, where xxxxxxxxx can be  
SERIAL NO, RS-232C, or RS-422A.  
6. Press ↓ until the message PACING=xxxxxxx displays, where xxxxxxx can be DTR  
or XON/XOFF. If you want to select a value other than the one displayed, press ←  
or →.  
7. To exit from Power On Configuration, press Menu/Enter. Your new value is  
stored in NVM.  
Connection Type  
You can set the connection type to either of the following values:  
Local (default)  
Printer is connected locally to a host computer.  
Chapter 4. Configuring Your Printer 93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remote  
Printer is connected remotely to a host computer through an  
external modem.  
To change or check the Connection Type:  
1. Ensure the printer is powered off (O).  
2. Press and hold Menu/Enter while powering on (|) the printer. The message  
STARTING UP displays.  
3. After start-up is complete, release Menu/Enter and the message PRINT OUT=NO  
displays.  
4. Press ↓ until the message SERIAL INTERFACE displays.  
5. Press → until the message INTF=xxxxxxxxx displays, where xxxxxxxxx can be  
SERIAL NO, RS-232C, or RS-422A.  
6. Press ↓ until the message CONNECT=xxxxxx displays, where xxxxxx can be LOCAL  
or REMOTE. If you want to select a value other than the one displayed, press ← or  
→.  
7. To exit from Power On Configuration, press Menu/Enter. Your new value is  
stored in NVM.  
Buffer Size  
You can set the buffer to one of the following values:  
v 256  
v 2K  
v 12K  
v 32K (default)  
v 64K  
To change or check the Buffer Size:  
1. Ensure the printer is powered off (O).  
2. Press and hold Menu/Enter while powering on (|) the printer. The message  
STARTING UP displays.  
3. After start-up is complete, release Menu/Enter and the message PRINT OUT=NO  
displays.  
4. Press ↓ until the message SERIAL INTERFACE displays.  
5. Press → until the message INTF=xxxxxxxxx displays, where xxxxxxxxx can be  
SERIAL NO, RS-232C, or RS-422A.  
6. Press ↓ until the message BUFFER=xxx displays, where xxx can be 256, 2K, 12K,  
32K, or 64K. If you want to select a value other than the one displayed, press ←  
or →.  
7. To exit from Power On Configuration, press Menu/Enter. Your new value is  
stored in NVM.  
Emulation  
You can set the emulation type to any of the following values:  
v Native 4247 (default)  
v 4202 III XL  
v 2381  
v Epson FX  
To change or check the Emulation type:  
94 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1. Ensure the printer is powered off (O).  
2. Press and hold Menu/Enter while powering on (|) the printer. The message  
STARTING UP displays.  
3. After start-up is complete, release Menu/Enter and the message PRINT OUT=NO  
displays.  
4. Press ↓ until the message SERIAL INTERFACE displays.  
5. Press → until the message INTF=xxxxxxxxx displays, where xxxxxxxxx can be  
SERIAL NO, RS-232C, or RS-422A.  
6. Press ↓ until the message EMUL=xxxxxxxxxxx displays, where xxxxxxxxxxx can  
be NATIVE 4247, 4202 III XL, 2381, or EPSON FX. If you want to select a value  
other than the one displayed, press ← or →.  
7. To exit from Power On Configuration, press Menu/Enter. Your new value is  
stored in NVM.  
Character Set  
You can set the character set to any of the following values:  
v PC1 (PC Character Set 1)  
v PC2 (PC Character Set 2) (default)  
v Italic (Epson FX only)  
To change or check the Character Set:  
1. Ensure the printer is powered off (O).  
2. Press and hold Menu/Enter while powering on (|) the printer. The message  
STARTING UP displays.  
3. After start-up is complete, release Menu/Enter and the message PRINT OUT=NO  
displays.  
4. Press ↓ until the message SERIAL INTERFACE displays.  
5. Press → until the message INTF=xxxxxxxxx displays, where xxxxxxxxx can be  
SERIAL NO, RS-232C, or RS-422A.  
6. Press ↓ until the message CHAR SET=xxxxxx displays, where xxxxxx can be PC1,  
PC2, or ITALIC. If you want to select a value other than the one displayed, press  
← or →.  
7. To exit from Power On Configuration, press Menu/Enter. Your new value is  
stored in NVM.  
Print Language  
You can select any print language that is available for your printer. The following  
print languages are available when printer emulation is set to Native 4247, 4202 III  
XL, 2381, or Epson FX:  
Arabic  
CP864  
CP1046  
CP921  
CP863  
CP855  
CP915  
CP866  
CP1251  
CP865  
CP922  
Arabic Extended  
Baltic Multilingual  
Canadian French  
Cyrillic  
Cyrillic (ISO 8859-5)  
Cyrillic 2 (Personal Computer)  
Cyrillic Windows  
Danish/Norwegian  
Estonian  
Chapter 4. Configuring Your Printer 95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Estonian (Personal Computer)  
Farsi (Personal Computer)  
Greek/Latin (ISO 8859-7)  
Hebrew  
CP1116  
CP1098  
CP813  
CP862  
CP861  
CP819  
CP912  
CP852  
CP913  
CP914  
CP920  
CP1089  
CP916  
CP1117  
CP1118  
CP850  
CP869  
CP876  
CP877  
CP851  
CP860  
CP874  
CP853  
CP857  
CP1006  
CP437  
Icelandic  
Latin 1 (ISO 8859-1)  
Latin 2 (ISO 8859-2)  
Latin 2/ROECE  
Latin 3 (ISO 8859-3)  
Latin 4 (ISO 8859-4)  
Latin 5 (ISO 8859-9)  
Latin 6 (ISO 8859-6)  
Latin 8 (ISO 8858-8)  
Latvian (Personal Computer)  
Lithuanian (Personal Computer)  
Mulitlingual  
New Greek  
OCR-A  
OCR-B  
Old Greek  
Portuguese  
Thai  
Turkish 1  
Turkish 2  
Urdu  
USA (Personal Computer)*  
* Manufacturing default with emulation set to Native 4247, 4202 III XL, or 2381  
These additional print languages are only available if the printer emulation is set to  
Epson FX:  
Denmark 1  
Denmark 2  
England  
France  
French Canadian  
Germany  
Italy  
Japan  
Latin American 1  
Latin American 2  
Norway  
Spain 1  
Spain 2  
Sweden  
USA*  
* Manufacturing default with emulation set to Epson FX  
To change or check the Print Language:  
1. Ensure the printer is powered off (O).  
2. Press and hold Menu/Enter while powering on (|) the printer. The message  
STARTING UP displays.  
96 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. After start-up is complete, release Menu/Enter and the message PRINT OUT=NO  
displays.  
4. Press ↓ until the message SERIAL INTERFACE displays.  
5. Press → until the message INTF=xxxxxxxxx displays, where xxxxxxxxx can be  
SERIAL NO, RS-232C, or RS-422A.  
6. Press ↓ until the message LANG=xxxxxxxx displays, where xxxxxxxx can be  
CP437 through CP1098 when emulation is set Native 4247, 4202 III XL, or 2381  
or where xxxxxxxx can be USA through CP1098 when emulation is set to Epson  
FX. If you want to select a value other than the one displayed, press ← or →.  
7. To exit from Power On Configuration, press Menu/Enter. Your new value is  
stored in NVM.  
Automatic Carriage Return on Line Feed  
You can set the printer to perform an automatic carriage return on a line feed. You  
can set this value to:  
No (default)  
Yes  
No automatic carriage return is performed at a line feed.  
An automatic carriage return is performed after a line feed.  
To change or check the Automatic Carriage Return after Line Feed:  
1. Ensure the printer is powered off (O).  
2. Press and hold Menu/Enter while powering on (|) the printer. The message  
STARTING UP displays.  
3. After start-up is complete, release Menu/Enter and the message PRINT OUT=NO  
displays.  
4. Press ↓ until the message SERIAL INTERFACE displays.  
5. Press → until the message INTF=xxxxxxxxx displays, where xxxxxxxxx can be  
SERIAL NO, RS-232C, or RS-422A.  
6. Press ↓ until the message AUTO CR=xxx displays, where xxx can be NO or YES. If  
you want to select a value other than the one displayed, press ← or →.  
7. To exit from Power On Configuration, press Menu/Enter. Your new value is  
stored in NVM.  
Automatic Line Feed on Carriage Return  
You can set the printer to perform an automatic line feed on carriage return. You  
can set this value to:  
No (default)  
Yes  
No line feed is performed after a carriage return.  
An automatic line feed is performed after a carriage return.  
To change or check the Automatic Line Feed on Carriage Return:  
1. Ensure the printer is powered off (O).  
2. Press and hold Menu/Enter while powering on (|) the printer. The message  
STARTING UP displays.  
3. After start-up is complete, release Menu/Enter and the message PRINT OUT=NO  
displays.  
4. Press ↓ until the message SERIAL INTERFACE displays.  
5. Press → until the message INTF=xxxxxxxxx displays, where xxxxxxxxx can be  
SERIAL NO, RS-232C, or RS-422A.  
Chapter 4. Configuring Your Printer 97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6. Press ↓ until the message AUTO LF=xxxx displays, where xxxx can be NO or YES.  
If you want to select a value other than the one displayed, press ← or →.  
7. To exit from Power On Configuration, press Menu/Enter. Your new value is  
stored in NVM.  
20 CPI  
You can set the printer to allow 20 CPI condensed print from the data stream. For  
more information, see “Shift In (SI) / Condensed Print” on page 190. You can set  
this value to:  
No (default)  
A combination of 12 CPI and a condensed print data stream  
command (Shift In) sets the printer to 12 CPI.  
Yes  
A combination of 12 CPI and a condensed print data stream  
command (Shift In) sets the printer to 20 CPI.  
To change or check the 20 CPI value:  
1. Ensure the printer is powered off (O).  
2. Press and hold Menu/Enter while powering on (|) the printer. The message  
STARTING UP displays.  
3. After start-up is complete, release Menu/Enter and the message PRINT OUT=NO  
displays.  
4. Press ↓ until the message SERIAL INTERFACE displays.  
5. Press → until the message INTF=xxxxxxxxx displays, where xxxxxxxxx can be  
SERIAL NO, RS-232C, or RS-422A.  
6. Press ↓ until the message 20 CPI=xxx displays, where xxxx can be NO or YES. If  
you want to select a value other than the one displayed, press ← or →.  
7. To exit from Power On Configuration, press Menu/Enter. Your new value is  
stored in NVM.  
NLQ  
Note: Using NLQ reduces printer throughput by approximately 50%.  
You can change the font for Near Letter Quality (NLQ) printing, available through  
the operator panel Font key, to either of the following values:  
v Courier (default)  
v Gothic  
To change or check the NLQ font value:  
1. Ensure the printer is powered off (O).  
2. Press and hold Menu/Enter while powering on (|) the printer. The message  
STARTING UP displays.  
3. After start-up is complete, release Menu/Enter and the message PRINT OUT=NO  
displays.  
4. Press ↓ until the message SERIAL INTERFACE displays.  
5. Press → until the message INTF=xxxxxxxxx displays, where xxxxxxxxx can be  
SERIAL NO, RS-232C, or RS-422A.  
6. Press ↓ until the message NLQ=xxxxxxx displays, where xxxxxxx can be COURIER  
or GOTHIC. If you want to select a value other than the one displayed, press ← or  
→.  
98 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
7. To exit from Power On Configuration, press Menu/Enter. Your new value is  
stored in NVM.  
Functions  
This category defines forms condition variables that can be set, as well as other  
miscellaneous conditions available on the printer. There are several different  
parameters available:  
v Front Tear Mode (for Push paths)  
v Rear Tear Mode (for Push paths)  
v Paper Overlay (for Push paths and Manual Sheet Feed)  
v Sequence (for Push paths and ASF bins)  
v Alarm  
v Automatic Load (for Manual Sheet Feed)  
v Display Language  
Front Tear Mode  
This parameter selects the tear-off function for forms that are loaded in the Front  
Push forms path. See “Checking and Adjusting Tear-Off Position” on page 25 for  
more information about adjusting the tear-off position. Your choices are:  
Norm (default)  
Press Tear to move the form to the tear line. After a 10-second  
delay the forms move back down to the print position. Press Tear  
again to move the forms back without waiting for the 10-second  
delay.  
Auto  
No  
Once printing finishes, the forms automatically move up to the  
tear-off line. The forms remain there until another job is sent to the  
printer. When a job is sent, the forms move back down to the print  
position, and printing continues.  
This option disables reverse forms movement. Select No for forms  
that should not be moved through the printer in a reverse direction,  
such as forms with attached labels and forms with overlays.  
Note: Setting this parameter to No modifies how forms park. See  
“Parking One Continuous Form and Loading Another (Dual  
Push)” on page 59 and “Parking Continuous Forms” on  
page 29.  
To change or check the Front Tear Mode value:  
1. Ensure the printer is powered off (O).  
2. Press and hold Menu/Enter while powering on (|) the printer. The message  
STARTING UP displays.  
3. After start-up is complete, release Menu/Enter and the message PRINT OUT=NO  
displays.  
4. Press ↓ until the message FUNCTIONS displays.  
5. Press → until the message FRONT TEAR=xxxx displays, where xxxx can be NORM,  
AUTO, or NO. If you want to select a value other than the one displayed, press ←  
or →.  
6. To exit from Power On Configuration, press Menu/Enter. Your new value is  
stored in NVM. It takes a few seconds for the new value to be accepted.  
Chapter 4. Configuring Your Printer 99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Rear Tear Mode  
This parameter selects the tear-off function for forms that are loaded in the Rear  
Push forms path. (See “Checking and Adjusting Tear-Off Position” on page 25 for  
more information about adjusting the tear-off position.) Your choices are:  
Norm (default)  
This is the default option. Press Tear to move the form to the tear  
line. After a 10 second delay the forms will back down into the  
printer. Press Tear again to move the forms back without waiting for  
the 10-second delay.  
Auto  
No  
Once printing finishes, the forms automatically move up to the  
tear-off line. The forms remain there until another job is sent to the  
printer. When a job is sent, the forms move down to the print  
position and printing continues.  
This option disables reverse forms movement. Select No for forms  
that should not be moved through the printer in a reverse direction,  
such as forms with attached labels and forms with overlays.  
Note: Setting this parameter to No modifies how forms park. See  
“Parking One Continuous Form and Loading Another (Dual  
Push)” on page 59 and “Parking Continuous Forms” on  
page 29.  
To change or check the Rear Tear Mode value:  
1. Ensure the printer is powered off (O).  
2. Press and hold Menu/Enter while powering on (|) the printer. The message  
STARTING UP displays.  
3. After start-up is complete, release Menu/Enter and the message PRINT OUT=NO  
displays.  
4. Press ↓ until the message FUNCTIONS displays.  
5. Press → until the message FRONT TEAR=xxxx displays, where xxxx can be NORM,  
AUTO, or NO.  
6. Press ↓ until the message REAR TEAR=xxxx displays, where xxxx can be NORM,  
AUTO, or NO. If you want to select a value other than the one displayed, press ←  
or →.  
7. To exit from Power On Configuration, press Menu/Enter. Your new value is  
stored in NVM. It takes a few seconds for the new value to be accepted.  
Paper Overlay  
The paper overlay function allows you to simultaneously feed (and overlay) a single  
sheet of paper from the Manual Sheet Feed while processing forms through one of  
the push paths (Front Push or Rear Push forms path). You can set forms overlay to  
one of the following values:  
No (default)  
Disables the printer from feeding simultaneously from the Manual  
Sheet Feed and one of the forms paths.  
Yes  
Enables the printer to feed simultaneously from the Manual Sheet  
Feed and one of the forms paths.  
Notes:  
1. The Paper Overlay function cannot be used with the Rear Pull or Push+Pull  
forms paths.  
100 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2. If Paper Overlay is set to YES, when loading cut-sheet paper into the printer,  
hold the paper firmly in place until it is fed into the printer.  
To change or check the Paper Overlay value:  
1. Ensure the printer is powered off (O).  
2. Press and hold Menu/Enter while powering on (|) the printer.  
3. After start-up is complete, release Menu/Enter and the message PRINT OUT=NO  
displays.  
4. Press ↓ until the message FUNCTIONS displays.  
5. Press → until the message FRONT TEAR=xxxx displays, where xxxx can be NORM,  
AUTO, or NO.  
6. Press ↓ until the message PAPER OVERLY=xxx displays, where xxx can be NO or  
YES. If you want to select a value other than the one displayed, press ← or →.  
7. To exit from Power On Configuration, press Menu/Enter. Your new value is  
stored in NVM and the printer becomes ready.  
8. If a continuous form is present in the forms path, press Tear, tear off at output  
and park the form.  
9. Press Path until the indicators for Manual Sheet Feed and the desired  
continuous forms path light.  
Sequence  
This parameter defines the automatic loading sequence. When forms are depleted  
from the primary forms path, the printer automatically loads forms from the alternate  
path.  
None (default)  
Defines the automatic loading sequence as disabled.  
This setting is used when the printer is set for dual push, but has  
different forms loaded in the front push and rear push paths.  
FR+RR  
Defines automatic forms loading from the Front Push forms path  
and then the Rear Push forms path.  
This setting is used when the printer is set for dual push with the  
same forms loaded in the front push and rear push paths.  
ASF1+2  
ASF123  
Defines the automatic forms loading sequence for the ASF from  
tray 1 and then tray 2.  
Defines the automatic forms loading sequence for the ASF from  
tray 1, tray 2, then tray 3.  
To change or check the Sequence value:  
1. Ensure the printer is powered off (O).  
2. Press and hold Menu/Enter while powering on (|) the printer. The message  
STARTING UP displays.  
3. After start-up is complete, release Menu/Enter and the message PRINT OUT=NO  
displays.  
4. Press ↓ until the message FUNCTIONS displays.  
5. Press → until the message FRONT TEAR=xxxx displays, where xxxx can be NORM,  
AUTO, or NO.  
Chapter 4. Configuring Your Printer 101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6. Press ↓ until the message SEQUENCE=xxxxxx displays, where xxxxxx can be NONE,  
FR+RR ASF1+2, ASF123. If you want to select a value other than the one  
displayed, press ← or →.  
7. To exit from Power On Configuration, press Menu/Enter. Your new value is  
stored in NVM.  
Alarm  
The audible alarm will sound after you interrupt a ready condition. You can stop the  
alarm after it begins sounding by pressing a key.  
You can set the audible alarm by selecting one of the following values:  
Yes (default) Alarm will sound.  
No  
Alarm will not sound.  
To change or check the Alarm control value:  
1. Ensure the printer is powered off (O).  
2. Press and hold Menu/Enter while powering on (|) the printer. The message  
STARTING UP displays.  
3. After start-up is complete, release Menu/Enter and the message PRINT OUT=NO  
displays.  
4. Press ↓ until the message FUNCTIONS displays.  
5. Press → until the message FRONT TEAR=xxxx displays, where xxxx can be NORM,  
AUTO, or NO.  
6. Press ↓ until the message ALARM=xxx displays, where xxx can be YES or NO. If  
you want to select a value other than the one displayed, press ← or →.  
7. To exit from Power On Configuration, press Menu/Enter. Your new value is  
stored in NVM.  
Automatic Load  
This parameter is available only for Manual Sheet Feed. You can set automatic load  
to one of the following values:  
Yes (default) Enables the quick printing function. This means that a single sheet  
form will be loaded automatically when inserted into the printer.  
No  
Disables the quick printing function. This means that a single sheet  
form will not be loaded automatically when inserted into the printer.  
To load the form, press Load/Form Feed.  
To change or check the Automatic Load value:  
1. Ensure the printer is powered off (O).  
2. Press and hold Menu/Enter while powering on (|) the printer. The message  
STARTING UP displays.  
3. After start-up is complete, release Menu/Enter and the message PRINT OUT=NO  
displays.  
4. Press ↓ until the message FUNCTIONS displays.  
5. Press → until the message FRONT TEAR=xxxx displays, where xxxx can be NORM,  
AUTO, or NO.  
6. Press ↓ until the message AUTOLOAD=xxx displays, where xxx can be YES or NO. If  
you want to select a value other than the one displayed, press ← or →.  
102 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
7. To exit from Power On Configuration, press Menu/Enter. Your new value is  
stored in NVM.  
Display Language  
You can choose the language in which the operator panel display appears. Your  
choices are:  
v English (default)  
v Italiano  
v Francais  
v Espanol  
v Deutsch  
v Portugues  
v Dansk  
v Nederlands  
To change or check the Display Language value:  
1. Ensure the printer is powered off (O).  
2. Press and hold Menu/Enter while powering on (|) the printer. The message  
STARTING UP displays.  
3. After start-up is complete, release Menu/Enter and the message PRINT OUT=NO  
displays.  
4. Press ↓ until the message FUNCTIONS displays.  
5. Press → until the message FRONT TEAR=xxxx displays, where xxxx can be NORM,  
AUTO, or NO.  
6. Press ↓ until the message MENU=xxxxxxxxxx displays, where xxxxxxxxxx can be  
ENGLISH, ITALIANO, FRANCAIS, ESPANOL, DEUTSCH, PORTUGUES, DANSK, NEDERLANDS. If  
you want to select a value other than the one displayed, press ← or →.  
7. To exit from Power On Configuration, press Menu/Enter. Your new value is  
stored in NVM.  
Sensor Tune  
This category establishes the black light threshold levels for the paper-present  
sensors. This adjustment is set initially by IBM when the printer is manufactured  
and may have to be adjusted for long-term aging of the sensor if a false  
end-of-forms occurs.  
You can set sensor tune to either of the following values:  
v No (default)  
v Yes  
To change or check the Sensor Tune category:  
1. Remove all paper or forms from the printer.  
2. Power off (O) the printer.  
3. Press and hold Menu/Enter while powering on (|) the printer. The message  
STARTING UP displays.  
4. After start-up is complete, release Menu/Enter and the message PRINT OUT=NO  
displays.  
Chapter 4. Configuring Your Printer 103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5. Press ↓ until the message SENSOR TUNE=xxx displays, where xxx can be NO or  
YES. If you want to select a value other than the one displayed, press ← or →.  
If you set SENSOR TUNE=YES, press ↓. The sensors will be tuned and the  
message SENSOR TUNE=NO will display indicating completion.  
6. To exit from Power On Configuration, press Menu/Enter. Your new value is  
stored in NVM.  
Bidirectional Adjustment  
This category lets you adjust dot registration and print quality by running the  
bidirectional adjustment test pattern. The bidirectional alignment may need periodic  
adjustment to maintain print quality.  
The test pattern consists of these parts:  
v Two groups of Hs (four lines each) with the current alignment value inserted  
between them.  
v A line of Hs and Is printed on one line.  
You can set bidirectional adjustment from -6 to 6 (where each unit is 0.212 mm  
[1/120 in.]). The default value is 0.  
To change or check the Bidirectional adjustment:  
1. Ensure the printer is powered off (O).  
2. Press and hold Menu/Enter while powering on (|) the printer. The message  
STARTING UP displays.  
3. After start-up is complete, release Menu/Enter and the message PRINT OUT=NO  
displays.  
4. Press ↓ until the message BIDI ADJUST=xx displays, where xx can be -6 to 6. If  
you want to select a value other than the one displayed, press ← or →.  
Once you change a value, press Online to print the adjustment test pattern.  
After the test is completed the forms will advance above the tear bar so you can  
view the printed pattern. If the quality is not acceptable, repeat step 4 again to  
select another value.  
5. Once you have acceptable print quality, press Menu/Enter to exit from the  
Power On Configuration menu. Your new value is stored in NVM.  
Restore Manufacturing Defaults  
Use this category to exit from the Power On Configuration Menu and restore the  
factory default values. Your choices are:  
v No (default)  
v Yes  
To Restore Manufacturing Defaults:  
1. Ensure the printer is powered off (O).  
2. Press and hold Menu/Enter while powering on (|) the printer. The message  
STARTING UP displays.  
3. After start-up is complete, release Menu/Enter and the message PRINT OUT=NO  
displays.  
4. Press ↓ until the message RESTORE MFG=xxx displays, where xxx can be NO or  
YES. If NO is selected, you exit from the Power On Configuration Menu and any  
104 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
new values selected will be stored in NVM. If YES is selected, you exit from the  
Power On Configuration Menu and all values are restored to those set at the  
factory.  
Printing Power On Configuration Setup  
Once you have made all your configuration changes, IBM recommends that you  
print your changes and save the printout for future reference.  
To print the power on configuration:  
1. Ensure the printer is powered off (O).  
2. Press and continue to hold Menu/Enter while powering on (|) the printer until  
(1) the message STARTING UP appears, (2) the boxes on the operator panel  
display are solidly filled in, and (3) the printhead stops. This takes about fifteen  
seconds. Do not release this key or press any other keys until this completes.  
3. After start-up is complete, release Menu/Enter and the message PRINT OUT=NO  
displays.  
4. To print the current settings on the printer, press →. The message PRINT OUT=YES  
displays and the power on configuration setup printout starts printing.  
Your printout will look similar to this sample. This sample depicts the default  
settings.  
Chapter 4. Configuring Your Printer 105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Program Configuration  
This section lists the categories available and the manufacturing defaults for the  
Program Configuration menu.  
Notes:  
1. Each category is described in detail in the sections following the chart.  
2. After you make configuration changes, IBM recommends that you print your  
changes and save the printout for future reference. For more information, see  
“Printing Program Configuration Setup” on page 121.  
3. For information about entering and exiting printer configuration mode, see  
“Entering Printer Configuration” on page 81 and “Exiting Printer Configuration”  
on page 82.  
106 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Program Configuration Menu Tree  
Figure 46 provides a view of the path you can take through the Program  
Configuration menus.  
Main Menu  
Submenus  
*NO  
YES  
PRINT OUT  
*0, -24 to 24 (Level A)  
*0, -312 to 24 (Level B)  
FRONT PATH  
REAR PATH  
TEAR POS. ADJUST  
1 FORM PER PATH  
ONE FORM ONLY  
*FRONT PUSH  
MANUAL FEED  
REAR PUSH  
REAR PULL  
PUSH+PULL  
ASF1  
PATH  
ASF2+3  
*SOFT  
STRONG  
IMPACT  
*NO  
YES  
PERF SAFE  
*0, -5 to +3  
Fixed 0 to 8  
*AFTA  
ADJUSTMENTS  
FORM SETTING  
HORIZ ADJUST  
VERT ADJUST  
*10, 1 to 60  
*0, -24 to 24 (Level A)  
*0 -24 to 288 (Level B)  
TOP OF FORM  
*0 to 660  
SKIP PERF  
*0 to 660  
LINE SP  
LINE SP LOCK  
PAGE LENGTH  
*66, 1 to 660  
A2 to A5  
LEGAL  
*NO  
YES  
*6 LPI  
8 LPI  
12 LPI  
3L/30MM  
4L/30MM  
6L/30MM  
8L/30MM  
12L/30MM  
LETTER  
LEFT MARGIN  
RIGHT MARGIN  
FONT  
PITCH LOCK  
PITCH  
*0 to 66  
through  
*0 to 270  
(determined  
by PITCH)  
*136, 2 to 68  
through  
2 to 272  
(determined  
by PITCH)  
*NO  
YES  
5 CPI  
6 CPI  
*DP  
DP TEXT  
COURIER  
GOTHIC  
OCR-A  
OCR-B  
7.5 CPI  
8.5 CPI  
*10 CPI  
12 CPI  
1 5 CPI  
17.1 CPI  
20 CPI  
PROP  
*NO  
YES  
ANOTHER PATH  
CONFIG MENU  
HEX DUMP  
*NO  
YES  
SLASH ZERO  
RESTORE MFG  
*NO  
YES  
*NO  
YES  
*NO  
YES  
*QUIT  
SAVE  
STORE  
CURRENT  
* Manufacturing Default (except Manual Sheet Feed)  
Figure 46. Program Configuration Menu Tree  
After printing the program configuration, the display returns to PRINT OUT=NO. Press  
Menu/Enter twice to exit configuration mode.  
Chapter 4. Configuring Your Printer 107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Tear Position Adjustment  
This category adjusts the tear off position for your forms. You can select either of  
the following parameters. See “Checking and Adjusting Tear-Off Position” on  
page 25 for the full tear-off adjustment procedure.  
v Front Path  
v Rear Path  
Note: When either tear position (Front Path or Rear Path) is adjusted, you must  
adjust the Vertical configuration item in the opposite direction. For example, if  
you adjust the tear position to 24, you must adjust the Vertical to -24. See  
“Vertical” on page 112.  
Front Path  
You can adjust the tear position for forms loaded in the Front Push forms path from  
-24 to 24 (where each unit is 0.176 mm [1/144 in.]). The default value is 0.  
To change or check the Front Path tear position:  
1. Press Menu/Enter. The message PRINT OUT=NO displays.  
2. Press ↓ and the message TEAR POS. ADJUST displays.  
3. Press → and the message FRONT PATH=xxx displays, where xxx can be -24 to 24.  
If you want to select a value other than the one displayed, press ← to increment  
from 24 to -24 or press → to increment from -24 to 24.  
4. To exit from Program Configuration, press ↓ until the message STORE=QUIT  
displays. If you want to exit without saving the new value, press Menu/Enter.  
If you want to save the new value, press ← or → to select either STORE=SAVE (new  
value is stored in NVM) or STORE=CURRENT (new value remains valid until the  
printer is powered off (O)). Press Menu/Enter to save the new value.  
Once you change the value and save it, press Tear to verify the new tear off  
position. If this position is still not where you want it, repeat the above steps to  
change the value.  
Rear Path  
You can adjust the tear position for forms loaded in the Rear Push forms path from  
-24 to 24 (where each unit is 0.176 mm [1/144 in.]). The default value is 0.  
To change or check the Rear Path tear position:  
1. Press Menu/Enter. The message PRINT OUT=NO displays.  
2. Press ↓ and the message TEAR POS. ADJUST displays.  
3. Press → and the message FRONT PATH=xxx displays, where xxx can be -24 to 24.  
4. Press ↓ and the message REAR PATH=xxx displays, where xxx can be -24 to 24.  
If you want to select a value other than the one displayed, press ← to increment  
from 24 to -24 or press → to increment from -24 to 24.  
5. To exit from Program Configuration, press ↓ until the message STORE=QUIT  
displays. If you want to exit without saving the new value, press Menu/Enter.  
If you want to save the new value, press ← or → to select either STORE=SAVE (new  
value is stored in NVM) or STORE=CURRENT (new value remains valid until the  
printer is powered off (O)). Press Menu/Enter to save the new value.  
108 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Once you change the value and save it, press Tear to verify the new tear off  
position. If this position is still not where you want it, repeat the above steps to  
change the value.  
1 Form Per Path  
You can set this category to either of the following values:  
1 Form Per Path (default)  
When forms are loaded from the operator panel or by the software,  
those forms will use the parameters that are defined for the forms  
path that is selected in the Paper Paths category.  
One Form Only  
When you load the forms, only the current values on the printer  
apply to these forms. The printer does not associate the values that  
were previously stored for the selected forms path.  
To change or check the Paper Path Setup:  
1. Press Menu/Enter. The message PRINT OUT=NO displays.  
2. Press ↓ until either the message 1 FORM PER PATH or ONE FORM ONLY displays. If  
you want to select a value other than the one displayed, press ← or →.  
3. To exit from Program Configuration, press ↓ until the message STORE=QUIT  
displays. If you want to exit without saving the new value, press Menu/Enter.  
If you want to save the new value, press ← or → to select either STORE=SAVE (new  
value is stored in NVM) or STORE=CURRENT (new value remains valid until the  
printer is powered off (O)). Press Menu/Enter to save the new value.  
Path  
The values that are available in this category depend on which paths were selected  
in the Power On Configuration menu. See “Power On Configuration” on page 82 for  
information on this menu. The forms path setting can be set to any of the following  
values:  
Note: Use the Automatic Sheet Feeder (ASF) only with the Front Push and Manual  
Sheet Feed paths. Remove the ASF to set up your printer for any other  
forms path.  
Front Push (default)  
Forms are fed from the Front Push tractor.  
Manual Feed Cut-sheet feeding from the Manual Sheet Feed forms path.  
This path is always standard with any of the other forms  
paths.  
Note: This option always is available with Front or Rear  
Push forms paths.  
Rear Push  
Rear Pull  
Forms feeding from the Rear Push tractor (forms enter and  
exit from the rear of the printer). If this path is selected, the  
Rear Pull and Push+Pull paths are not available.  
Note: This value will be the default if you install a second  
optional Rear Push tractor.  
Forms feeding from the front entry of the printer and pulling  
Chapter 4. Configuring Your Printer 109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
by the Rear Pull tractor. If this path is selected, the Rear  
Push and Push+Pull paths are not available. See “Pull” on  
page 84 for more information.  
Push+Pull  
Forms feed from the Front Push tractor and are pulled by  
the rear tractor. This path is only available if a second tractor  
is installed and PUSH+PULL was selected in the Power On  
Configuration menu. If this path is selected, the Rear Push  
and Rear Pull forms paths are not available.  
ASF1  
Forms feeding from the Automatic Sheet Feeder Tray 1. This  
path is available only if the Automatic Sheet Feeder is  
installed.  
ASF2+3  
Forms feeding from the Automatic Sheet Feeder Trays 2 and  
3. This path is available only if the Automatic Sheet Feeder  
is installed.  
To change or check the Paper Path:  
1. Press Menu/Enter. The message PRINT OUT=NO displays.  
2. Press ↓ until the message PATH=xxxxxxxxxxx displays, where  
xxxxxxxxxxx can be FRONT PUSH, MANUAL FEED, REAR PUSH, REAR PULL,  
PUSH+PULL, ASF1, or ASF2+3. If you want to select a value other than the  
one displayed, press ← or →.  
3. To exit from Program Configuration, press ↓ until the message  
STORE=QUIT displays. If you want to exit without saving the new value,  
press Menu/Enter.  
If you want to save the new value, press ← or → to select either  
STORE=SAVE (new value is stored in NVM) or STORE=CURRENT (new value  
remains valid until the printer is powered off (O)). Press Menu/Enter to  
save the new value.  
Impact Strength  
With this category you can select the impact force applied by the printhead to the  
ribbon and the forms. You can select either of the following impact values:  
Soft (default) For single-part continuous and cut-sheet forms. If soft is set and a  
thicker form is detected or graphics are printed, then the printer  
automatically switches to strong.  
Strong  
For multiple-part forms. If strong is set and a single-part form is  
detected, the impact stays at strong.  
To change or check the Impact Strength:  
1. Press Menu/Enter. The message PRINT OUT=NO displays.  
2. Press ↓ until the message IMPACT=xxxxxx displays, where xxxxxx can be SOFT or  
STRONG. If you want to select a value other than the one displayed, press ← or →.  
3. To exit from Program Configuration, press ↓ until the message STORE=QUIT  
displays. If you want to exit without saving the new value, press Menu/Enter.  
If you want to save the new value, press ← or → to select either STORE=SAVE (new  
value is stored in NVM) or STORE=CURRENT (new value remains valid until the  
printer is powered off (O)). Press Menu/Enter to save the new value.  
110 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Perforation Safety  
You can set perforation safety to either of the following values:  
No (default)  
The printhead is not parked all the way to the right of the print line  
while the perforation of the form is passing through the mylar  
opening.  
Yes  
The printhead is parked all the way to the right of the print line so  
that the perforation of the form can advance through the mylar  
without the printhead touching the form. This setting is  
recommended for thick multiple-part forms.  
To change or check the Perforation Safety value:  
1. Press Menu/Enter. The message PRINT OUT=NO displays.  
2. Press ↓ until the message PERF SAFE=xxx displays, where xxx can be NO or YES.  
If you want to select a value other than the one displayed, press ← or →.  
3. To exit from Program Configuration, press ↓ until the message STORE=QUIT  
displays. If you want to exit without saving the new value, press Menu/Enter.  
If you want to save the new value, press ← or → to select either STORE=SAVE (new  
value is stored in NVM) or STORE=CURRENT (new value remains valid until the  
printer is powered off (O)). Press Menu/Enter to save the new value.  
Adjustments  
This category contains the following parameters:  
v Automatic Forms Thickness (AFTA)  
v Horizontal  
v Vertical  
Automatic Forms Thickness (AFTA)  
This adjustment allows you to set the distance or gap between either the printhead  
and the forms or the printhead and the platen. The Automatic Forms Thickness  
Adjustment can be set to one of the following ranges:  
-5 to +3 (0=default)  
Sets the gap between the printhead and the forms. Each increment  
equals 0.03 mm (0.0012 in.). The default setting of 0 corresponds  
to a gap of 0.15 mm (0.006 in.).  
Fixed 0 to 8  
Sets the gap between the printhead and the platen to a fixed  
distance. When a fixed value is selected, the printer will maintain  
that dimension regardless of the thickness of the forms. Each  
increment of 0.5 corresponds to 0.05 mm (0.002 in.) and is added  
to the default gap of 0.15 mm (0.006 in.). Select this choice for  
forms like labels with varying thicknesses. The default value is 0.  
To change or check the AFTA:  
1. Press Menu/Enter. The message PRINT OUT=NO displays.  
2. Press ↓ until the message ADJUSTMENTS displays.  
3. Press → and the message AFTA=xx or FIXED AFTA=x displays, where xx can be  
-5 to +3 or x can be 0 to 8. If you want to select a value other than the one  
displayed, press ← or →.  
Chapter 4. Configuring Your Printer 111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. To exit from Program Configuration, press ↓ until the message STORE=QUIT  
displays. If you want to exit without saving the new value, press Menu/Enter.  
If you want to save the new value, press ← or → to select either STORE=SAVE (new  
value is stored in NVM) or STORE=CURRENT (new value remains valid until the  
printer is powered off (O)). Press Menu/Enter to save the new value.  
Horizontal  
Note: You can find similar information in “Left Margin” on page 117 and “Right  
Margin” on page 117.  
This parameter adjusts the distance of the first print position to the left margin from  
1 to 60 units (where each unit is 0.706 mm [1/36 in.]). The default is 10 units. The  
total range of adjustment is 41.5 mm (1.63 in.).  
To change or check the Horizontal adjustment:  
1. Press Menu/Enter. The message PRINT OUT=NO displays.  
2. Press ↓ until the message ADJUSTMENTS displays.  
3. Press → and the message AFTA=xx or FIXED AFTA=x displays, where xx can be  
-5 to +3 or x can be 0 to 8.  
4. Press ↓ until the message HORIZ ADJUST=xx displays, where xx can be 1 to 60. If  
you want to select a value other than the one displayed, press ← or →.  
5. To exit from Program Configuration, press ↓ until the message STORE=QUIT  
displays. If you want to exit without saving the new value, press Menu/Enter.  
If you want to save the new value, press ← or → to select either STORE=SAVE (new  
value is stored in NVM) or STORE=CURRENT (new value remains valid until the  
printer is powered off (O)). Press Menu/Enter to save the new value.  
Note: If the horizontal adjust value is set and it is too large for the current print line,  
a 35 MARGIN ERROR will occur. For more information on the message, see  
“Chapter 7. Resolving Printer Problems” on page 139.  
Vertical  
This parameter adjusts the distance of the first printable line to the top of the forms  
from -24 to 24 units (where each unit is 0.176 mm [1/144 in.]). The default value is  
0.  
Notes:  
1. When the Vertical configuration item is adjusted, you must adjust the tear  
position in the opposite direction. For example, if you adjust the Vertical  
configuration item to -24, you must adjust the tear position to 24. See “Checking  
and Adjusting Tear-Off Position” on page 25 or “Tear Position Adjustment” on  
page 108, depending on your forms path. Adjust the Vertical configuration  
before you adjust the Tear Position.  
2. You Park and reload forms to get the new position.  
3. You can find similar information in “Top of Form” on page 114.  
To change or check the Vertical adjustment:  
1. Press Menu/Enter. The message PRINT OUT=NO displays.  
2. Press ↓ until the message ADJUSTMENTS displays.  
3. Press → and the message AFTA=xx or FIXED AFTA=x displays, where xx can be  
-5 to +3 or x can be 0 to 8.  
112 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. Press ↓ until the message VERT ADJUST=xxx displays, where xxx can be -24 to  
24. If you want to select a value other than the one displayed, press ← or →.  
5. To exit from Program Configuration, press ↓ until the message STORE=QUIT  
displays. If you want to exit without saving the new value, press Menu/Enter.  
If you want to save the new value, press ← or → to select either STORE=SAVE (new  
value is stored in NVM) or STORE=CURRENT (new value remains valid until the  
printer is powered off (O)). Press Menu/Enter to save the new value.  
Form Setting  
This category contains the following parameters for setting a specific forms path:  
v Line Spacing  
v Line Spacing Lock  
v Page Length  
v Top of Form  
v Perforation Skipping  
v Font  
v Pitch  
v Pitch Lock  
v Left Margin  
v Right Margin  
v Slashed Zero  
v Restore Mfg Defaults  
Line Spacing  
You can set vertical spacing in lines-per-inch or in lines-per-30 mm on your printer.  
Available values are:  
v 6 LPI (default)  
v 8 LPI  
v 12 LPI  
v 3L/30MM  
v 4L/30MM  
v 6L/30MM  
v 8L/30MM  
v 12L/30MM  
To change or check the Line Spacing value:  
1. Press Menu/Enter. The message PRINT OUT=NO displays.  
2. Press ↓ until the message FORM SETTING displays.  
3. Press → until the message LINE SP=xxxxxxx displays, where xxxxxxx can be 6  
LPI, 8 LPI, 12 LPI, 3L/30MM, 4L/30MM, 6L/30MM, 8L/30MM, or 12L/30MM. If you want  
to select a value other than the one displayed, press ← or →.  
4. To exit from Program Configuration, press ↓ until the message STORE=QUIT  
displays. If you want to exit without saving the new value, press Menu/Enter.  
If you want to save the new value, press ← or → to select either STORE=SAVE (new  
value is stored in NVM) or STORE=CURRENT (new value remains valid until the  
printer is powered off (O)). Press Menu/Enter to save the new value.  
Chapter 4. Configuring Your Printer 113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Line Spacing Lock  
You can set this value to:  
No (default)  
The host can override the vertical spacing value (lines per inch or  
lines per 30 mm).  
Yes  
The host cannot override the vertical spacing value (lines per inch  
or lines per 30 mm) that was set through the operator panel.  
To change or check the Line Spacing Lock value:  
1. Press Menu/Enter. The message PRINT OUT=NO displays.  
2. Press ↓ until the message FORM SETTING displays.  
3. Press → until the message LINE SP=xxxxxxx displays, where xxxxxxx can be 6  
LPI, 8 LPI, 12 LPI, 3L/30MM, 4L/30MM, 6L/30MM, 8L/30MM, or 12L/30MM.  
4. Press ↓ until the message LINE SP LOCK=xxx displays, where xxx can be NO or  
YES. If you want to select a value other than the one displayed, press ← or →.  
5. To exit from Program Configuration, press ↓ until the message STORE=QUIT  
displays. If you want to exit without saving the new value, press Menu/Enter.  
If you want to save the new value, press ← or → to select either STORE=SAVE (new  
value is stored in NVM) or STORE=CURRENT (new value remains valid until the  
printer is powered off (O)). Press Menu/Enter to save the new value.  
Page Length  
You can set the page length for continuous forms to a defined number of lines (1 to  
660), or for cut-sheet paper to any of the standard formats (Letter, Legal, A2, A3,  
A4, or A5). To compute the page length, multiply the line spacing value by the  
physical length of the page. The default value is 66 lines for continuous forms and  
LTR (Letter) for cut-sheet paper.  
To change or check the Page Length value:  
1. Press Menu/Enter. The message PRINT OUT=NO displays.  
2. Press ↓ until the message FORM SETTING displays.  
3. Press → until the message LINE SP=xxxxxxx displays, where xxxxxxx can be 6  
LPI, 8 LPI, 12 LPI, 3L/30MM, 4L/30MM, 6L/30MM, 8L/30MM, or 12L/30MM.  
4. Press ↓ until the message PAGE LENGTH=xxx displays, where xxx can be 1 to 66O,  
A5, A4, A3, A2, LGL, or LTR. If you want to select a value other than the one  
displayed, press ← or →.  
5. To exit from Program Configuration, press ↓ until the message STORE=QUIT  
displays. If you want to exit without saving the new value, press Menu/Enter.  
If you want to save the new value, press ← or → to select either STORE=SAVE (new  
value is stored in NVM) or STORE=CURRENT (new value remains valid until the  
printer is powered off (O)). Press Menu/Enter to save the new value.  
Top of Form  
Note: You can find similar information in “Vertical” on page 112.  
The top of form is where you want your first line of printing to start on a page. You  
can adjust the top-of-form position from 0 to 660 units (where each unit is 4.23 mm  
[1/6 in.]). The default value is 0.  
To change or check the Top of Form value:  
114 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1. Press Menu/Enter. The message PRINT OUT=NO displays.  
2. Press ↓ until the message FORM SETTING displays.  
3. Press → until the message LINE SP=xxxxxxx displays, where xxxxxxx can be 6  
LPI, 8 LPI, 12 LPI, 3L/30MM, 4L/30MM, 6L/30MM, 8L/30MM, or 12L/30MM.  
4. Press ↓ until the message TOP OF FORM=xxx displays, where xxx can be 0 to 660.  
If you want to select a value other than the one displayed, press ← or →.  
5. To exit from Program Configuration, press ↓ until the message STORE=QUIT  
displays. If you want to exit without saving the new value, press Menu/Enter.  
If you want to save the new value, press ← or → to select either STORE=SAVE (new  
value is stored in NVM) or STORE=CURRENT (new value remains valid until the  
printer is powered off (O)). Press Menu/Enter to save the new value.  
Perforation Skipping  
You can set the number of units you want skipped over the perforation from 0 to  
660 units (where each unit is 4.23 mm [1/6 in.]). The default value is 0.  
To change or check the Perforation Skipping value:  
1. Press Menu/Enter. The message PRINT OUT=NO displays.  
2. Press ↓ until the message FORM SETTING displays.  
3. Press → until the message LINE SP=xxxxxxx displays, where xxxxxxx can be 6  
LPI, 8 LPI, 12 LPI, 3L/30MM, 4L/30MM, 6L/30MM, 8L/30MM, or 12L/30MM.  
4. Press ↓ until the message SKIP PERF=xxx displays, where xxx can be 0 to 660. If  
you want to select a value other than the one displayed, press ← or →.  
5. To exit from Program Configuration, press ↓ until the message STORE=QUIT  
displays. If you want to exit without saving the new value, press Menu/Enter.  
If you want to save the new value, press ← or → to select either STORE=SAVE (new  
value is stored in NVM) or STORE=CURRENT (new value remains valid until the  
printer is powered off (O)). Press Menu/Enter to save the new value.  
Font  
You can set the font on your printer to any of the following values:  
v DP (default)  
v DP Text  
v Courier  
v Gothic  
v OCR-A  
v OCR-B  
To change or check the Font value:  
1. Press Menu/Enter. The message PRINT OUT=NO displays.  
2. Press ↓ until the message FORM SETTING displays.  
3. Press → until the message LINE SP=xxxxxxx displays, where xxxxxxx can be 6  
LPI, 8 LPI, 12 LPI, 3L/30MM, 4L/30MM, 6L/30MM, 8L/30MM, or 12L/30MM.  
4. Press ↓ until the message FONT=xxxxxxx displays, where xxxxxxx can be DP, DP  
TEXT, COURIER, GOTHIC, OCR-A, or OCR-B. If you want to select a value other than  
the one displayed, press ← or →.  
5. To exit from Program Configuration, press ↓ until the message STORE=QUIT  
displays. If you want to exit without saving the new value, press Menu/Enter.  
Chapter 4. Configuring Your Printer 115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If you want to save the new value, press ← or → to select either STORE=SAVE (new  
value is stored in NVM) or STORE=CURRENT (new value remains valid until the  
printer is powered off (O)). Press Menu/Enter to save the new value.  
Pitch  
You can set the horizontal spacing (characters per inch) on your printer to any of  
the following values:  
v 5 CPI  
v 6 CPI  
v 7.5 CPI  
v 8.5 CPI  
v 10 CPI (default)  
v 12 CPI  
v 15 CPI  
v 17.1 CPI (DP quality only)  
v 20 CPI (DP quality only)  
v Prop (Proportional)  
To change or check the Pitch value:  
1. Press Menu/Enter. The message PRINT OUT=NO displays.  
2. Press ↓ until the message FORM SETTING displays.  
3. Press → until the message LINE SP=xxxxxxx displays, where xxxxxxx can be 6  
LPI, 8 LPI, 12 LPI, 3L/30MM, 4L/30MM, 6L/30MM, 8L/30MM, or 12L/30MM.  
4. Press ↓ until the message PITCH=xxxxxxx displays, where xxxxxxx can be 5 CPI,  
6 CPI, 7.5 CPI, 8.5 CPI, 10 CPI, 12 CPI, 15 CPI, 17.1 CPI, 20 CPI, or PROP. If  
you want to select a value other than the one displayed, press ← or →.  
5. To exit from Program Configuration, press ↓ until the message STORE=QUIT  
displays. If you want to exit without saving the new value, press Menu/Enter.  
If you want to save the new value, press ← or → to select either STORE=SAVE (new  
value is stored in NVM) or STORE=CURRENT (new value remains valid until the  
printer is powered off (O)). Press Menu/Enter to save the new value.  
Pitch Lock  
You can set this value to:  
No (default)  
The host can override the horizontal spacing value (characters per  
inch).  
Yes  
The host cannot override the horizontal spacing value (characters  
per inch) that was set through the operator panel.  
To change or check the Pitch Lock value:  
1. Press Menu/Enter. The message PRINT OUT=NO displays.  
2. Press ↓ until the message FORM SETTING displays.  
3. Press → until the message LINE SP=xxxxxxx displays, where xxxxxxx can be 6  
LPI, 8 LPI, 12 LPI, 3L/30MM, 4L/30MM, 6L/30MM, 8L/30MM, or 12L/30MM.  
4. Press ↓ until the message PITCH LOCK=xxx displays, where xxx can be NO or  
YES. If you want to select a value other than the one displayed, press ← or →.  
5. To exit from Program Configuration, press ↓ until the message STORE=QUIT  
displays. If you want to exit without saving the new value, press Menu/Enter.  
116 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If you want to save the new value, press ← or → to select either STORE=SAVE (new  
value is stored in NVM) or STORE=CURRENT (new value remains valid until the  
printer is powered off (O)). Press Menu/Enter to save the new value.  
Left Margin  
Note: You can find similar information in “Horizontal” on page 112 and “Right  
Margin”.  
This parameter selects the left margin defined as a number of blank print positions  
starting from the position set in Horizontal Adjustment (“Horizontal” on page 112) in  
relation to the current pitch (characters-per-inch setting). Available values are:  
v 0 (default)  
v 0 to 66 (at 5 CPI)  
v 0 to 79 (at 6 CPI)  
v 0 to 100 (at 7.5 CPI)  
v 0 to 114 (at 8.5 CPI)  
v 0 to 134 (at 10 CPI and Prop)  
v 0 to 161 (at 12 CPI)  
v 0 to 202 (at 15 CPI)  
v 0 to 231 (at 17.1 CPI)  
v 0 to 270 (at 20 CPI)  
To change or check the Left Margin:  
1. Press Menu/Enter. The message PRINT OUT=NO displays.  
2. Press ↓ until the message FORM SETTING displays.  
3. Press → until the message LINE SP=xxxxxxx displays, where xxxxxxx can be 6  
LPI, 8 LPI, 12 LPI, 3L/30MM, 4L/30MM, 6L/30MM, 8L/30MM, or 12L/30MM.  
4. Press ↓ until the message LEFT MARGIN=xxx displays, where xxx can be a value  
from 0 to 270 depending on your character-per-inch setting. If you want to select  
a value other than the one displayed, press ← or →.  
5. To exit from Program Configuration, press ↓ until the message STORE=QUIT  
displays. If you want to exit without saving the new value, press Menu/Enter.  
If you want to save the new value, press ← or → to select either STORE=SAVE (new  
value is stored in NVM) or STORE=CURRENT (new value remains valid until the  
printer is powered off (O)). Press Menu/Enter to save the new value.  
Right Margin  
Note: You can find similar information in “Horizontal” on page 112 and “Left  
Margin”.  
This parameter selects the right margin, which is defined as a number of blank print  
positions (+2) starting from the left margin, and extending to the maximum number  
of characters-per-line, at the current pitch. Available values are:  
v 136 (default)  
v 2 to 68 (at 5 CPI)  
v 2 to 81 (at 6 CPI)  
v 2 to 102 (at 7.5 CPI)  
v 2 to 116 (at 8.5 CPI)  
Chapter 4. Configuring Your Printer 117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v 2 to 136 (at 10 CPI and Prop)  
v 2 to 163 (at 12 CPI)  
v 2 to 204 (at 15 CPI)  
v 2 to 233 (at 17.1 CPI)  
v 2 to 272 (at 20 CPI)  
To change or check the Right Margin:  
1. Press Menu/Enter. The message PRINT OUT=NO displays.  
2. Press ↓ until the message FORM SETTING displays.  
3. Press → until the message LINE SP=xxxxxxx displays, where xxxxxxx can be 6  
LPI, 8 LPI, 12 LPI, 3L/30MM, 4L/30MM, 6L/30MM, 8L/30MM, or 12L/30MM.  
4. Press ↓ until the message RIGHT MARGIN=xxx displays, where xxx can be a value  
from 2 to 272 depending on your character-per-inch setting. If you want to select  
a value other than the one displayed, press ← or →.  
5. To exit from Program Configuration, press ↓ until the message STORE=QUIT  
displays. If you want to exit without saving the new value, press Menu/Enter.  
If you want to save the new value, press ← or → to select either STORE=SAVE (new  
value is stored in NVM) or STORE=CURRENT (new value remains valid until the  
printer is powered off (O)). Press Menu/Enter to save the new value.  
Slashed Zero  
You can set this value to:  
No (default)  
Yes  
All printed zeros will appear without a slash through them.  
All printed zeros will appear with a slash through them.  
To change or check the Slashed Zero:  
1. Press Menu/Enter. The message PRINT OUT=NO displays.  
2. Press ↓ until the message FORM SETTING displays.  
3. Press → until the message LINE SP=xxxxxxx displays, where xxxxxxx can be 6  
LPI, 8 LPI, 12 LPI, 3L/30MM, 4L/30MM, 6L/30MM, 8L/30MM, or 12L/30MM.  
4. Press ↓ until the message SLASH ZERO=xxx displays, where xxx can be NO or  
YES. If you want to select a value other than the one displayed, press ← or →.  
5. To exit from Program Configuration, press ↓ until the message STORE=QUIT  
displays. If you want to exit without saving the new value, press Menu/Enter.  
If you want to save the new value, press ← or → to select either STORE=SAVE (new  
value is stored in NVM) or STORE=CURRENT (new value remains valid until the  
printer is powered off (O)). Press Menu/Enter to save the new value.  
Restore Manufacturing Defaults  
You can set this value to:  
No (default)  
Yes  
Save the new values of the selected forms path.  
Return to the manufacturing default values of the selected forms  
path.  
To change or check the Manufacturing Default values:  
1. Press Menu/Enter. The message PRINT OUT=NO displays.  
2. Press ↓ until the message FORM SETTING displays.  
118 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3. Press → until the message LINE SP=xxxxxxx displays, where xxxxxxx can be 6  
LPI, 8 LPI, 12 LPI, 3L/30MM, 4L/30MM, 6L/30MM, 8L/30MM, or 12L/30MM.  
4. Press ↓ until the message RESTORE MFG=xxx displays, where xxx can be NO or  
YES. If you want to select a value other than the one displayed, press ← or →.  
5. To exit from Program Configuration, press ↓ until the message STORE=QUIT  
displays. If you want to exit without saving the new value, press Menu/Enter.  
If you want to save the new value, press ← or → to select either STORE=SAVE (new  
value is stored in NVM) or STORE=CURRENT (new value remains valid until the  
printer is powered off (O)). Press Menu/Enter to save the new value.  
Another Path  
You can set this category to either one of the following values:  
No (default)  
Does not allow you to select another default forms path to  
configure.  
Yes  
Lets you return to the Paper Path category in the Program  
Configuration menu to configure another default forms path.  
To change or check the Another Paper Path value:  
1. Press Menu/Enter. The message PRINT OUT=NO displays.  
2. Press ↓ until the message ANOTHER PATH=xxx displays, where xxx can be NO or  
YES. If you want to select a value other than the one displayed, press ← or →.  
3. To exit from Program Configuration, press ↓ until the message STORE=QUIT  
displays. If you want to exit without saving the new value, press Menu/Enter.  
If you want to save the new value, press ← or → to select either STORE=SAVE (new  
value is stored in NVM) or STORE=CURRENT (new value remains valid until the  
printer is powered off (O)). Press Menu/Enter to save the new value.  
Additional Entry Point to Power On Configuration Menu  
Note: You cannot access the Pull category or the Forms Jam category from this  
entry point. You must use the method outlined in “Power On Configuration”  
on page 82.  
You can enter the Power On Configuration menu without powering off and powering  
on the printer by using the Program Configuration menu. Available values for this  
category are:  
No (default)  
Yes  
Does not allow you to return to the Power On Configuration menu.  
Allows you to return to the Power On Configuration menu. If you  
press ↑ or ↓, you will return to the start of the menu, PRINT OUT=NO.  
Entering the Power On Configuration menu through the Program  
Configuration menu does not allow you to access the PULL or JAM  
SENSORS categories.  
To enter the Power On Configuration menu from the Program Configuration menu:  
1. Press Menu/Enter. The message PRINT OUT=NO displays.  
2. Press ↓ until the message CONFIG MENU=xxx displays, where xxx can be NO or  
YES. If you want to select a value other than the one displayed, press ← or →.  
3. To exit from Program Configuration, press ↓ until the message STORE=QUIT  
displays. If you want to exit without saving the new value, press Menu/Enter.  
Chapter 4. Configuring Your Printer 119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If you want to save the new value, press ← or → to select either STORE=SAVE (new  
value is stored in NVM) or STORE=CURRENT (new value remains valid until the  
printer is powered off (O)). Press Menu/Enter to save the new value.  
Hexadecimal Printing  
You can set hexadecimal printing to either of the following values:  
v No (default)  
v Yes  
If set to YES, any character sent to the printer will be printed in a hexadecimal  
value. This lets you see a readable printout of all characters sent by the host to the  
printer even if they are control code characters (for example, ESC, DC4, CR, LF).  
To select Hexadecimal Printing, follow these steps:  
1. Press Menu/Enter. The message PRINT OUT=NO displays.  
2. Press ↓ until the message HEX DUMP=NO displays. If you want to get a  
hexadecimal printout, press ← or → to select HEX DUMP=YES.  
3. To exit from Program Configuration, press ↓ and the message STORE=QUIT  
displays. If you want to exit without saving the new value, press Menu/Enter.  
If you want to save the new value, press ← or → to select either STORE=SAVE (new  
value is stored in NVM) or STORE=CURRENT (new value remains valid until the  
printer is powered off (O)). Press Menu/Enter to save the new value.  
If you save HEX DUMP=YES, all characters will print in hex until you reset the value  
to NO.  
Store Mode  
Once you made changes to any of the Program Configuration values, you have  
three choices available for saving them:  
Quit (default) Exit Program Configuration mode and no changes are saved in  
NVM. All previous values remain valid.  
Save  
Exit Program Configuration mode and save new values in NVM.  
Current  
Exit Program Configuration mode and the new values remain valid  
until the printer is powered off (O).  
To select Store Mode in either of two ways:  
1. Press Menu/Enter and the message STORE=QUIT displays.  
or  
Press ↓ until the message STORE=QUIT displays.  
2. If you want to exit without saving the new values, press Menu/Enter.  
3. If you want to save the new values, press ← or → to select either STORE=SAVE  
(new values are stored in NVM) or STORE=CURRENT (new values remain valid until  
the printer is powered off (O)).  
4. Press Menu/Enter to save the new values.  
120 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Printing Program Configuration Setup  
Once you have made all your configuration changes, IBM recommends that you  
print your changes and save the printout for future reference. You can save up to  
five different forms paths.  
To print the program configuration:  
1. Press Menu/Enter. The printer goes offline, and the message PRINT OUT=NO  
displays.  
2. To print the settings on the printer, press →. The message PRINT OUT=YES  
displays and the program configuration setup printout is printed.  
This sample printout shows three forms paths configured and also depicts the  
default settings.  
After printing the program configuration, the display returns to PRINT OUT=NO. Press  
Menu/Enter twice to exit configuration mode.  
Chapter 4. Configuring Your Printer 121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
122 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5. Attaching Your Printer  
Attaching to Your Computer .  
Attaching Parallel Cable .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 123  
. 123  
. 124  
. 125  
. 126  
. 126  
. 126  
. 126  
. 127  
. 127  
. 128  
. 128  
. 131  
Attaching Serial Cable .  
Installing Printer Drivers .  
.
.
AIX Operating Systems Installation .  
OS/400 Operating Systems Installation.  
OS/2 and Windows Operating Environment Installation .  
AIX Driver Installation .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
OS/400 Printer Object Installation.  
OS/2 or Windows Printer Driver Installation .  
Attaching Network Print Server  
Ethernet 10BaseT or 10Base2 .  
Token-Ring UTP or STP .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Attaching to Your Computer  
This section provides specific instructions on attaching the printer to your computer.  
Supported devices include:  
v Personal Computers  
– IBM compatible personal computers with an RS-232C, RS-422A, or  
Centronics Parallel interface  
– IBM Personal System/2 COMx or LPTx ports  
v IBM RISC System/6000  
v IBM AS/400  
– IBM AS/400 with ASCII workstation controller  
– IBM AS/400 twinaxial terminals including IBM 348X, IBM 3477, and IBM 3197  
display stations  
v LAN Features  
– Ethernet 10BaseT (RJ45) Network Print Server  
– Ethernet 10Base2 (BNC) Network Print Server  
– Token-Ring Media Type 1 Network Print Server (with 9-pin D-sub connector)  
– Token-Ring Media Type 3 Network Print Server (unshielded twisted-pair)  
v IBM S/390 and S/370 using an IBM 3174 workstation controller with an  
Asynchronous Emulation Adapter  
For cable part number and specification information, see “Chapter 8. Supplies,  
Forms, and Cables” on page 151 or contact your IBM marketing representative.  
Attaching Parallel Cable  
DANGER  
<2> To prevent serious personal injury from electrical shock when  
connecting or disconnecting the interface cable, power off (O) the printer  
and disconnect the power cord from the power source at the receptacle.  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1995, 1998  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
123  
 
DANGER  
<3> To avoid personal risk, do not install or reconfigure a communication  
port or a teleport during a lightning storm.  
To attach a parallel cable:  
1. Power off (O) the printer. Disconnect the power cord from the receptacle.  
2. Standing behind the printer, insert the parallel interface cable into the lower  
connector at the bottom left of the printer.  
3. Push the clips at each end of the connector into the notches on the parallel  
cable.  
4. Refer to your computer system documentation for information on attaching the  
cable to your computer.  
5. After you complete the attachment of the computer end of the interface cable,  
connect the power cord to the printer and to the electrical receptacle.  
6. Power on (|) the printer.  
Attaching Serial Cable  
DANGER  
<2> To prevent serious personal injury from electrical shock when  
connecting or disconnecting the interface cable, power off (O) the printer  
and disconnect the power cord from the power source at the receptacle.  
124 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DANGER  
<3> To avoid personal risk, do not install or reconfigure a communication  
port or a teleport during a lightning storm.  
To attach a serial cable:  
1. Power off (O) the printer. Disconnect the power cord from the receptacle.  
2. Standing behind the printer, insert the serial interface cable into the upper  
connector at the bottom left of the printer.  
3. Tighten the two locking screws to hold the cable in place.  
4. Refer to your computer system documentation for information on attaching the  
cable to your computer.  
5. After you complete the attachment of the computer end of the interface cable,  
connect the power cord to the printer and to the electrical receptacle.  
6. Power on (|) the printer.  
Installing Printer Drivers  
The IBM 4247 Printer is supported by the following operating systems or  
environments:  
v AIX version 3.2.5 and later  
v OS/400 version 2.3 Host Print Transform  
v OS/2 version 2.1 and later  
v Windows version 3.0 and later  
Chapter 5. Attaching Your Printer 125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AIX Operating Systems Installation  
Use the Printer Driver Diskette shipped with your printer. The files in the AIX  
subdirectory enable the user to add a 4247 as a printer device and add virtual  
printers in three emulation modes:  
v IBM 2381 Personal Printer  
v IBM 4202 Proprinter III XL  
v Epson FX  
To use the printer driver, establish a virtual printer queue for each emulation  
desired.  
OS/400 Operating Systems Installation  
Use the Printer Driver Diskette shipped with your printer. The files in the OS400  
subdirectory enable the user to add a 4247 as a printer object. Support for 4247  
unique commands is limited to Host Print Transform. Six new 4247 workstation  
customization tables are based on tables used for the 2381 Printer. Modifications to  
the tables were made to support various 4247 forms handling capabilities, fonts,  
and print qualities.  
OS/2 and Windows Operating Environment Installation  
Use one of the following drivers (not shipped with the printer) that is provided with  
your operating environment. When using these drivers, some of the 4247 advanced  
features will not be selectable from the data stream. You may, however, use the  
operator panel to select these features.  
v IBM 2381 Personal Printer  
v IBM 4202 Proprinter III XL  
v Epson FX 1050  
AIX Driver Installation  
The AIX driver files reside on a DOS formatted diskette in the AIX subdirectory. The  
files are:  
license.txt  
4247.txt  
AIX printer driver license statement  
Driver installation instructions  
4247.tar  
Drivers and additional information for AIX 3.2.5  
Drivers and additional information for AIX 4.1  
ibm4247.tar  
To read the diskette, use the cd command for the directory of choice (such as  
/tmp), and issue the following commands:  
v # dosread -a /AIX/license.txt license.txt  
v # dosread -a /AIX/4247.txt 4247.txt  
v # dosread /AIX/4247.tar 4247.tar  
v # dosread /AIX/ibm4247.tar ibm4247.tar  
126 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Use the more or pg command to view the license agreement in the license.txt file,  
and the installation instructions in the 4247.txt file. You must understand and agree  
to the terms and conditions stated in the license.txt file before installing the AIX  
driver.  
OS/400 Printer Object Installation  
The OS/400 printer object files reside on a DOS-formatted diskette in the OS400  
subdirectory. The files are:  
license.txt  
read.1st  
OS/400 printer objects license statement.  
OS/400 printer object upload and installation instructions.  
4247.doc  
Explains the use and function of the OS/400 printer objects. Read  
this file before you attempt to upload any of the following .txt files.  
ibm4247m.txt Source file for the 4247 workstation customization object when the  
4247 is configured with one forms path or the user wants to select  
the forms path method from the operator panel.  
ibm4247.txt  
Source file for the 4247 workstation customization object when the  
4247 is configured with two forms paths.  
ib4247a2.txt Source file for the 4247 workstation customization object when the  
4247 is configured for the optional Automatic Sheet Feeder (ASF).  
Required for use with pre-V3R1 operating systems; this object limits  
AS/400 selection to two 4247 ASF paper bins.  
ib4247a3.txt Source file for the 4247 workstation customization object when the  
4247 is configured for the optional Automatic Sheet Feeder (ASF).  
Required for use with V3R1 and later operating systems; this object  
provides AS/400 selection of all three 4247 ASF paper bins.  
ib4247x2.txt Source file for the 4247 workstation customization object when the  
4247 user wants to select between one continuous forms feed or  
bin 1 of the optional Automatic Sheet Feeder. Required for use with  
pre-V3R1 operating systems; this object limits AS/400 selection to  
two 4247 forms paths.  
ib4247x3.txt Source file for the 4247 workstation customization object when the  
4247 user wants to select one forms path or bin 1 or bin 2 of the  
optional Automatic Sheet Feeder (required for use with V3R1 and  
later operating systems). This object provides AS/400 selection of  
three 4247 forms paths.  
Use the text editor that came with your personal computer operating system (such  
as Windows 3.0 WRITE or OS/2 E) to view the license agreement in the license.txt  
file and to view the read.1st and 4247.doc files.  
To print the read.1st file (or any of the files), use an operating system command  
such as:  
v copy a:\os400\read.1st lpt1:  
You must understand and agree to the terms and conditions stated in the  
license.txt file before installing the OS/400 printer object.  
OS/2 or Windows Printer Driver Installation  
See the Printer Driver Installation section in the respective product User’s Guides.  
Chapter 5. Attaching Your Printer 127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Attaching Network Print Server  
The Network Print Server feature eliminates the need for third party Token-Ring and  
Ethernet attachments. The servers contain the intelligence needed to make your  
printer fully accessible to all network users. Its multiple protocol support lets you  
print from Novell NetWare, IBM LAN Server, IBM AIX, and other TCP/IP networks.  
The Network Print Server has its own unique network address, and interprets data  
transmitted on the network to the print data stream used by the 4247 Printer. There  
are four servers available for attachment to your printer:  
v Ethernet 10BaseT (RJ45)  
v Ethernet 10Base2 (BNC)  
v Token-Ring Media Type 1 (with 9-pin, D-sub connector)  
v Token-Ring Media Type 3 (RJ45 unshielded twisted-pair)  
The Network Print Server feature plugs directly into the printer’s parallel port. To  
install your server, perform the following:  
Ethernet 10BaseT or 10Base2  
DANGER  
<2> To prevent serious personal injury from electrical shock when  
connecting or disconnecting the interface cable, power off (O) the printer  
and disconnect the power cord from the power source at the receptacle.  
DANGER  
<3> To avoid personal risk, do not install or reconfigure a communication  
port or a teleport during a lightning storm.  
128 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1. Make sure your printer parallel interface is set to CX PARALLEL. To change or  
check the Interface Type:  
a. Power off (O) the printer.  
b. Press and hold Menu/Enter while powering on (|) the printer. The message  
STARTING UP displays.  
c. After start-up is complete, release Menu/Enter and the message PRINT  
OUT=NO displays.  
d. Press ↓ until the message PARALLEL INTF displays.  
e. Press → until the message INTF=xxxxxxxxxxx displays. Where xxxxxxxxxxx  
can be CX PARALLEL, 1284 BYTE, or 1284 NIBBLE. If the value is not CX  
PARALLEL, press ← or → until CX PARALLEL displays.  
f. To exit from Power On Configuration, press Menu/Enter. Your new value is  
stored in NVM.  
2. Power off (O) the printer.  
3. Attach the Network Print Server to your parallel port.  
Note: With this server attached, the printer is supplied by two power cords.  
One is the 4247 Printer power cord and the other is the Network Print  
Server power cord.  
Chapter 5. Attaching Your Printer 129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Connect the external power supply to an approved power source.  
The PACKET indicator will flash during power-on and self-test. When the  
indicator stops flashing and remains unlighted, the Network Print Server is ready  
for use.  
5. Power on (|) the printer. Make sure forms are loaded in the printer.  
6. Press and hold the TEST button until the PACKET indicator starts to flash, then  
release the button to print a print test sample. This sample lists the software  
revision and the basic setup of your Network Print Server.  
7. For more information on configuring and connecting your printer to an Ethernet  
Network, see Network Print Server for Ethernet Networks Administrator’s Guide,  
(S246-0111) that was shipped with your Network Print Server.  
130 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Token-Ring UTP or STP  
DANGER  
<2> To prevent serious personal injury from electrical shock when  
connecting or disconnecting the interface cable, power off (O) the printer  
and disconnect the power cord from the power source at the receptacle.  
DANGER  
<3> To avoid personal risk, do not install or reconfigure a communication  
port or a teleport during a lightning storm.  
1. Make sure your printer parallel interface is set to CX PARALLEL. To change or  
check the Interface Type:  
a. Power off (O) the printer.  
b. Press and hold Menu/Enter while powering on (|) the printer. The message  
STARTING UP displays.  
c. After start-up is complete, release Menu/Enter and the message PRINT  
OUT=NO displays.  
d. Press ↓ until the message PARALLEL INTF displays.  
e. Press → until the message INTF=xxxxxxxxxxx displays. Where xxxxxxxxxxx  
can be CX PARALLEL, 1284 BYTE, or 1284 NIBBLE. If the value is not CX  
PARALLEL, press ← or → until CX PARALLEL displays.  
Chapter 5. Attaching Your Printer 131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
f. To exit from Power On Configuration, press Menu/Enter. Your new value is  
stored in NVM.  
2. Power off (O) the printer.  
3. Attach the Network Print Server to your parallel port.  
Note: With this server attached, the printer is supplied by two power cords.  
One is the 4247 Printer power cord and the other is the Network Print  
Server power cord.  
4. Connect the external power supply to an approved power source.  
The NETWORK indicator will flash during power-on and self-test. When the  
indicator stops flashing and remains unlighted, the Network Print Server is ready  
for use.  
5. Power on (|) the printer. Ensure forms are loaded in the printer.  
6. Press and hold the TEST button until the NETWORK indicator starts to flash,  
then release the button to create a print test sample. This sample lists the  
software revision and the basic setup of your Network Print Server.  
7. For more information on configuring and connecting your printer to a token-ring  
network, see Network Print Server for Token-Ring Networks Administrator’s  
Guide (S246-0112) that was shipped with your Network Print Server.  
132 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 6. Operator Tasks  
About This Chapter .  
Changing Ribbon Cartridge .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 133  
. 133  
. 133  
. 135  
. 137  
. 137  
. 137  
. 137  
Removing Ribbon Cartridge .  
Installing Ribbon Cartridge .  
Cleaning Printer .  
Cleaning Inside of Printer.  
Cleaning Covers .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Clearing Forms Jams and Restarting a Print Job .  
About This Chapter  
The operator is responsible to perform the following procedures which are  
described in this chapter:  
v Changing the ribbon cartridge  
v Cleaning the printer  
v Clearing forms jams and restarting a print job  
Changing Ribbon Cartridge  
IBM recommends that you use IBM ribbon cartridge (part number 1053685) for the  
4247 Printer. Contact your place of purchase or call Lexmark at 1-800-438-2468 to  
order ribbon cartridges.  
Removing Ribbon Cartridge  
CAUTION:  
<2> The printhead may get hot during operation. Be careful when removing or  
replacing the ribbon cartridge.  
To remove an existing ribbon cartridge, follow these steps:  
1. If the printer is powered on (|), and the Online indicator is lighted, press Online  
to make the printer not ready. Power off (O) the printer.  
2. Open the top cover and the forms guide.  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1995, 1998  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
133  
 
3. Slide the printhead to the center of the printer.  
4. Pull the ribbon cartridge up until each end snaps free from the cartridge support.  
5. Push and hold the lever away from the ribbon lift assembly, and remove the  
ribbon cartridge from the printer.  
134 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lever  
Snap Arm  
Ribbon Cartridge  
Ribbon Lift Assembly  
Installing Ribbon Cartridge  
Note: IBM recommends that you use the IBM ribbon cartridge (part number  
1053685). To order ribbon cartridges, contact your place of purchase or call  
Lexmark at 1-800-438-2468.  
To install the ribbon cartridge, follow these steps:  
1. Remove the ribbon cartridge from the package. Locate the ribbon guide, snap  
arm, ribbon advance knob, and the ribbon mounting pins.  
2. Turn the ribbon advance knob in the direction of the arrow to take up any slack  
in the ribbon. If the ribbon does not move, contact your place of purchase to  
replace the ribbon cartridge.  
3. Ensure the printer is powered off (O).  
4. Open the top cover and the forms guide.  
Chapter 6. Operator Tasks 135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5. Slide the printhead to the center of the printer.  
e61a5310  
Figure 47. Sliding the Printhead to the Center of the Printer  
6. With the snap arm raised higher than the ribbon lift assembly, insert the ribbon  
guide between the ribbon shield and the printhead. Position the snap arm with  
the small lever up onto the ribbon lift assembly. Push the snap arm down onto  
the ribbon lift assembly until the snap arm snaps into place.  
7. Align the ribbon mounting pins on the left and right side of the ribbon cartridge  
with the slots in the cartridge supports. Snap the ribbon cartridge down into  
place.  
8. Turn the ribbon advance knob again in the direction of the arrow to take up  
slack in the ribbon.  
9. Slide the printhead back and forth to ensure that the ribbon guide runs freely  
along the ribbon.  
10. If the ribbon is not running freely, or to ensure you have installed the ribbon  
cartridge correctly, check that:  
136 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
a. The left and right ribbon mounting pins are securely snapped into the  
cartridge supports  
b. There are no twists or folds in the ribbon  
c. The ribbon is not catching on the printhead  
d. The ribbon moves when you turn the ribbon advance knob in the direction  
of the arrow. If the ribbon does not move, replace the ribbon cartridge.  
Contact your place of ribbon cartridge purchase.  
11. Close the forms guide and the top cover.  
12. Power on (|) the printer.  
13. Press Online to make the printer ready.  
You can read about removing a ribbon cartridge in “Removing Ribbon Cartridge” on  
page 133.  
Cleaning Printer  
Periodic cleaning ensures good printer performance.  
Before you clean the printer:  
1. Power off (O) the printer.  
2. Unplug the power cord from the receptacle.  
3. Remove any forms that limit your access.  
4. Wait at least 15 minutes for the printhead to cool before beginning this  
procedure.  
Cleaning Inside of Printer  
1. Every few months, use a soft brush and a vacuum cleaner to remove dust,  
ribbon lint, and pieces of paper. Remove the ribbon cartridge to prevent the  
ribbon from going into the vacuum cleaner. (See “Removing Ribbon Cartridge”  
on page 133.) Vacuum around the printhead and in the printer cavity.  
Note: Do not allow any staples, paper clips, or small metal pieces to fall inside  
the printer.  
2. Reinstall the ribbon cartridge. See “Installing Ribbon Cartridge” on page 135.  
3. Reload the forms you removed. See “Chapter 1. Printer Setup” on page 1 or  
“Chapter 3. Setting Up Another Forms Path” on page 39.  
Cleaning Covers  
Clean the outside of the printer with a damp cloth and mild soap. Do not use any  
spray-type or chemical cleaners anywhere on your printer. Do not put any liquids or  
spray near the air vents. For stubborn stains (such as ink stains) on the cover, use  
a commercial, mechanics hand cleaner.  
Clearing Forms Jams and Restarting a Print Job  
Use the following steps to clear a forms jam, reload the forms, and restart your print  
job.  
Chapter 6. Operator Tasks 137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1. If the printer is powered on (|), and the Online indicator is lighted, press  
Online to make the printer not ready.  
2. Open the top cover.  
3. Tear off the forms at a perforation ahead of where they enter the printer.  
4. Open the tractor doors and remove the forms from the tractors.  
5. Remove the ribbon cartridge. See “Removing Ribbon Cartridge” on page 133.  
Attention: In the next step, if you cannot easily move the printhead, do not force  
it.  
6. Move the printhead to the far right.  
7. Remove the jammed forms by pulling them in the direction of printing. If this  
clears the jam, go to step 9. If the jam still exists, remove the paper bail. Do  
not reinstall the ribbon cartridge or close the forms guide or the top cover until  
you have cleared the jam. See “Removing Paper Bail” on page 48.  
8. Remove jammed forms by pulling in the direction of printing.  
9. Reinstall the paper bail and the ribbon cartridge, and close the forms guide  
and the top cover. See “Installing Paper Bail” on page 48.  
10. Cancel the print job at your computer.  
11. To clear buffered print data (buffered data is indicated by a blinking Online  
indicator), press Menu/Enter and then press Online. The message 99 RESET  
momentarily displays.  
12. Reload forms. See “Chapter 1. Printer Setup” on page 1 or “Chapter 3. Setting  
Up Another Forms Path” on page 39.  
13. Press Online to make the printer ready.  
14. Resend your print job.  
138 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 7. Resolving Printer Problems  
About This Chapter .  
Status Codes and Messages  
Various Problems  
Printed Output Problems .  
Other Problems .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 139  
. 139  
. 142  
. 142  
. 143  
. 147  
. 150  
. 150  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Print Quality and Ribbon Problems .  
Configuration Problems  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Miscellaneous Problems .  
About This Chapter  
Use this chapter to resolve problems that prevent you from printing a job. See the  
following information to resolve your printer problem.  
v See “Status Codes and Messages” to learn about a status code or message that  
appears in the display  
v Page 142 for possible causes and recovery action for a physical problem such as  
a forms jam  
v Page 147 to correct poor print quality  
v Page 150 for configuration problems  
v Page 150 for miscellaneous problems  
Status Codes and Messages  
When a problem with the printer occurs, the printer may display a status code and  
a message. Find the code listed in numeric order on the following pages and  
perform the steps necessary to fix the problem. Only codes for which an operator  
can take action are included.  
Notes:  
1. If you get a code that you cannot find in this chapter, record the code and run  
the job again. If you get the same code, call for service.  
2. If you cannot fix the problem, power off (O) the printer. Wait 10 seconds. Power  
on (|) the printer. If the problem still exists, call for service.  
If the message displays again, tune the sensor. See  
“Sensor Tune” on page 103.  
01 END OF FORMS  
Message: An end-of-forms condition exists in one or  
more of the forms paths. One or more of the status  
indicator lights will blink showing you which path is out  
of forms.  
If the message still displays, call for service.  
02 FORMS JAM CHECK PATH  
Recovery:  
Message: A forms jam was detected by the front or  
rear tractor motion sensor or by the paper present  
sensor. One or more of the status indicator lights will  
blink showing you which path contains jammed forms.  
1. Load forms in the appropriate forms path.  
Depending on your forms, see Chapter 1. Printer  
Setup or Chapter 3. Setting Up Another Forms Path.  
2. Press Load/Form Feed.  
3. Press Online.  
Recovery:  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1995, 1998  
139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1. Clear the jammed or torn forms. See “Clearing  
Forms Jams and Restarting a Print Job” on  
page 137.  
If the message still displays, call for service.  
11 LOAD BIN 2  
2. Ensure the paper bail and the forms guide deflector  
are in the correct positions. See Table 5 on page 39.  
Message: An end-of-forms condition was detected in  
the ASF bin 2.  
3. If you are printing using the Rear Push, Rear Pull,  
or Push Pull forms path, make sure the rear paper  
door is open for the forms to pass through.  
Recovery:  
1. Load forms into bin 2.  
4. Press Online to clear the error message.  
5. Press Online again to resume printing.  
2. Press Load/Form Feed.  
If the message displays again, tune the sensor. See  
“Sensor Tune” on page 103.  
6. Perform the actions under “Forms buckle, twist, jam,  
or tear”. See “Printed Output Problems” on  
page 142.  
If the message still displays, call for service.  
If the message displays again, tune the sensor. See  
“Sensor Tune” on page 103.  
11 LOAD BIN 3  
Message: An end-of-forms condition was detected in  
the ASF bin 3.  
If the message still displays, call for service.  
Recovery:  
05 MANUAL FEED INSERT FORM  
1. Load forms into bin 3.  
Message: A forms overlay condition is requested.  
2. Press Load/Form Feed.  
Recovery: Insert a form in the Manual Sheet Feed  
path. See “Setting Up Manual Sheet Feed Path” on  
page 30.  
If the message displays again, tune the sensor. See  
“Sensor Tune” on page 103.  
If the message displays again, tune the sensor. See  
“Sensor Tune” on page 103.  
If the message still displays, call for service.  
If the message still displays, call for service.  
20 DSR ERROR CHECK INTF  
06 MANUAL FEED  
Message: The printer detected a remote connection  
serial interface error. The Data Set Ready or Data  
Carrier Detect signal was not sensed.  
Message: You requested to use the Manual Sheet  
Feed path.  
Recovery:  
Recovery:  
1. Power off (O) the printer.  
1. Insert a form in the Manual Sheet Feed path. See  
“Setting Up Manual Sheet Feed Path” on page 30.  
2. Check that the interface cable is connected to the  
printer and to the modem.  
2. Press Load/Form Feed.  
3. Check that the serial configuration parameters are  
set correctly. See “Serial Interface” on page 91.  
If the message displays again, tune the sensor. See  
“Sensor Tune” on page 103.  
4. Power on (|) the printer.  
5. If the message displays again, call for service.  
If the message still displays, call for service.  
21 OVFL ERROR CHECK INTF  
11 LOAD BIN 1  
Message: An overflow condition occurred in the  
Message: An end-of-forms condition was detected in  
buffer–data has been lost.  
the ASF bin 1.  
Recovery:  
Recovery:  
1. Press Online to clear the error message.  
1. Load forms into bin 1.  
2. Check BUFFER size and PACING protocol values in the  
SERIAL INTERFACE category in the Power On  
Configuration Menu. See “Serial Interface” on  
page 91.  
2. Press Load/Form Feed.  
If the message displays again, tune the sensor. See  
“Sensor Tune” on page 103.  
3. Restart the print job.  
140 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. If the message displays again, call for service.  
72 SW ERR x y zz  
Message: An error was detected by the Print Manager  
Module software.  
35 MARGIN ERROR  
Message: An error occurred because the Horizontal  
Adjustment value that was set in the Program  
Configuration menu is too large and would cause the  
printhead to hit the right side of the printer frame.  
Recovery:  
1. Power off (O) the printer.  
2. Wait 10 seconds. Power on (|) the printer.  
3. If the message displays again, call for service.  
Recovery:  
1. Press Online to clear the error message.  
73 SW ERR x y zz  
The printer will automatically reset the Horizontal  
Adjustment value to 10 (manufacturing default) and  
continue printing.  
Message: An error was detected by the Print Manager  
Module software.  
2. If you do not want to use the manufacturing default  
value, try another value less than the value you  
previously set. See “Horizontal” on page 112.  
Recovery:  
1. Power off (O) the printer.  
2. Wait 10 seconds. Power on (|) the printer.  
3. If the message displays again, call for service.  
55 AFTA ERROR  
Message: The Automatic Forms Thickness Adjustment  
(AFTA) is not operational.  
89 RIBBON JAM CHECK RIBBON  
Message: The ribbon motion sensor detected an error.  
Recovery:  
Recovery:  
1. Power off (O) the printer.  
1. Press Online to clear the error message.  
2. Wait 10 seconds. Power on (|) the printer.  
3. If the message displays again, call for service.  
2. Remove the ribbon cartridge. See “Removing  
Ribbon Cartridge” on page 133.  
3. Turn the ribbon advance knob to ensure the ribbon  
is advancing correctly. If the ribbon does not  
advance correctly, replace the ribbon cartridge.  
56 PRINT ERROR  
Message: A printhead position error was detected.  
Recovery:  
4. Reinstall the ribbon. See “Installing Ribbon  
Cartridge” on page 135.  
1. Press Online to clear the error message.  
2. Press Online again to resume printing.  
3. If the message displays again, call for service.  
5. Press Online to resume printing.  
6. If the message displays again, call for service.  
70 SW ERR x y zz  
90 CLOSE COVER  
Message: An error was detected by the Supervisor  
Message: Displays when the printer is offline and the  
Module software.  
top cover is open.  
Recovery:  
Recovery: Close the top cover.  
1. Power off (O) the printer.  
2. Wait 10 seconds. Power on (|) the printer.  
3. If the message displays again, call for service.  
91 EJECT FORM  
Message: Displays when Park was pressed and a  
cut-sheet form is in the Manual Sheet Feed path.  
71 SW ERR x y zz  
Recovery:  
Message: An error was detected by the Interpreter  
(data stream) Module software.  
1. Insert a form in the manual feed path.  
2. Press Load/Form Feed.  
Recovery:  
1. Power off (O) the printer.  
2. Wait 10 seconds. Power on (|) the printer.  
3. If the message displays again, call for service.  
Chapter 7. Resolving Printer Problems 141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recovery: No action required.  
92 EJECT: SURE?  
Message: Displays the confirmation that Park was  
pressed, and one of the following conditions exists on  
the printer:  
96 COVER OPEN  
Message: Displays when the printer is in an Online  
ready state and the top cover is open. The audible  
alarm also will beep if ALARM is set to YES in the Power  
On Configuration menu.  
v
Forms are loaded in the front path and FRONT  
TEAR=NO is selected in the Power On Configuration  
menu.  
or  
Recovery: Close the top cover.  
v
Forms are loaded in the rear path and REAR TEAR=NO  
is selected in the Power On Configuration menu.  
97 STACKER ERROR  
Recovery: Press Park again immediately to eject the  
forms and clear the message.  
Message: Displays when the Automatic Sheet Feeder  
stacker is removed from the printer.  
Recovery:  
93 CONFIRM PARK  
1. Power off (O) the printer.  
2. Plug in the stacker again.  
Message: Displays if continuous forms were loaded in  
the front or rear forms paths and a command sequence  
was sent from the host to park the forms.  
3. Make sure all parts of the Automatic Sheet Feeder  
(ASF) are installed correctly. See the 4247 Printer  
Automatic Sheet Feeder Guide to install or remove  
the ASF. See Chapter 4. Configuring Your Printer  
after removing the ASF.  
Recovery: Press ONLINE to park the forms and clear  
the message.  
4. Power on (|) the printer.  
94 PARK: SURE?  
Message: Displays the confirmation that Park was  
pressed.  
99 RESET  
Message: Displays when Online was pressed while  
the printer was in the Program Configuration, or when  
Online was pressed to cancel a print job. The message  
displays momentarily and is cleared.  
Recovery: Immediately press Park again to park the  
continuous forms if forms are currently installed in the  
Front Push or Rear Push path or eject the forms if  
forms are installed in the Rear Pull path.  
Recovery: No action required.  
95 CHANGE NVM  
Message: Displays at power-on when the firmware  
EPROM is changed.  
Various Problems  
Some problems may occur on your printer for which no status code or message will  
occur such as poor print quality, a visual problem, or a forms-advance problem.  
Printed Output Problems  
You may notice problems with the printed output from the printer. Locate your  
symptom in the table. To correct the condition, go to the page listed for that problem  
and follow the steps provided.  
Table 12. Printed Output Problems  
Problem  
Page  
143, 144  
144  
Forms do not advance, or overprint occurs  
Forms buckle, twist, jam, or tear  
Forms jam or do not feed into printer  
Forms do not feed past the printhead  
Top right corner of 14 7/8 inch-wide form being folded over  
145  
146  
146  
142 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 12. Printed Output Problems (continued)  
Problem  
Page  
Forms do not stack  
146  
Cut-sheet form fed from the Manual Sheet Feed does not overlay continuous 147  
form properly  
Table 13. Print Quality/Ribbon Problems  
Problem  
Page  
Characters off registration  
Incomplete characters print  
Missing dots  
147  
148  
148  
148  
149  
149  
149  
148  
148  
150  
149  
148  
149  
No print  
Partial print characters  
Partial print lines  
Printing too light  
Printing too dark  
Smudging  
Ribbon moving continuously  
Ribbon folding, snagging, tearing, or not moving  
Irregular characters  
Variations in print densities (light, dark, or cut-off printing) within the same  
line of print  
Wavy print  
149  
147  
150  
Unreadable characters  
Line-to-line horizontal misregistration  
Other Problems  
You may notice other problems with your printer. Locate your symptom in the  
following tables. Correct the condition by following the steps listed for that problem.  
Table 14. Configuration Problems  
Problem  
Page  
150  
Messages display in wrong language  
Wrong print language  
150  
Printer does not print or prints wrong characters  
150  
Table 15. Miscellaneous Problems  
Problem  
Page  
150  
Throughput at half speed  
Printer has no power  
150  
Problem: Forms do not advance or overprint occurs  
1:  
The forms tractor is not snapped in.  
Solution: Check the installation of the tractor unit.  
Chapter 7. Resolving Printer Problems 143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2:  
3:  
The ribbon is getting caught on the forms.  
Solution: Check the ribbon for twists or folds.  
The Push-Pull selector is not set to the correct position.  
Solution: If the forms tractor is in the Front Push or the Rear Push  
position, set the push-pull selector to the push position. If the forms tractor  
is in the rear pull or push-pull position, set the push-pull selector to the pull  
position. See “Setting Push-Pull Selector” on page 46.  
4:  
The printer is failing.  
Solution: Power off (O) the printer. Wait 10 seconds, and power on (|) the  
printer. If you get a status code, go to “Status Codes and Messages” on  
page 139. If no code displays, press Micro ↑ several times. If forms do not  
feed each time you press Micro ↑, call for service.  
Problem: Overprint occurs at top or bottom line of page  
1:  
There is a problem with the application program.  
Solution: See your programmer.  
Problem: Forms buckle, twist, jam, or tractor holes tear  
1:  
The right tractor is adjusted incorrectly.  
Solution: Move the right tractor to obtain the correct forms width. The  
tractor pins should be in the center of the tractor holes. See “Loading  
Forms into Front Push Forms Path” on page 20 or the appropriate section  
in Chapter 3. Setting Up Another Forms Path for information about adjusting  
the tractor tension.  
2:  
3:  
4:  
The forms tractor is installed incorrectly.  
Solution: Check the forms tractor installation. See “Loading Forms into  
Front Push Forms Path” on page 20 or the appropriate section in Chapter 3.  
Setting Up Another Forms Path.  
The paper bail and forms guide deflector are not in their correct operating  
positions.  
Solution: See “Setting Forms Guide Deflector” on page 44 or “Removing or  
Installing Paper Bail” on page 47.  
The printer is not at the edge of the table.  
Solution: Move the front of the printer to the edge of the table if you are  
using the front forms path; move the rear of the printer to the edge of the  
table if you are using the rear forms path. Consider using the optional  
printer stand mentioned in “Optional Printer Stand” on page 32.  
5:  
The forms supply is not below the level of the printer.  
144 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Solution: Move the forms supply to the floor or to a shelf that is below the  
level of the printer. Consider using the optional printer stand mentioned in  
“Optional Printer Stand” on page 32.  
6:  
7:  
The forms supply is not aligned with the printer.  
Solution: Reposition the forms supply so that the forms feed evenly.  
Depending on your forms path, see “Loading Forms into Front Push Forms  
Path” on page 20 or the appropriate section in Chapter 3. Setting Up  
Another Forms Path.  
The forms are catching on the carton edge.  
Solution: Remove the uneven carton edges, or remove the forms from the  
carton.  
Note: As the forms reach the bottom of the box, this problem can occur  
more often.  
8:  
Top right corner of 14 7/8 inch-wide forms is being folded over.  
Solution: See “Top right corner of 14 7/8 inch-wide form being folded over”  
9:  
The ribbon is twisted or folded.  
Solution: Check the ribbon for folds or twists.  
10:  
The forms contain excessive moisture.  
Solution: Store the forms in a cool, dry place before using them, or store  
the forms in the printer area for 24 hours.  
11:  
The forms are defective.  
Solution: Try unloading, then reloading forms. Forms should meet the  
requirements specified in Chapter 8. Supplies, Forms, and Cables.  
Depending on your forms, see Chapter 1. Printer Setup or the appropriate  
section in Chapter 3. Setting Up Another Forms Path for loading  
instructions.  
Problem: Forms jam or do not feed into printer  
1:  
The forms tractor is installed incorrectly.  
Solution: Check the forms tractor installation. See “Loading Forms into  
Front Push Forms Path” on page 20 or the appropriate section in Chapter 3.  
Setting Up Another Forms Path.  
2:  
The ribbon is twisting or folding.  
Solution: Try moving the printhead back and forth while turning the ribbon  
Chapter 7. Resolving Printer Problems 145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
advance knob. If the ribbon advance knob does not turn, replace the ribbon.  
See “Removing Ribbon Cartridge” on page 133.  
3:  
4:  
The printer forms path was not configured.  
Solution: Set the correct forms path setting in the Power On Configuration  
Menu. See Chapter 4. Configuring Your Printer.  
The message 02 FORMS JAM CHECK PATH displays on the operator panel, but  
there are no forms jam in any forms path.  
Solution: The sensors need to be tuned. See “Sensor Tune” on page 103.  
Problem: Forms do not feed past printhead  
1:  
The Automatic Forms Thickness Adjustment (AFTA) setting needs to be  
changed.  
2:  
The forms tractor is not installed properly.  
Solution: See the procedure for adjusting the forms thickness setting  
through the operator panel under Program Configuration in Chapter 4.  
Configuring Your Printer.  
3:  
4:  
The ribbon is twisting or folding.  
Solution: Try moving the printhead back and forth while turning the ribbon  
advance knob. If the ribbon advance knob does not turn, replace the ribbon.  
See “Removing Ribbon Cartridge” on page 133.  
You are using thick, multiple-part forms.  
Solution: See the procedure for setting perforation safety to Yes through  
the operator panel under Program Configuration in Chapter 4. Configuring  
Your Printer.  
Problem: Top right corner of 14 7/8 inch-wide form being folded over  
1:  
Ensure that the left tractor is located at the tractor alignment mark. See  
“Loading Forms into Front Push Forms Path” on page 20.  
2:  
If the problem still occurs, move both tractors to the right about 1/8 in.  
(3mm) and increase the horizontal adjustment setting in the Program  
Configuration Menu by +5. (Example: Make HORIZ ADJ = 15.) See  
“Horizontal” on page 112.  
Problem: Forms do not stack correctly  
1:  
The forms do not stack correctly on the table.  
Solution:  
v Use the recommended table size. See Appendix A. Specifications.  
146 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Note: Up to 101.6 mm (4 in.) of forms may stack on the table behind the  
printer without degradation to forms stacking.  
v Check for obstructions to the forms path (cables, cords, or other items). If  
you find an obstruction, remove or relocate it. For more information, see  
“Loading Forms into Front Push Forms Path” on page 20 or the  
appropriate section in Chapter 3. Setting Up Another Forms Path.  
2:  
3:  
The forms do not meet IBM specifications.  
Solution: The forms may be outside nominal specifications. See Chapter 8.  
Supplies, Forms, and Cables.  
The forms contain excessive moisture.  
Solution: Store the forms in a cool, dry place before using them or leave in  
the printer for 24 hours.  
Note: Forms stack best when the forms are 203.2 to 304.8 mm (8 to 12  
in.) long. Using a forms length outside this range may require  
operator assistance.  
4:  
The forms are too dry.  
Solution: Condition the forms for 24 hours or more at the forms  
manufacturer’s recommended temperature and humidity settings.  
Problem: Characters are off registration  
1:  
2:  
The first print position is adjusted incorrectly.  
Solution: Check your settings for the left margin, horizontal adjustment,  
vertical adjustment, and the top of form position. See Chapter 4.  
Configuring Your Printer for information on adjusting these settings.  
Left tractor or cut-sheet feed alignment guide not set to left alignment mark.  
Solution: Set the left tractor to the left tractor alignment mark or set the left  
cut-sheet feed alignment guide to the alignment mark.  
Problem: Cut-sheet form fed from the Manual Sheet Feed does not overlay  
continuous forms properly  
1:  
The cut-sheet form is skewed as it goes into the printer or does not feed  
into the printer at all.  
Solution: Hold the cut-sheet form firmly in place until the form is fed into  
the printer.  
Print Quality and Ribbon Problems  
Problem: Unreadable characters  
1:  
The ribbon is dry or worn.  
Solution: Check the ribbon and replace it if it is dry or worn. See  
“Changing Ribbon Cartridge” on page 133.  
Chapter 7. Resolving Printer Problems 147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2:  
3:  
The Automatic Forms Thickness Adjustment (AFTA) setting needs to be  
decreased.  
Solution: See the procedure for adjusting the forms thickness setting  
through the operator panel under “Automatic Forms Thickness (AFTA)” on  
page 111.  
Poor quality multiple-part forms.  
Solution: Try new forms.  
Problem: Missing dots or irregular characters  
1:  
2:  
The ribbon is worn.  
Solution: Check the ribbon for wear; replace it if necessary. See “Changing  
Ribbon Cartridge” on page 133.  
The ribbon is twisted or folded.  
Solution: Try moving the printhead back and forth while turning the ribbon  
advance knob. If the ribbon advance knob does not turn, replace the ribbon.  
See “Changing Ribbon Cartridge” on page 133.  
3:  
4:  
The Automatic Forms Thickness Adjustment (AFTA) setting needs to be  
changed.  
Solution: See the procedure for adjusting the forms thickness setting  
through the operator panel under “Automatic Forms Thickness (AFTA)” on  
page 111.  
The forms tractor is not seated correctly.  
Solution: Check the forms tractor installation. See “Loading Forms into  
Front Push Forms Path” on page 20 or the appropriate section in Chapter 3.  
Setting Up Another Forms Path.  
Problem: Ribbon smudging forms  
1:  
The ribbon is twisted or folded.  
Solution: Try moving the printhead back and forth while turning the ribbon  
advance knob. If the ribbon advance knob does not turn, replace the ribbon.  
See “Changing Ribbon Cartridge” on page 133.  
2:  
The Automatic Forms Thickness Adjustment (AFTA) setting needs to be  
increased.  
Solution: See the procedure for adjusting the forms thickness setting  
through the operator panel under “Automatic Forms Thickness (AFTA)” on  
page 111.  
3:  
The ribbon cartridge is defective.  
148 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Solution: Replace the ribbon cartridge. See “Changing Ribbon Cartridge”  
on page 133.  
4:  
The ribbon is over-inked.  
Solution: Replace the ribbon. See “Changing Ribbon Cartridge” on  
page 133.  
Problem: Printing is too light or partial characters print  
1:  
The Automatic Forms Thickness Adjustment (AFTA) setting needs to be  
changed.  
Solution: See the procedure for adjusting the forms thickness setting  
through the operator panel under “Automatic Forms Thickness (AFTA)” on  
page 111.  
2:  
The ribbon guide is seated incorrectly or the white snap arm is not snapped  
in place.  
Solution: Remove the ribbon and reinstall it. See “Changing Ribbon  
Cartridge” on page 133.  
Problem: Wavy print lines  
1:  
The Automatic Forms Thickness Adjustment (AFTA) setting needs to be  
changed.  
Solution: See the procedure for adjusting the forms thickness setting  
through the operator panel under “Automatic Forms Thickness (AFTA)” on  
page 111.  
2:  
The forms are loaded incorrectly.  
Solution: Check to see that the forms are loaded properly.  
Problem: Ribbon snagging, tearing, or not moving  
1:  
The ribbon is worn.  
Solution: Replace the ribbon cartridge. See “Changing Ribbon Cartridge”  
on page 133.  
2:  
The ribbon cartridge is not properly installed.  
Solution: Remove and then reinstall the same ribbon. See “Changing  
Ribbon Cartridge” on page 133. If the ribbon still does not move, replace  
the ribbon.  
3:  
The Automatic Forms Thickness Adjustment (AFTA) setting needs to be  
changed.  
Solution: See the procedure for adjusting the forms thickness setting  
through the operator panel under “Automatic Forms Thickness (AFTA)” on  
page 111.  
Chapter 7. Resolving Printer Problems 149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4:  
The printhead is catching on the ribbon.  
Solution: Call for service.  
Problem: Ribbon moves continuously  
1:  
The ribbon drive circuit is failing.  
Solution: Call for service.  
Problem: Line-to-line horizontal misregistration  
1:  
The dot registration of the characters printed is not aligned.  
Solution: Perform the Bidirectional Adjustment test in the Power On  
Configuration menu. See “Bidirectional Adjustment” on page 104.  
Configuration Problems  
Problem: Messages on the operator display panel are in the wrong language  
1:  
Wrong language set selected.  
Solution: See “Changing Display Language” on page 19.  
Problem: Wrong Print Language  
1:  
Wrong print language set.  
Solution: See “Print Language” on page 87 for information about selecting  
language sets.  
Problem: Printer doesn’t print or prints wrong characters  
1:  
Nothing is printed or the wrong characters print.  
Solution:  
v Make sure the printer cable is attached to the host.  
v Check the Power On Configuration menu host interface settings. See  
Chapter 4. Configuring Your Printer.  
Miscellaneous Problems  
Problem: Throughput of printer at half speed  
1:  
The Quiet Print function is set on.  
Solution: Press Quiet. If the message QUIET PRINT=ON displays, press  
Quiet again to disable the function. The printer will now print at its normal  
speed.  
Problem: Printer has no power  
1:  
The power cord is not connected.  
Solution: Ensure the power cord is plugged into the printer and into the  
receptacle. Ensure that the receptacle is working correctly.  
150 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 8. Supplies, Forms, and Cables  
Ordering Ribbon Cartridges .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 151  
. 151  
. 153  
. 154  
. 154  
. 154  
. 154  
. 155  
. 155  
. 155  
. 155  
. 155  
. 156  
. 156  
. 156  
. 156  
. 157  
. 157  
. 157  
Forms Specifications  
Ordering Signal Cable .  
Serial Attachment  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
RS-232C Connector Pin Assignments .  
RS-422A Connector Pin Assignments .  
Attachment Cables for PCs and Compatible Serial Ports .  
Attachment Cables for AS/400 Workstation Controllers .  
Attachment Cable for RISC System/6000 .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Cable Configurations .  
RS-232C.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Local Simplex – DTR Pacing  
Local Duplex – DTR or XON/XOFF Pacing .  
Local Duplex – DTR or XON/XOFF Pacing .  
Local Duplex – XON/XOFF Pacing .  
Local Duplex – XON/XOFF Pacing .  
Local Duplex – XON/XOFF Pacing .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
RS-422A .  
IBM Parallel Attachment .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
This chapter describes how to order ribbon cartridges, how to define your forms  
needs, and how to specify a signal cable. Ribbon cartridges and forms are the only  
supplies you need for your printer.  
Ordering Ribbon Cartridges  
Use IBM part number 1053685 when ordering a new ribbon cartridge. Contact your  
place of purchase or call Lexmark at 1-800-438-2468 to order cartridges.  
Forms Specifications  
The 4247 Printer prints on continuous forms and cut-sheet forms. Before ordering  
volumes of forms, test and evaluate all forms in the anticipated physical  
environment. Consider the affects of such factors as temperature and humidity on  
forms handling, print registration, and print quality. The forms you select should  
meet the following specifications.  
Note: With the addition of the optional Automatic Sheet Feeder you can print on  
individual sheets of cut-sheet, xerographic paper, and on envelopes. Refer to  
the 4247 Printer Automatic Sheet Feeder Guide for paper information.  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1995, 1998  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
151  
 
Forms Paths  
Continuous Forms  
Cut Sheet  
Front Push, Rear  
Pull, Push Pull  
Paper Criteria  
Dimensions  
Characteristics  
Width  
Rear Push  
Manual Feed  
76.2 to 431.8 mm  
3 to 17 in.  
76.2 to 431.8 mm  
114.3 to 444.5 mm  
3 to 17 in.  
4.5 to 17.5 in.  
(Note 8)  
Length  
Weight  
76.2 to 609.6 mm  
3 to 24 in.  
76.2 to 609.6 mm  
3 to 24 in.  
101.6 to 609.6 mm  
4 to 24 in.  
(Note 8)  
50 to 120 g/m2  
Single Part  
55 to 150 g/m2  
15 to 40 lb  
55 to 80 g/m2  
15 to 21 lb  
0.08 mm  
13.3 to 32 lb  
0.08 mm  
Thickness (minimum) 0.08 mm  
0.003 in.  
0.003 in.  
4
0.003 in.  
8
Multiple Part  
Maximum parts  
8
(Original + Copies)  
Overall Thickness  
0.08 to 0.635 mm  
0.08 to 0.35 mm  
0.08 to 0.635 mm  
0.003 to 0.025 in.  
55 to 150 g/m2  
0.003 to 0.014 in.  
55 to 80 g/m2  
0.003 to 0.025 in.  
55 to 150 g/m2  
Weight of top part  
15 to 40 lb  
15 to 21 lb  
15 to 40 lb  
Attached sheet  
individual weight  
45 to 75 g/m2  
45 to 75 g/m2  
45 to 75 g/m2  
12 to 20 lb  
12 to 20 lb  
12 to 20 lb  
Carbon paper  
14 to 35 g/m2  
14 to 35 g/m2  
14 to 35 g/m2  
individual weight  
4 to 9 lb  
4-9 lb  
4 to 9 lb  
7, 8, 9  
See these notes for each forms path.  
1, 2, 3, 5, 6  
1, 2, 3, 4  
152 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Forms Paths  
Continuous Forms  
Cut Sheet  
Front Push, Rear  
Pull, Push Pull  
Paper Criteria  
Notes:  
Continuous Forms  
Characteristics  
Rear Push  
Manual Feed  
1. Test forms less than 152.4 mm (6 in.) in length or width for satisfactory stacking. These forms may require  
additional operator attention.  
2. For optimum performance, restrict the printable area to be within 6.4 mm (0.25 in.) from all edges, holes, or folds  
on the forms.  
3. Some multiple-part forms (such as mailers, thick/heavy perforations) may cause problems when using the Park  
function. Try the forms first. To minimize parking problems, discuss your needs with your forms supplier when  
selecting forms.  
4. IBM does not recommend continuous forms with adhesive labels.  
5. To prevent the separation of labels from continuous-forms when using the Tear or Park keys, set FRONT  
TEAR=NO or REAR TEAR=NO in the Power On Configuration menu. Making this configuration change does the  
following:  
v
v
Disables the Tear key tear-off function  
Modifies how the Park key works for forms in the Front Push and Rear Push forms paths. You cannot back up  
the forms to park them. Break the forms at a perforation before they enter the printer. Press Park twice, and  
the forms will move forward until ejected from the printer.  
6. Black-back forms cannot be used in these forms paths. They can only be used in the Rear Push, Manual Sheet  
Feed, and Auto Sheet Feed (bins 1, 2, and 3) forms paths.  
Cut-Sheet Forms  
7. The following sizes of cut-sheet forms may be used in the Manual Sheet Feed forms path: A5, A4, A3, A2, Letter,  
Legal, Executive.  
8. For optimum performance, restrict printing to 12.7 mm (0.5 in.) from all edges, holes, or folds on the forms.  
9. The term length applies to the forms dimension parallel to the forms motion.  
Ordering Signal Cable  
You can order signal cables and connectors through your IBM marketing  
representative. You also can purchase the cables and connectors from other  
suppliers. However, the cables and connectors from suppliers other than IBM must  
conform to IBM specifications.  
Chapter 8. Supplies, Forms, and Cables 153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A signal cable connects the printer to other controllers or computers. The printer  
does not come with a signal cable.  
It is your responsibility to obtain, install, and maintain the signal cable. In addition, it  
is your responsibility to ensure the cabling meets the applicable local, state, and  
federal building codes. The cables are available in bulk sizes or in precut lengths.  
You can purchase components or preassembled cables from IBM.  
Use the information on the following pages to order the correct cable. For additional  
information on cabling requirements, refer to the Guide to Operations for the  
computer to which you are attaching the printer.  
Serial Attachment  
The 4247 Printer attaches to a host or controller by one of two serial interfaces,  
RS-232C or RS-422A. A single, 25-pin D-connector mounted directly on the adapter  
card allows attachment to either interface.  
The RS-232C interface uses a standard serial cable up to 15.2 m (50 ft) in length,  
with transmission rates up to 19.2 Kbps.  
The RS-422A interface uses a serial cable up to 1219 m (4,000 ft) in length, with  
transmission rates up to 38.4 Kbps.  
RS-232C Connector Pin Assignments  
Pin Number  
Signal Name  
TXD  
Description  
2
Transmit Data  
Receive Data  
3
RXD  
RTS  
CTS  
DSR  
SG  
4
Request to Send  
Clear to Send  
Data Set Ready  
Signal Ground  
Data Terminal Ready  
5
6
7
20  
DTR  
RS-422A Connector Pin Assignments  
Pin Number  
Signal Name  
- RXD  
Description  
Receive Data  
Receive Data  
Transmit Data  
Transmit Data  
15  
17  
19  
25  
+ RXD  
- TXD  
+ TXD  
Attachment Cables for PCs and Compatible Serial Ports  
The table below lists part numbers to use when ordering a cable.  
Note: Before you place an order, IBM recommends you contact your IBM  
marketing representativeto verify the current part number.  
154 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Interface Type  
RS-232C  
Cable Part Number  
8509386  
IBM Standard Length  
6.1 m (20 ft)  
RS-422A  
70X8652  
15.2 m (50 ft)  
Attachment Cables for AS/400 Workstation Controllers  
The table below lists part numbers to use when ordering a cable.  
Note: Before you place an order for a cable, IBM recommends you contact your  
IBM marketing representative to verify the current part number.  
Interface Type  
RS-232C  
Cable Part Number  
21F4342  
IBM Standard Length  
12.2 m (40 ft)  
RS-422A  
21F4346  
30.5 m (100 ft)  
Attachment Cable for RISC System/6000  
The table below lists a part number to use when ordering a cable.  
Note: Before you place an order for a cable, IBM recommends you contact your  
IBM marketing representative to verify the current part number.  
Interface Type  
Cable Part Number  
RS-232C Serial Cable Kit: IBM Async Cable EIA-232/V.24  
and Printer/Terminal Interposer EIA-232  
08H6957  
Cable Configurations  
Cable configurations depend on the computer or devices and machines in the  
controlling system. The following diagrams show some of the possible  
configurations for the RS-232C and RS-422A connection.  
RS-232C  
Local Simplex – DTR Pacing  
Computer  
SG (7)  
Printer  
(7) SG  
(3) RXD  
TXD (2)  
(20) DTR  
(4) RTS  
CTS (5) or DSR (6)  
(6)  
DSR  
Chapter 8. Supplies, Forms, and Cables 155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Local Duplex – DTR or XON/XOFF Pacing  
Computer  
Printer  
(7)  
SG  
(7) SG  
TXD (2)  
TXD  
(2)  
(3)  
RXD  
(3)  
RXD  
(20) DTR  
(5) CTS  
CTS (5) or DSR (6)  
(6)  
DSR  
(4) RTS  
Local Duplex – DTR or XON/XOFF Pacing  
Computer  
Printer  
(7)  
(2)  
(3)  
(5)  
(7)  
(2)  
SG  
TXD  
RXD  
SG  
TXD  
(3) RXD  
(20)  
(5)  
DTR  
CTS  
DSR  
CTS  
RTS (4)  
DTR (20)  
(6)  
DSR  
(4) RTS  
(6)  
Note: This configuration is compatible with IBM cable part number 8509386.  
Local Duplex – XON/XOFF Pacing  
Computer  
Printer  
(7)  
(2)  
(7)  
(2)  
SG  
SG  
TXD  
TXD  
RXD (3)  
(3) RXD  
(20) DTR  
(20)  
(5)  
DTR  
CTS  
RTS  
DSR  
(5)  
CTS  
(4) RTS  
(6) DSR  
(4)  
(6)  
Local Duplex – XON/XOFF Pacing  
Computer  
Printer  
(7)  
(2)  
(7)  
(2)  
SG  
TXD  
RXD  
SG  
TXD  
(3) RXD  
(20) DTR  
(3)  
(20)  
(6)  
DTR  
DSR  
RTS  
CTS  
(6)  
(4)  
DSR  
RTS  
(4)  
(5)  
(5) CTS  
156 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Local Duplex – XON/XOFF Pacing  
Computer  
Printer  
(7)  
(2)  
(7)  
(2)  
SG  
TXD  
RXD  
SG  
TXD  
(3) RXD  
(20) DTR  
(3)  
(20)  
(6)  
DTR  
DSR  
(6)  
(4)  
(5)  
DSR  
RTS  
CTS  
RTS  
CTS  
(4)  
(5)  
RS-422A  
Computer  
TXD  
Printer  
-
(15)  
RXD  
-
+ TXD  
(17) +RXD  
(19) - TXD  
(25) +TXD  
-
RXD  
+ RXD  
IBM Parallel Attachment  
The 4247 Printer supports the IBM Parallel printer interface. A single, 36-pin  
connector is mounted on the adapter card.  
The PC-parallel interface attaches to the host with a standard PC Parallel printer  
cable (IBM part number 92F3176) up to 1.8 m (6 ft) in length.  
Table 16. IBM Parallel Connector Pin Assignments  
Pin Number  
Signal Name  
-STROBE  
DATA  
Description  
1
Strobe  
2 - 9  
10  
Eight Data Lines  
Acknowledge  
Busy  
-ACKNLG  
BUSY  
11  
12  
PE  
Out of Forms  
Printer Selected  
Automatic Line Feed on EOL  
13  
SLCT  
14  
-AUTO FEED XT  
Unused  
15  
16  
LOGIC GND  
CHASSIS GROUND  
Unused  
Logic Ground  
17  
Chassis Ground  
18  
19 - 30  
31  
GROUND  
-INIT  
Ground  
Initialize Printer  
Printer Error  
Ground  
32  
-ERROR  
GROUND  
Unused  
33  
34, 35  
Chapter 8. Supplies, Forms, and Cables 157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 16. IBM Parallel Connector Pin Assignments (continued)  
Pin Number  
Signal Name  
Description  
36  
-SLCT IN  
Make printer selected  
158 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix A. Specifications  
Site Location .  
Environmental Requirements  
Operating Environment  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 159  
. 160  
. 160  
. 160  
. 160  
. 161  
. 161  
. 161  
. 161  
. 162  
. 162  
. 162  
. 162  
. 164  
. 165  
. 165  
. 165  
. 165  
. 166  
. 166  
. 166  
.
Nonoperating Environment .  
Shipping Environment .  
Storage Environment .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Physical Requirements  
.
.
.
.
Dimensions .  
Clearance .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Weight  
.
.
Electrical Requirements .  
Electrical Safety .  
.
.
Plugs and Receptacles by Country .  
Plug and Receptacle Depictions .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
Power Cord.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Branch Circuits and Grounding  
Power Consumption  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Heat Output  
Airflow.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Declaration of IBM Product Noise Emission Values .  
Operator and Service Clearance .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Site Location  
The site that you select for your new printer must meet the specifications and  
conditions shown on the following pages.  
Place your printer so that the printer is not affected by electrostatic discharges,  
which can cause discomfort to persons. Such discharges also can cause problems  
with the printer operation or the machines to which the printer connects. Avoid the  
factors that cause the buildup of electrostatic charges, such as:  
v Floor surfaces with low resistance to electrical charges  
v Carpeting without antistatic properties  
v Plastic seat coverings  
v Metal-frame furniture  
v Low-humidity environment  
If the printer is set up on a raised floor, you should remember that the power cord  
and the signal cable exit from the rear of the printer at the base.  
For reliable forms feeding, IBM recommends a printer stand or table that is  
approximately 381 mm (15 in.) deep, at least 762 mm (30 in.) wide, and 762 mm  
(30 in.) high. The shelf should be approximately 381 mm (15 in.) from the floor. If  
you use a table outside this range, you reduce efficiency or stability, and thus may  
have to monitor printer operation.  
Notes:  
1. An optional printer stand is available for your 4247 Printer. For more information  
on this printer stand, see “Optional Printer Stand” on page 32 or contact your  
IBM marketing representative.  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1995, 1998  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
159  
 
2. For additional information on stacking, see “Setting Up Manual Sheet Feed  
Path” on page 30 or “Chapter 3. Setting Up Another Forms Path” on page 39,  
depending on your forms path.  
Environmental Requirements  
The printer operates best in business offices.  
Attention: To prevent printer damage, do not power on (|) the printer immediately  
after the printer has been moved from an environment that does not meet the  
following operating requirements. Introduce the printer to the new operating  
environment at least 24 hours before you power it on (|).  
Operating Environment  
The following tables show the operating environment requirements for the printer.  
Variable  
Range or Value  
Temperature  
10° to 40° C (50° to 104°F) 16° to 32° C (60° to 90°F) with  
ASF  
Relative humidity  
8% to 80%  
Maximum wet bulb  
temperature  
26.7°C (80.0°F) 22.8°C (73.0°F) with ASF  
Note: The best conditions for feeding and stacking are within a temperature range  
of 15.6° to 32.2°C (60° to 90°F) and a relative humidity range of 26% to  
62%.  
Nonoperating Environment  
The following tables show the non-operating environment requirements for the  
printer.  
Variable  
Range or Value  
Temperature  
10° to 51°C (50° to 125°F) 10° to 43°C (50° to 109°F) with  
ASF  
Relative humidity  
8% to 80%  
Maximum wet bulb  
temperature  
26.7°C (80°F) 27.0°C (80.6°F) with ASF  
Shipping Environment  
The following table shows the shipping environment requirements for the printer.  
Variable  
Range or Value  
Temperature  
Relative humidity  
-40° to 60°C (-40° to 140°F)  
5% to 100% (including condensation, excluding rain)  
30°C (86°F)  
Maximum wet bulb  
temperature  
Note: The printer must be covered in plastic.  
160 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Storage Environment  
The following table shows the storage environment requirements for the printer.  
Variable  
Range or Value  
1° to 60°C (34° to 140°F)  
5% to 80%  
Temperature  
Relative humidity  
Maximum wet bulb  
temperature  
30°C (86°F)  
Note: Extended exposure to temperatures in excess of 41°C (105°F) degrades  
ribbon performance and print quality.  
Physical Requirements  
Dimensions  
Table 17 provides the dimensions of the printer.  
Table 17. Printer Dimensions  
Dimensions  
Width  
Standard  
With ASF  
679.5 mm (26.75 in.)  
400 mm (15.75 in.)  
311.2 mm (12.25 in.)  
679.5 mm (26.75 in.)  
673.1 mm (26.5 in.). See Note  
431.8 mm (17.0 in.)  
Depth  
Height  
Note: Depth is with all three ASF bins installed.  
Clearance  
Table 18 provides the recommended clearance you should maintain around the  
printer. Also see Figure 49 on page 167 and Figure 50 on page 168.  
Table 18. Printer Clearance  
Location  
Top  
Clearance  
400 mm (16 in.)  
450 mm (18 in.)  
450 mm (18 in.)  
150 mm (6 in.)  
150 mm (6 in.)  
Front  
Rear  
Left  
Right  
Appendix A. Specifications 161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Weight  
CAUTION:  
<1> The printer (without optional features attached) weighs approximately  
24.9 kilograms (55 pounds). Before attempting to lift the printer, get help from  
another person.  
Electrical Requirements  
Use the following tables to plan your site power requirements. The tables list the  
voltage inputs, grounding, plugs, and receptacles necessary for your new printer. All  
voltages are single-phase.  
Nominal Operating Voltages  
Countries  
100 V to 127 V 50 or 60 Hz 200 V to 240 V 50 or 60 Hz  
United States, Canada  
X
Central American, South  
American, and Far Eastern  
X
X
X
European, Middle Eastern,  
and African  
Saudi Arabia only  
Electrical Safety  
Safety is a major consideration in the design and manufacture of IBM products.  
Proper electrical grounding is essential for safety and for reliable operation of the  
printer. If you have any questions about the grounding of your receptacle, ask your  
electrician.  
Periodically review “Safety Information” on page xvi to maintain your awareness.  
Plugs and Receptacles by Country  
The following table shows, by country, which power plugs are shipped with the  
printer. The alphabetic references in these tables correspond to the power plugs  
shown in Figure 48 on page 164.  
VOLTAGE RANGE  
VOLTAGE RANGE  
COUNTRY  
Afghanistan  
125 V  
250 V  
COUNTRY  
125 V  
250 V  
A
A
B
B
A
Kenya  
Korea  
Kuwait  
Liberia  
Libya  
L
A
L
Algeria  
Argentina  
Australia  
Austria  
E
M
L
Bahamas  
Bahrain  
E
E
Malaysia  
Malta  
L
J
L
Bangladesh  
Barbados  
Belgium  
Mexico  
E
E
Nepal  
L
A
Netherland Antilles  
162 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
VOLTAGE RANGE  
VOLTAGE RANGE  
COUNTRY  
Bermuda  
125 V  
250 V  
COUNTRY  
Netherlands  
125 V  
250 V  
L
A
A
B
Bolivia  
E
E
New Guinea  
New Zealand  
Nicaragua  
Nigeria  
Brazil  
Brunei  
L
A
J
E
Bulgaria  
Burma  
L
A
L
J
Norway  
Canada  
Channel Islands  
Chile  
E
E
Oman  
L
M
LB  
B
Pakistan  
Panama  
E
China  
Paraguay  
Peru  
B
C
C
A
L
Colombia  
Costa Rica  
Cyprus  
Philippines  
Poland  
L
Denmark  
Dominican Republic  
Ecuador  
El Salvador  
Ethiopia  
Finland  
France  
G
Polynesia  
Portugal  
E
E
E
A
L
Qatar  
Romania  
Saudi Arabia  
Sierra Leone  
Singapore  
South Africa  
Spain  
A
M
A
A
A
E
L
L
Germany  
Guatemala  
Guyana  
Haiti  
J
E
E
A
J
L
Sri Lanka  
Sweden  
A
K
C
L
Honduras  
Hungary  
Iceland  
C
A
A
L
Switzerland  
Taiwan  
Tanzania  
Thailand  
Trinidad  
India  
C
Indonesia  
Iran  
A
A
L
E
Uganda  
L
L
Iraq  
United Kingdom  
United States  
Uruguay  
Ireland  
L
E
E
Israel  
H
M
B
Italy  
Venezuela  
Yugoslavia  
Zambia  
Jamaica  
Japan  
E
A
L
ED  
C
v Other Asian and Latin American countries not listed will ship with plug E attached  
to cord.  
v Other European, Middle Eastern, and African countries not listed will ship with  
plug A attached to cord.  
Appendix A. Specifications 163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Plug and Receptacle Depictions  
The following chart shows the power cord part numbers and their corresponding  
power plugs and receptacles that are used with the printer. The current rating is that  
of the power cord or plug, whichever is less.  
Plug  
(Three Dimensional  
View)  
Plug  
(Three Dimensional  
Receptacle  
View)  
Receptacle  
P/N 13F9979  
P/N 13F9976  
P/N 14F0087  
10A  
10A  
H
A
250 V  
250 V  
P/N 6952291  
P/N 13F9940  
P/N 14F0015  
P/N 14F0012  
10A  
10A  
J
B
250 V  
250 V  
P/N 1838574  
P/N 14F0051  
10A  
10A  
C
K
250 V  
250 V  
P/N 6952338  
P/N 14F0033  
10A  
10A  
D
L
125 V  
250 V  
P/N 14F0069  
Locking  
P/N 6952301  
P/N 6952300  
10A  
10A  
M
E
125 V  
250 V  
NEMA 5-15P  
NEMA 5-15R  
P/N 13F9997  
10A  
G
250 V  
All power plugs except  
are nonlocking.  
D
Note:  
Figure 48. Plugs and Receptacles  
164 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Power Cord  
Position the printer so the power cord can plug into the power receptacle without  
putting stress on the power cord. The standard power cord length in the U.S.A. and  
in all other countries is 2.74 m (9 ft). A 1.83 m (6 ft) power cord also is available in  
the U.S.A.  
Branch Circuits and Grounding  
A machine must be properly grounded. It is recommended that an insulated  
green-wire ground, the same size as the phase wire, be installed between the  
branch circuit panel and the receptacle.  
For personal safety, the ground should have sufficiently low impedance to limit the  
voltage to ground and to facilitate the operation of circuit-protective devices in the  
circuit. For example, the ground path must not exceed 1 ohm for 120-volt,  
20-ampere branch circuit devices.  
DANGER  
<1> The construction of this printer provides extra protection against the  
risk of electric shock by grounding appropriate metal parts. The extra  
protection may not function unless the power cord is connected to a  
properly-grounded receptacle. This machine has a grounding-type (3-wire)  
power cord because grounding is necessary. It is the responsibility of the  
customer or the person installing the machine to connect it to a  
properly-grounded receptacle. Seek professional assistance before using  
an adapter or extension cord; such a device could interrupt the grounding  
circuit.  
If this printer is connected to a receptacle that has been incorrectly  
connected to the building wiring, serious electric shock could result.  
Power Consumption  
100 V to 127 V  
50 or 60 Hz  
200 V to 240 V  
50 or 60 Hz  
Category  
Maximum (Peak)  
0.200 kVA  
0.260 kVA  
0.230 kVA  
0.050 kVA  
Operating (Maximum Typical) 0.200 kVA  
Idle  
0.050 kVA  
Heat Output  
100 V to 127 V  
50 or 60 Hz  
200 V to 240 V  
50 or 60 Hz  
Category  
Maximum (Peak)  
150 Watts (512 BTU/hr)  
140 Watts (478 BTU/hr)  
110 Watts (376 BTU/hr)  
20 Watts (68 BTU/hr)*  
Operating (Maximum Typical) 110 Watts (376 BTU/hr)  
Idle  
20 Watts (68 BTU/hr)*  
* EPA Energy Star rating  
Appendix A. Specifications 165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Airflow  
The printer uses two fans to cool its internal parts. Ensure that you do not block the  
air vents. Lack of correct cooling and ventilation can cause printer failures and  
improper operation.  
Declaration of IBM Product Noise Emission Values  
The following tables show the noise emission values for the 4247 Printer.  
Table 19. 4247 Printer Model A00  
Impulsive Noise  
Prominent Discrete Tones  
No  
No  
Table 20. Sound Emission Levels - 4247 Standard Covers  
Sound Emission Category  
Operating  
7.0 bels  
56 dB  
Idling  
LWAd  
3.9 bels  
24 dB  
<LpA>m  
Table 21. Sound Emission Levels - Automatic Sheet Feeder Covers  
Sound Emission Category  
Operating  
7.3 bels  
60 dB  
Idling  
LWAd  
4.0 bels  
25 dB  
<LpA>m  
Notes:  
1. LWAd is the declared sound power emission level for a production series of  
machines.  
2. <LpA>m is the mean value of the space-averaged sound pressure emission  
levels at the one-meter positions for a production series of machines.  
All measurements are made in accordance with the American National Standards  
Institute (ANSI) S12.10 and reported in conformance with the International  
Organization for Standardization (ISO) 9296.  
Operator and Service Clearance  
You must be able to reach the front and rear of the printer to operate the printer.  
Your service representative must be able to access all sides of the printer while  
performing maintenance. Use Table 18 on page 161,and Figure 49 on page 167 (or  
Figure 50 on page 168 if your printer has the Automatic Sheet Feeder installed) to  
determine the clearance you need for your printer, and to select the location for  
your printer.  
Symbols that appear in specification drawings are defined in the following table.  
Symbol  
Depicts  
––––  
Required clearance  
Signal cable entry/exit  
166 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Symbol  
Depicts  
Power cord  
Figure 49. Clearance - Base Printer  
Appendix A. Specifications 167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 50. Clearance - Printer with ASF  
168 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix B. Optional Features  
Available options for your printer are listed below:  
v Automatic Sheet Feeder (ASF) includes cover, stacker, and one input bin  
For additional information on the ASF, see 4247 Printer Automatic Sheet Feeder  
Guide.  
v Additional Input Bin for ASF (maximum of two for a total of three bins)  
v Additional Forms Tractor  
v Parallel Interface Cable  
v RS-232 Serial Interface Cable  
v RS-422 Serial Interface Cable  
v AS/400 Workstation Controller RS-232  
v AS/400 Workstation Controller RS-422  
v RISC System/6000 RS-232 Serial Cable Kit:  
– IBM Async Cable EIA-232/V.24  
– Printer/Terminal Interposer EIA-232  
v Ethernet 10BaseT (RJ45) Network Print Server  
v Ethernet 10Base2 (BNC) Network Print Server  
v Token-Ring Media Type 3 Network Print Server  
v Token-Ring Media Type 1 Network Print Server  
v Printer Stand  
For additional information, see “Optional Printer Stand” on page 32.  
For more information on these optional features, contact your IBM marketing  
representative.  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1995, 1998  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
169  
 
170 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C. Native 4247 Commands  
Native Commands .  
Bar Code Commands .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 171  
. 173  
. 173  
. 175  
. 176  
. 176  
. 176  
. 177  
. 178  
. 178  
. 178  
. 179  
. 179  
. 180  
. 180  
. 181  
. 181  
SELECT Command Format .  
PRINT Command Format  
Bar Code Examples.  
.
.
.
.
Example 1: Printing a single EAN-8 bar code .  
Example 2: Printing two 3 of 9 bar codes on a single line .  
Valid Bar Code Data  
Reinitialize Printer Command .  
Set Vertical Spacing (Inches) .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Set Vertical Spacing (Metric)  
Character (Horizontal) Spacing  
.
Forms Path Control .  
Select Resident Font .  
Select Emulation .  
Select AFTA in Column  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Select/Deselect ASF Bin .  
Native Commands  
The 4247 Printer supports all the Native 4247 commands in this appendix as well  
as the commands in Appendix D. Personal Printer Data Stream (PPDS) and in  
Appendix E. Epson FX-1050 Data Stream. The Native 4247 commands can be  
used with PPDS commands and the Epson FX-1050 commands, regardless of the  
selected emulation.  
Items in the following table enclosed in {} are variable data fields.  
Control  
Hex  
Name  
Bar Code Commands  
DC4 DC4 ESC ! {HT} 1 {HR} EM  
DC4 DC4 ESC ! {HT} 2 {HR} EM  
DC4 DC4 ESC ! {HT} 3 {HR} EM  
DC4 DC4 ESC ! {HT} 4 {HR} EM  
DC4 DC4 ESC ! {HT} 5 {HR} EM  
DC4 DC4 ESC ! {HT} 6 {HR} EM  
14 14 1B 21 {HT} 01 {HR} 19  
14 14 1B 21 {HT} 02 {HR} 19  
14 14 1B 21 {HT} 03 {HR} 19  
14 14 1B 21 {HT} 04 {HR} 19  
14 14 1B 21 {HT} 05 {HR} 19  
14 14 1B 21 {HT} 06 {HR} 19  
Select EAN-8 Bar Code  
Select EAN-13 Bar Code  
Select UPC-A Bar Code  
Select MSI Bar Code  
Select UPC-E Bar Code  
Select UPC 2-Digit Bar Code  
(Magazine)  
DC4 DC4 ESC ! {HT} 7 {HR} EM  
DC4 DC4 ESC ! {HT} 17 {HR} EM  
14 14 1B 21 {HT} 07 {HR} 19  
14 14 1B 21 {HT} 11 {HR} 19  
Select UPC 5-Digit Bar Code  
(Magazine)  
Select 2 of 5 INTERLEAVED Bar  
Code  
DC4 DC4 ESC ! {HT} 18 {HR} EM  
DC4 DC4 ESC ! {HT} 19 {HR} EM  
DC4 DC4 ESC ! {HT} 20 {HR} EM  
DC4 DC4 ESC ! {HT} 22 {HR} EM  
DC4 DC4 ESC ! {HT} 23 {HR} EM  
14 14 1B 21 {HT} 12 {HR} 19  
14 14 1B 21 {HT} 13 {HR} 19  
14 14 1B 21 {HT} 14 {HR} 19  
14 14 1B 21 {HT} 16 {HR} 19  
14 14 1B 21 {HT} 17 {HR} 19  
Select 2 of 5 INDUSTRIAL Bar Code  
Select 2 of 5 MATRIX Bar Code  
Select CODE 3 of 9 Bar Code  
Select CODABAR Bar Code  
Select CODE 128 Bar Code  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1995, 1998  
171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Control  
Hex  
Name  
DC4 DC4 ESC ! {HT} 24 {HR} EM  
14 14 1B 21 {HT} 18 {HR} 19  
Select POSTNET Bar Code  
DC4 DC4 ESC ( GS {O₁} {data₁} GS 14 14 1B 28 1D {O₁} {data₁} 1D {O₂} Print Bar Code Selection  
{O₂} {data₂}... EM  
{data₂}... 19  
Reinitialize Printer Command  
DC4 DC4 ESC @  
14 14 1B 40  
Reinitialize Printer  
Set Vertical Spacing Commands  
DC4 DC4 ESC 1 {NN}  
DC4 DC4 ESC 3 1  
14 14 1B 31 {NN}  
14 14 1B 33 31  
Set Vertical Spacing {NN}/144 Inch  
Set Vertical Spacing to 12  
Lines/30mm  
DC4 DC4 ESC 3 3  
DC4 DC4 ESC 3 4  
DC4 DC4 ESC 3 6  
DC4 DC4 ESC 3 8  
14 14 1B 33 33  
14 14 1B 33 34  
14 14 1B 33 36  
14 14 1B 33 38  
Set Vertical Spacing to 3 Lines/30mm  
Set Vertical Spacing to 4 Lines/30mm  
Set Vertical Spacing to 6 Lines/30mm  
Set Vertical Spacing to 8 Lines/30mm  
Character (Horizontal) Spacing Command  
DC4 DC4 ESC A {CS}  
Forms Path Control Commands  
DC4 DC4 ESC 4  
14 14 1B 41 {CS}  
Set 15, 17.1, or 20 CPI  
14 14 1B 34  
14 14 1B 35  
14 14 1B 38  
14 14 1B 39  
14 14 1B 4E {LP}  
Select ASF Bin 3  
DC4 DC4 ESC 5  
Eject Single Sheet or Form Feed  
Select ASF Bin 1  
DC4 DC4 ESC 8  
DC4 DC4 ESC 9  
Select ASF Bin 2  
DC4 DC4 ESC N {LP}  
Load or Park Fanfold from a Rear  
Path  
DC4 DC4 ESC T {LP}  
14 14 1B 54 {LP}  
Load or Park Fanfold from a Front  
Path  
Select Resident Font Command  
DC4 DC4 ESC g {RF}  
14 14 1B 67 {RF}  
14 14 1B 59 {SE}  
14 14 1B 5A {AA}  
Select Resident font  
Select Emulation  
Select Emulation Command  
DC4 DC4 ESC Y {SE}  
Select AFTA in Column Command  
DC4 DC4 ESC Z {AA}  
Select AFTA in Column  
Select / Deselect ASF Bin Commands  
//1//  
//2//  
//3//  
//C//  
//R//  
2F 2F 31 2F 2F  
2F 2F 32 2F 2F  
2F 2F 33 2F 2F  
2F 2F 43 2F 2F  
2F 2F 52 2F 2F  
Select ASF Bin 1  
Select ASF Bin 2  
Select ASF Bin 3  
Select ASF Bin 1, Bin 2  
Deselect ASF  
172 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Bar Code Commands  
To print bar codes with the Native 4247 commands, use the SELECT and PRINT  
commands. Both commands are required.  
Command  
SELECT  
Purpose  
v
v
v
Select the type of bar code to be printed.  
Determine the bar code height.  
Determine whether or not to print human readable information.  
PRINT  
v
v
Causes the bar code to print on the paper  
Determines the position on the line at which the bar code will print.  
Note: The PRINT command will permit multiple bar codes to be printed on a single line  
using a single PRINT command. You also may issue multiple PRINT commands for a single  
SELECT command, if the format and bar code topology do not change.  
The following pages show the general command structure for all bar code types.  
See “Valid Bar Code Data” on page 177 for specific bar code types, valid data field  
contents, and control information.  
Notes:  
1. Highlighted fields require input as defined below each table.  
2. Decimal values shown are for use in application programs.  
SELECT Command Format  
ASCII  
DC4  
14  
DC4  
14  
ESC  
1B  
!
HT  
HT  
HT  
BT  
BT  
BT  
HR  
HR  
HR  
EM  
19  
HEX  
21  
33  
DECIMAL  
20  
20  
27  
25  
Appendix C. Native 4247 Commands 173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
HT  
Byte HT of the SELECT command sets the height of the bar code to be  
printed. HT is a one-byte hexadecimal number that specifies the height of the  
bar code symbol in units of 1/6 inches.  
RANGE:  
EFFECT:  
01 to 0C (hexadecimal), 1 to 12 (decimal)  
1/6 inch to 12/6 inch (approx. 0.423 cm to 5.08 cm) bar code  
height, with a maximum height of 2 inches (approx. 5.08 cm)  
BT  
Byte BT is used to select the bar code type.  
Hex  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
11  
12  
13  
14  
16  
17  
18  
Decimal  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
17  
18  
19  
20  
22  
23  
24  
Bar Code Type  
EAN-8  
EAN-13  
UPC-A  
MSI (Also known as PLESSEY)  
UPC-E  
UPC 2-Digit (Magazine)  
UPC 5-Digit (Magazine)  
2 of 5 Interleaved  
2 of 5 Industrial  
2 of 5 Matrix  
Code 3 of 9  
CODABAR  
CODE 128  
POSTNET  
HR  
Byte HR is used to select whether or not to print human readable characters.  
Hex  
00  
01  
Decimal  
0
1
Action  
Do not print human readable characters  
Print human readable characters  
Note: POSTNET bar codes will not print human readable characters, even if HR  
is set to 1.  
174 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PRINT Command Format  
ASCII  
DC4 DC4 ESC  
(
GS  
1D  
29  
O₁ data₁  
O₁ data₁  
O₁ data₁  
GS  
1D  
29  
O+ data+ EM  
O+ data+ 19  
O+ data+ 25  
...  
...  
...  
HEX  
14  
20  
14  
20  
1B  
27  
28  
40  
DECIMAL  
Multiple bar codes may be printed using multiple field sets: GS O₁ data₁, GS O₂  
data₂,... GS O+ data+. Terminate the command with EM after the last data field to  
be printed.  
Note: Bar code symbols will print over any descenders in the previous character  
box, if any text is present.  
O₁...O  
+
Bytes O₁ through O+ are used to offset the bar code from the beginning of the  
line, left margin, last printed position (without carriage return), or as an offset  
between bar code symbols, in multiples of 1/72 inch. For example, use a hex  
value of 03 (or decimal value of 3) to start the bar code 3/72 inches from the  
left margin. If this same value is used for subsequent O+ data sets, the result  
will have 3/72 inch spacing between the bar codes. (See the examples on the  
next page.)  
Notes:  
v When the last column in the line is reached, all additional data will  
be truncated, without an error message.  
v The maximum offset that can be specified is 255/72 (≈3.5+) inches.  
For larger offset, you must print blanks ahead of the barcode.  
data₁...data  
+
This portion of the command represents the actual bar code data. To print the  
data in a human readable form, the HR byte in the SELECT command must  
be set to the “print human readable” option as described under the SELECT  
Command Format.  
Each bar code type has rules for the data+ field that specify valid contents and  
characters that may be used as start (first) and stop (last) characters. See  
“Valid Bar Code Data” on page 177 for valid characters.  
Appendix C. Native 4247 Commands 175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Bar Code Examples  
Example 1: Printing a single EAN-8 bar code  
SELECT Command  
Select an EAN-8 bar code symbol with human readable characters.  
ASCII:  
HEX:  
DC4 DC4 ESC ! ETX SOH SOH EM  
14 14 1B 21 03 01 01 19  
DECIMAL: 20 20 27 33 3 1 1 25  
PRINT Command  
Print an EAN-8 bar code symbol of 1/2-inch height, one inch from the left margin,  
and with the data set of 12345678.  
ASCII:  
HEX:  
DC4 DC4 ESC ( GS H 12345678 EM  
14 14 1B 28 1D 48 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 19  
DECIMAL: 20 20 27 40 29 72 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 25  
Result  
Example 2: Printing two 3 of 9 bar codes on a single line  
SELECT Command  
Select Code 3 of 9 bar code symbol with human readable characters.  
ASCII:  
HEX:  
DC4 DC4 ESC ! ACK DC4 SOH EM  
14 14 1B 21 06 14 01 19  
DECIMAL: 20 20 27 33 6 20 1 25  
PRINT Command  
Print two Code 3 of 9 bar code symbols, of one inch height, the first symbol on the  
left margin, the second symbol one inch to the right of the first symbol, and an  
asterisk (*) used as the start (first) and stop (last) characters. The data sets are  
ABC+0123 and 1234.  
ASCII:  
HEX:  
DC4 DC4 ESC ( GS NUL *ABC+0123* GS H *01234* EM  
14 14 1B 28 1D 00 2A 41 42 43 2B 30 31 32 33 2A  
1D 48 2A 30 31 32 33 34 2A 19  
DECIMAL: 20 20 27 40 29 00 42 65 66 67 43 48 49 50 51 42  
29 72 42 48 49 50 51 52 42 25  
176 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Result  
* ABC+0123 *  
*1234 *  
1 inch  
margin  
Valid Bar Code Data  
Valid First/Last  
Bar Code Type  
Number of Characters  
Valid Characters (ASCII)  
Characters  
EAN-8  
Must be 8 digits, including  
check digit  
0 through 9  
Check Digit (required,  
rightmost position)  
EAN-13  
UPC-A  
Must be 13 digits, including  
check digit  
0 through 9  
0 through 9  
Check Digit (required,  
rightmost position)  
Must be 12 digits, including  
the first/last characters  
System Digit (in leftmost  
position)  
Check Digit (required,  
rightmost position)  
UPC-E  
Must be 6 digits, including  
the first/last characters  
0 through 9  
No system digit  
Check digit (implied)  
None  
MSI (PLESSEY)  
No defined length  
0 through 9  
0 through 9  
UPC 2-Digit (Magazine)  
Must be 3 digits long,  
including check digit  
Check digit (required,  
rightmost position)  
UPC 5-Digit (Magazine)  
2 of 5 Interleaved  
Must be 6 digits long,  
including check digit  
0 through 9  
0 through 9  
Check Digit (required,  
rightmost position)  
Any number, but must be  
an even number (including  
the check digit)  
None  
2 of 5 Industrial  
2 of 5 Matrix  
Code 3 of 9  
Any number  
Any number  
Any number  
0 through 9  
0 through 9  
0 through 9  
None  
None  
Must use * as first and last  
character  
A through Z  
Space  
- . $ / + %  
CODABAR  
Any number  
0 through 9  
A B C D  
- $ : / . +  
Appendix C. Native 4247 Commands 177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Valid First/Last  
Characters  
Bar Code Type  
Number of Characters  
Valid Characters (ASCII)  
Code 128 (See Note 1)  
Any number  
Any ASCII character with  
hex equivalent of 00  
through 7F, except X’19’  
and X’1D’  
Code start subset A, B, or  
C (in leftmost position  
coded)  
Check digit (required,  
rightmost position)  
POSTNET  
Any number, but must  
include a check digit  
0 through 9 (See Note 2)  
Check digit (required,  
rightmost position)  
Note:  
1. Human Readable Characters will be centered below the bar code, and can be wider than the encoded area.  
Allow space for Human Readable Characters to print without overlapping adjacent data.  
2. If the data field contains other than 0 through 9, all zeros will be printed.  
Reinitialize Printer Command  
This command reinitializes the printer. It resets the printer mode and clears the  
buffer of printable data.  
ASCII  
DC4  
14  
DC4  
14  
ESC  
1B  
@
40  
64  
HEX  
DECIMAL  
20  
20  
27  
Set Vertical Spacing (Inches)  
This command sets a line spacing value for subsequent line feeds.  
ASCII  
DC4  
14  
DC4  
14  
ESC  
1B  
1
NN  
HEX  
31  
49  
NN  
NN  
DECIMAL  
20  
20  
27  
NN  
NN is a one-byte hexadecimal number that specifies the line spacing value of  
NN/144 inches. The possible values for NN are:  
v Hexadecimal, 01 through FF  
v Decimal, 1 through 255  
Set Vertical Spacing (Metric)  
This command sets a line spacing value for subsequent line feeds.  
ASCII  
DC4  
14  
DC4  
14  
ESC  
1B  
3
LM  
LM  
LM  
HEX  
33  
51  
DECIMAL  
20  
20  
27  
178 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
LM  
Byte LM defines the number of lines per 30 mm as the vertical spacing  
between lines. The possible values for LM are:  
ASCII  
Hex  
31  
33  
34  
36  
Decimal  
49  
51  
52  
54  
Number of Lines per 30mm  
12  
3
4
6
1
3
4
6
8
38  
56  
8
Character (Horizontal) Spacing  
This command sets the character spacing, in characters per inch.  
ASCII  
DC4  
14  
DC4  
14  
ESC  
1B  
A
CS  
CS  
CS  
HEX  
41  
65  
DECIMAL  
20  
20  
27  
CS  
CS specifies the character spacing value. The possible values for CS are:  
Hex  
04  
05  
Decimal  
Character Spacing  
15 CPI  
17.1 CPI  
4
5
6
06  
20 CPI  
Forms Path Control  
This command causes single sheet load/eject.  
ASCII  
DC4  
14  
DC4  
14  
ESC  
1B  
FP  
HEX  
FP  
FP  
DECIMAL  
20  
20  
27  
This command controls load or park for a specified path.  
ASCII  
DC4  
14  
DC4  
14  
ESC  
1B  
FP  
FP  
FP  
LP  
HEX  
LP  
LP  
DECIMAL  
20  
20  
27  
Appendix C. Native 4247 Commands 179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FP  
FP selects the forms path for loading, parking, or ejecting a form. The possible  
values for FP are:  
ASCII  
4
5
Hex  
34  
35  
Decimal  
52  
53  
Result  
Single sheet loaded from ASF bin 3  
Single sheet ejected (cutsheet), or single form feed  
(continuous)  
8
9
N
T
38  
39  
4E  
54  
56  
57  
78  
84  
Single sheet loaded from ASF bin 1  
Single sheet loaded from ASF bin 2  
Loads or Parks form from rear path  
Loads or Parks form from front path  
LP  
LP causes the form to load or park in the path specified by FP. LP is used  
only when FP=N or FP=T. The possible values for LP are:  
Hex  
00  
01  
Decimal  
0
1
Result  
Loads the form (after parking or ejecting any other forms)  
Parks the form (requests 93 CONFIRM PARK before  
parking the form)  
Select Resident Font  
This command selects the type of resident font to be used for printing.  
ASCII  
DC4  
14  
DC4  
14  
ESC  
1B  
g
RF  
RF  
RF  
HEX  
67  
DECIMAL  
20  
20  
27  
103  
RF  
RF specifies the character spacing value. The possible values for RF are:  
Hex  
00  
Decimal  
0
Resident Font  
Courier  
01  
1
Gothic  
80  
81  
128  
129  
OCR-B  
OCR-A  
Select Emulation  
This command selects the printer emulation mode.  
ASCII  
DC4  
14  
DC4  
14  
ESC  
1B  
Y
SE  
SE  
SE  
HEX  
59  
89  
DECIMAL  
20  
20  
27  
180 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SE  
SE specifies the emulation mode. The possible values for SE are:  
Hex  
01  
Decimal  
Epson FX 1050  
Emulation Mode  
02  
05  
2
5
4202 Proprinter III XL  
Native 4247 or 2381  
Select AFTA in Column  
This command selects the column at 10 CPI where Automatic Forms Thickness  
Adjustment (AFTA) will be made.  
ASCII  
DC4  
14  
DC4  
14  
ESC  
1B  
Z
AA  
AA  
AA  
HEX  
5A  
90  
DECIMAL  
20  
20  
27  
AA  
The value for AA is the column number. This value should not exceed the  
maximum number of columns in the line.  
Select/Deselect ASF Bin  
This command selects the ASF bin to feed a new form or deselects (disables) the  
printer after ejecting a printed form.  
Note: This command must start and finish with a carriage return, line feed, or both;  
otherwise, it will be handled as if it were printable data.  
ASCII  
/
/
BN  
BN  
BN  
/
/
HEX  
2F  
47  
2F  
47  
2F  
47  
2F  
47  
DECIMAL  
BN specifies the ASF bin number to feed a new form, or BN is used to disable  
printing after ejecting a printed form. The possible values for BN are:  
ASCII  
1
2
3
C
Hex  
31  
32  
33  
43  
Decimal  
Result  
49  
50  
51  
67  
Feed new form, ASF bin 1  
Feed new form, ASF bin 2  
Feed new form, ASF bin 3  
Feed new form, ASF bin 1; then forms from ASF  
bin 2  
R
52  
82  
Disable printer to print after ejecting printed form  
Appendix C. Native 4247 Commands 181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
182 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D. Personal Printer Data Stream (PPDS)  
About This Appendix  
Print Job Processing  
Page Printing Concept.  
Page Presentation .  
Graphic and Control Character Sequences .  
PPDS Compatibility .  
One-Byte Controls .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 184  
. 184  
. 185  
. 185  
. 187  
. 188  
. 188  
. 188  
. 189  
. 189  
. 189  
. 189  
. 189  
. 189  
. 190  
. 190  
. 190  
. 190  
. 190  
. 191  
. 191  
. 191  
. 191  
. 191  
. 191  
. 193  
. 193  
. 193  
. 193  
. 194  
. 194  
. 194  
. 194  
. 194  
. 195  
. 195  
. 195  
. 195  
. 196  
. 196  
. 196  
. 196  
. 196  
. 197  
. 197  
. 197  
. 197  
. 197  
. 198  
. 198  
. 198  
. 198  
. 198  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Null (NUL) .  
Bell (BEL) .  
.
.
.
.
Backspace (BS) .  
Horizontal Tab (HT) .  
Line Feed (LF)  
.
.
.
.
Vertical Tab (VT) .  
Form Feed (FF) .  
Carriage Return (CR) .  
Shift Out (SO) / Double-Wide Print .  
Shift In (SI) / Condensed Print .  
Device Control 1 (DC1) / Select or XON .  
Device Control 2 (DC2) / Select 10 CPI  
Device Control 3 (DC3) / Deselect or XOFF .  
Device Control 4 (DC4) / Cancel Double-Wide Print .  
.
.
.
Cancel (CAN) .  
Escape (ESC) .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Space (SP) .  
.
Escape Sequence Controls .  
Null (ESC NUL) .  
Bell (ESC BEL)  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Backspace (ESC BS) .  
Horizontal Tab (ESC HT) .  
Line Feed (ESC LF)  
Vertical Tab (ESC VT) .  
Form Feed (ESC FF) .  
Carriage Return (ESC CR) .  
Shift Out (ESC SO) / Double-Wide Print .  
Shift In (ESC SI) / Condensed Print .  
Device Control 1 (ESC DC1) / Select or XON .  
Device Control 2 (ESC DC2) / Select 10 CPI  
Device Control 3 (ESC DC3) / Deselect or XOFF .  
Device Control 4 (ESC DC4) / Cancel Double-Wide Print .  
Cancel (ESC CAN) .  
Turn Auto Sheet Feeder On or Off (ESC EM) .  
Auto Underscore (ESC -).  
Set 1/8 Inch Line Spacing (ESC 0) .  
Set 7/72 Inch Line Spacing (ESC 1).  
Invoke Text Line Spacing (ESC 2)  
Set Graphics Line Spacing (ESC 3) .  
Set Top of Form (ESC 4) .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Set Auto Line Feed (ESC 5).  
Select PC Character Set 2 (ESC 6) .  
Select PC Character Set 1 (ESC 7) .  
Set 12 CPI (ESC :) .  
Unidirectional Printing (ESC <).  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Character Font Image Download (ESC=) .  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1995, 1998  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
183  
 
Select n/72 Inch Line Spacing (ESC A)  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 200  
. 200  
. 200  
. 201  
. 201  
. 201  
. 201  
. 201  
. 201  
. 202  
. 203  
. 203  
. 203  
. 203  
. 204  
. 204  
. 204  
. 204  
. 205  
. 205  
. 205  
. 205  
. 206  
. 206  
. 206  
. 206  
. 207  
. 207  
. 207  
. 207  
. 207  
. 208  
. 209  
. 209  
. 211  
. 212  
. 213  
Set Vertical Tabs (ESC B)  
Set Page Length (ESC C)  
Set Horizontal Tabs (ESC D)  
Begin Emphasized Print (ESC E) .  
End Emphasized Print (ESC F)  
Begin Double-Strike Print (ESC G) .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
End Double-Strike Print (ESC H) .  
Change Font (ESC I) .  
Relative Move Baseline (ESC J) .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Normal Density Bit Image Graphics (ESC K)  
Dual Density Bit Image Graphics Type 1 (ESC L) .  
Begin Skip Perforation (ESC N) .  
End Skip Perforation (ESC O) .  
Proportional Space Mode (ESC P) .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Deselect on Positive Query Reply (ESC Q) .  
Set Default Tabs (ESC R)  
Begin Subscript / Superscript Mode (ESC S)  
End Subscript/Superscript Mode (ESC T) .  
Set Print Direction (ESC U) .  
Double-Wide Continuous Mode (ESC W) .  
Set Horizontal Margins (ESC X) .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Dual Density Bit Image Graphics Type 2 (ESC Y) .  
High Density Bit Image Graphics (ESC Z)  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Print All Characters (ESC \) .  
Reverse Line Feed (ESC ]) .  
Print Single Character (ESC |).  
Continuous Overscore (ESC _)  
Relative Move Right (ESC d) .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Relative Move Left (ESC e) .  
Select Line Scoring (ESC [ -) .  
.
Set Presentation Highlight (SPH) (ESC [ @).  
Set Font Global (SFG) (ESC [ I) .  
Set Initial Conditions (SIC) (ESC [ K)  
Select Code Page (SCP) (ESC [ T) .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Set Print Quality (SPQ) (ESC [ d).  
Buffer Terminating Conditions .  
.
.
.
.
About This Appendix  
The IBM 4247 Printer implements a subset of PPDS. The environment in which the  
printer data stream processor operates is described below.  
If you are using the PPDS data stream commands, you use the commands in this  
appendix, as well as those in Appendix C. Native 4247 Commands.  
Print Job Processing  
There are no PPDS controls that explicitly define print job boundaries. A print job for  
the 4247 is established by the host system and consists of any set of related print  
objects. A print job could be as short as one character or could be many pages  
long.  
184 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Program Configuration parameter values can be changed at any time; however, to  
obtain predictable results, changes to operator panel configuration parameter values  
should be made before the print job is sent to the printer and after the previous  
print job has completed printing. Changing configuration parameter values while a  
print job is in progress may cause unpredictable results.  
IBM recommends the following to ensure that your print jobs run correctly:  
v Establish a known print environment, and end any previous print job. Start each  
print job with a Set Initial Conditions control. This control resets the printer  
environment to the default settings. You can then set additional controls  
depending on your print job environment.  
v End each print job with a Form Feed control. This control causes all data to be  
printed, and the current position is set to the top-of-form position.  
v If a print job is terminated abnormally, the job should be canceled. To cancel a  
print job:  
– Press Online to stop printing.  
– Stop the print job at the host computer.  
– Press Menu/Enter and then Online.  
The print buffers are cleared and the printer is in an offline not ready state. Press  
Online again to make the printer online and ready.  
Page Printing Concept  
The 4247 processes print jobs in terms of pages, as well as in lines and columns. A  
page is a logical entity whose boundaries are defined by the page width and the  
page length. These boundaries are established during printer initialization using the  
printer defaults, and can be changed using the Configuration menu or by issuing  
the appropriate data stream controls.  
As a job prints, the printer controller maintains both the logical position and the  
physical position on the page. If a print job does not end with a proper job  
terminator (for example, Form Feed), then:  
v All data for the current page may not print.  
v The next print job may be misaligned on the form.  
v Residual data from a previous job could print with the new job.  
Page Presentation  
Many PPDS commands (tabs, margins, line spacing, for example) are described in  
terms of the presentation surface. A presentation surface is a two-dimensional  
surface upon which the printer positions symbols according to controls embedded in  
the incoming data stream. The presentation surface is defined in absolute terms by  
the width and depth parameters of the page size control commands (Set Page  
Length, Set Horizontal Margins, for example). The physical print position does not  
move outside the range of these two parameters. The left margin (LM) and right  
margin (RM) are variable parameters within the presentation surface. The logical  
print position does not move outside the range of the vertical margins nor outside  
the horizontal margins + 1. The following figure shows the presentation surface and  
the relationships of some of these parameters.  
Appendix D. Personal Printer Data Stream (PPDS) 185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
n
CPP = 1  
CPL = 1  
TOF  
Physical  
Page  
LM  
RM  
SOP  
PL  
n
CPP  
CPL  
TOF  
LM  
Current Print Position (LM ≤ CPP ≤ RM).  
Current Print Line  
Top of Form  
Left Margin  
RM  
Right Margin  
SOP Skip Over Perforation  
PL  
Page Length  
Notes:  
1. The host should set the limits of the presentation surface if the default or  
previous values are not acceptable.  
2. The operator should align the physical paper so that it matches the logical  
presentation surface.  
Also created with this surface is a pair of numbers (CPL and CPP) which specify  
the line number and column number where the next graphic will be printed. These  
internal values are the logical position on the presentation surface.  
The variable parameters have default values which are established when the printer  
is initialized. The standard power-on defaults are:  
TOF  
PL  
Operator panel setting  
Operator panel setting  
Operator panel setting  
Operator panel setting  
CPI  
LPI  
186 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LM  
RM  
0 inches (Column 1)  
Operator panel setting  
SOP Operator panel setting  
HT  
Horizontal tabs are set at each 8th column, starting with column 9 (9, 17,  
25, 33, and so on)  
VT  
Vertical tabs are all cleared  
Graphic and Control Character Sequences  
PPDS uses an ASCII encoding scheme to define controls and printable graphics.  
Multiple code pages for printable graphics are supported. Control characters are  
interpreted based on the environment established by any preceding control  
characters and signals.  
The 4247 Printer supports several ASCII code pages. Within a code page, a code  
point can be treated as a printable character (including space) or as a control code.  
The following data stream controls affect how a code point is interpreted:  
ESC 6 Select PC Character Set 2  
ESC 7 Select PC Character Set 1  
ESC \ Print All Characters  
ESC ^ Print Single Character  
ESC [ K  
Set Initial Conditions  
The following code points are interpreted as control characters:  
v PC Character Set 1  
– X'00' to X'1F'  
– X'7F' (treated as NULL)  
– X'80' to X'9F'  
v PC Character Set 2  
– X'00' to X'02'  
– X'07' to X'1F'  
– X'7F' (treated as NULL)  
Note: No characters are treated as controls when they are part of a Print Single  
Character or Print All Characters control.  
The following code points are interpreted as printable graphic characters:  
v PC Character Set 1  
– X'20' (space)  
– X'21' to X'7E'  
– X'A0' to X'FE'  
– X'FF' (required space)  
v PC Character Set 2  
– X'03' to X'06'  
– X'20' (space)  
– X'20' to X'7E'  
Appendix D. Personal Printer Data Stream (PPDS) 187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
– X'80' to X'FE'  
– X'FF' (required space)  
Note: All characters are treated as printable graphic characters when they are part  
of a Print Single Character or Print All Characters control.  
PPDS Compatibility  
PPDS is supported in Native 4247 mode and in IBM 2381 Personal Printer and IBM  
4202 Proprinter III XL emulation modes. When Native 4247 mode is selected,  
PPDS control codes are supported in the same manner as if emulating the IBM  
2381 Personal Printer. The emulation mode can be selected from the Program  
Configuration menu, using the operator panel. Emulation mode also may be  
selected using the Set Initial Conditions (ESC [ K) control sequence, if the printer is  
set to Native 4247 or 2381 emulation mode.  
One-Byte Controls  
Note: Control hex values within parentheses (nn) are recognized only within PC  
Character Set 1.  
The printer uses the following one-byte controls:  
Control  
NUL  
BEL  
BS  
Hex  
Name  
00 (80)  
07 (87)  
08 (88)  
09 (89)  
0A (8A)  
0B (8B)  
0C (8C)  
0D (8D)  
0E (8E)  
0F (8F)  
11 (91)  
12 (92)  
13 (93)  
14 (94)  
18 (98)  
1B (99)  
20  
Null (no operation)  
Bell  
Backspace  
HT  
Horizontal Tab  
LF  
Line Feed  
VT  
Vertical Tab  
FF  
Form Feed  
CR  
Carriage Return  
SO  
Shift Out (Double-Wide Print)  
Shift In (Condensed Print)  
Device Control 1 (Select, XON)  
Device Control 2 (Set 10 CPI)  
Device Control 3 (Deselect, XOFF)  
Device Control 4 (Cancel Double-Wide Print)  
Cancel  
SI  
DC1  
DC2  
DC3  
DC4  
CAN  
ESC  
SP  
Escape (Multiple-byte control prefix)  
Space  
Null (NUL)  
00  
This control terminates the Set Horizontal Tab and Set Vertical Tab control codes.  
The printer ignores NUL by itself.  
188 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Bell (BEL)  
07  
This control causes the audible alarm to sound, if enabled. The alarm may be  
disabled or enabled from the Power On Configuration menu.  
Backspace (BS)  
08  
This control moves the print position horizontally one character width to the left. If  
the current print position is at the left margin, the printer ignores this command.  
Horizontal Tab (HT)  
09  
This control moves the print position to the next horizontal tab stop. If there are no  
tab stops to the right, or if the next tab stop is beyond the current right margin, the  
control is ignored.  
Line Feed (LF)  
0A  
This control advances the paper one line. The horizontal position does not change  
unless automatic carriage return mode is activated from the operator panel  
Configuration menu. If the paper advance crosses the bottom margin, the printer  
completes all deferred printing on the current page and then does an automatic  
form feed.  
If skip perforation mode is active and the bottom margin is crossed, the vertical  
position on the new page following the automatic form feed will be the top-of-form  
position. If skip perforation is not active, the vertical position on the new page is the  
point immediately following the previous print line.  
Vertical Tab (VT)  
0B  
This control causes the vertical print position to be advanced to the next vertical tab  
stop. The horizontal position is not affected unless automatic carriage return mode  
is activated from the operator panel Configuration menu. If there are no tab stops  
past the current vertical print position, Vertical Tab is treated as a Line Feed.  
Form Feed (FF)  
0C  
This control causes a new page to be started. Form Feed is a line end and page  
end control; it causes all deferred printing that may have been buffered for the  
current page to be completed and the form physically advanced to eject the current  
page. The vertical print position advances to the top margin and the horizontal print  
position is set to the left margin for subsequent printing.  
Appendix D. Personal Printer Data Stream (PPDS) 189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Carriage Return (CR)  
0D  
This control moves the current horizontal print position to the left margin. The  
vertical print position does not change unless automatic line feed mode is active  
(see “Set Auto Line Feed (ESC 5)” on page 197).  
Shift Out (SO) / Double-Wide Print  
0E  
This control causes the printer to start double-width printing. Double-width printing  
prints the characters twice as wide as the current character spacing. This results in  
half as many characters per inch. Each character takes up the space of two  
single-width characters. A Carriage Return, Line Feed, Form Feed, Vertical Tab,  
Double-Wide Continuous Mode, or Cancel Double-Wide Print with vertical  
movement specified cancels the Shift Out control code.  
Shift In (SI) / Condensed Print  
0F  
This control prints graphic characters in condensed pitch (17.1 CPI or 20 CPI).  
Shift In is a buffer terminating control; if printable data at a different  
character-per-inch setting is buffered, that data is printed before the setting is  
changed. The current print position becomes the next printable column at the new  
character-per-inch setting. CPI can be changed within a print line, and this control  
changes the maximum number of characters that can be printed on one line.  
A combination of 10 CPI and Condensed Print sets the printer to 17.1 CPI  
regardless of the 20 CPI setting in the Power On Configuration menu.  
A combination of 12 CPI and Condensed Print sets the printer to 20 CPI when  
20 CPI=YES is set in the Power On Configuration Menu. A combination of 12 CPI  
and Condensed Print sets the printer to 12 CPI when 20 CPI=NO is set in the Power  
On Configuration menu.  
Device Control 1 (DC1) / Select or XON  
11  
This control has different meanings depending upon the currently active interface.  
v Parallel interface (Select): DC1 selects the printer.  
v Serial interface (XON): DC1 is treated as a NUL if received from the host. The  
printer sends DC1 (XON) to the host to control data pacing if XON/XOFF pacing  
is selected.  
Device Control 2 (DC2) / Select 10 CPI  
12  
This control sets 10 characters per inch. DC2 is a buffer terminating control; if  
printable data at a different characters-per-inch setting is buffered, that data is  
190 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
printed before the setting is changed. The current print position becomes the next  
printable column at the new character-per-inch setting. CPI can be changed within a  
print line.  
Device Control 3 (DC3) / Deselect or XOFF  
13  
This control has different meanings depending upon the currently active interface.  
v Parallel interface (Deselect): DC3 is treated as a NUL.  
v Serial interface (XOFF): DC3 is treated as a NUL if received from the host. The  
printer sends DC3 (XOFF) to the host to control data pacing if XON/XOFF pacing  
is selected.  
Device Control 4 (DC4) / Cancel Double-Wide Print  
14  
This control cancels double-wide printing if double wide was selected with the Shift  
Out control. The characters-per-inch setting returns to the previous value.  
Cancel (CAN)  
18  
This control purges all buffered data. All data received after the most recent buffer  
terminating control is discarded. For a list of buffer terminating controls, see “Buffer  
Terminating Conditions” on page 213. Any data received after Cancel is processed  
normally. Cancel does not change the current print position.  
Escape (ESC)  
Space (SP)  
1B  
This control is a prefix used in combination with supplementary control bytes to  
provide an extended set of control functions.  
20  
This control moves the print position one character space to the right.  
Escape Sequence Controls  
Escape sequence controls have an ESC followed by one or more control  
parameters. Supported escape sequence controls are:  
Control  
Hex  
Name  
ESC NUL  
ESC BEL  
ESC BS  
ESC HT  
1B 00  
1B 07  
1B 08  
1B 09  
Null (no operation)  
Bell  
Backspace  
Horizontal Tab  
Appendix D. Personal Printer Data Stream (PPDS) 191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Control  
ESC LF  
ESC VT  
ESC FF  
ESC CR  
ESC SO  
ESC SI  
Hex  
Name  
1B 0A  
1B 0B  
1B 0C  
1B 0D  
1B 0E  
1B 0F  
1B 11  
1B 12  
1B 13  
1B 14  
Line Feed  
Vertical Tab  
Form Feed  
Carriage Return  
Shift Out (Double-Wide Print)  
Shift In (Condensed Print)  
Device Control 1 (Select, XON)  
Device Control 2 (Set 10 CPI)  
Device Control 3 (Deselect, XOFF)  
ESC DC1  
ESC DC2  
ESC DC3  
ESC DC4  
Device Control 4 (Cancel Double-Wide  
Print)  
ESC CAN  
ESC EM  
ESC -  
1B 18  
1B 19  
1B 2D  
1B 30  
1B 31  
1B 32  
1B 33  
1B 34  
1B 35  
1B 36  
1B 37  
1B 3A  
1B 3C  
1B 3D  
1B 41  
1B 42  
1B 43  
1B 44  
1B 45  
1B 46  
1B 47  
1B 48  
1B 49  
1B 4A  
1B 4B  
1B 4C  
1B 4E  
1B 4F  
1B 50  
1B 51  
Cancel  
Turn Automatic Sheet Feeder On or Off  
Auto Underscore  
ESC 0  
ESC 1  
ESC 2  
ESC 3  
ESC 4  
ESC 5  
ESC 6  
ESC 7  
ESC :  
Set 1/8 Inch Line Spacing  
Set 7/72 Inch Vertical Spacing  
Invoke Text Line Spacing  
Set Graphics Line Spacing  
Set Top of Form  
Set Auto Line Feed  
Select PC Character Set 2  
Select PC Character Set 1  
Set 12 CPI  
ESC <  
ESC =  
ESC A  
ESC B  
ESC C  
ESC D  
ESC E  
ESC F  
ESC G  
ESC H  
ESC I  
Unidirectional Printing  
Character Font Image Download  
Select n/72 Inch Spacing  
Set Vertical Tabs  
Set Page Length (Lines or Inches)  
Set Horizontal Tabs  
Begin Emphasized Print  
End Emphasized Print  
Begin Double-Strike Print  
End Double-Strike Print  
Change Font  
ESC J  
ESC K  
ESC L  
ESC N  
ESC O  
ESC P  
ESC Q  
Relative Move Baseline  
Normal Density Bit Image Graphics  
Dual Density Bit Image Graphics, Type 1  
Begin Skip Perforation  
End Skip Perforation  
Proportional Space Mode  
Deselect on Positive Query Reply  
192 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Control  
Hex  
Name  
ESC R  
1B 52  
Set Default Tabs  
ESC S  
1B 53  
Begin Subscript/Superscript  
End Subscript/Superscript  
Set Print Direction  
ESC T  
1B 54  
ESC U  
1B 55  
ESC W  
1B 57  
Double-Wide Continuous Mode  
Set Horizontal Margins  
Dual Density Bit Image Graphics Type 2  
High Density Bit Image Graphics  
Print All Characters  
ESC X  
1B 58  
ESC Y  
1B 59  
ESC Z  
1B 5A  
ESC \  
1B 5C  
1B 5D  
1B 5E  
ESC ]  
Reverse Line Feed  
ESC |  
Print Single Character  
Continuous Overscore  
Relative Move Right  
ESC _  
1B 5F  
ESC d  
1B 64  
ESC e  
1B 65  
Relative Move Left  
ESC [ - (See note)  
ESC [ @  
ESC [ I (See note)  
ESC [ K  
1B 5B 2D  
1B 5B 40  
1B 5B 49  
1B 5B 4B  
1B 5B 54  
1B 5B 64  
Select Line Scoring  
Set Presentation Highlights (SPH)  
Set Font Global (SFG)  
Set Initial Conditions (SIC)  
Select Code Page (SCP)  
Set Print Quality (SPQ)  
ESC [ T (See note)  
ESC [ d (See note)  
Note: This command is only available in Native 4247 or 2381 emulation mode.  
Null (ESC NUL)  
1B  
00  
The printer ignores the NUL control by itself.  
Bell (ESC BEL)  
1B  
07  
This control causes the audible alarm to sound, if enabled. The alarm may be  
disabled or enabled from the Configuration menu.  
Backspace (ESC BS)  
1B  
08  
This control moves the print position horizontally one character width to the left. If  
the current print position is at the left margin, the printer ignores this command.  
Horizontal Tab (ESC HT)  
1B  
09  
Appendix D. Personal Printer Data Stream (PPDS) 193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
This control moves the print position to the next horizontal tab stop. If there are no  
tab stops to the right, or if the next tab stop is beyond the current right margin, the  
control is ignored.  
Line Feed (ESC LF)  
1B  
0A  
This control advances the paper one line. The horizontal position does not change  
unless automatic carriage return mode is activated from the operator panel  
Configuration menu. If the paper advance crosses the bottom margin, the printer  
completes all deferred printing on the current page and then does an automatic  
form feed.  
If skip perforation mode is active and the bottom margin is crossed, the vertical  
position on the new page following the automatic form feed will be the top-of-form  
position. If skip perforation is not active, the vertical position on the new page is the  
point immediately following the previous print line.  
Vertical Tab (ESC VT)  
1B  
0B  
This control causes the vertical print position to be advanced to the next vertical tab  
stop. The horizontal position is not affected unless automatic carriage return mode  
is activated from the operator panel Configuration menu. If there are no tab stops  
past the current vertical print position, Vertical Tab is treated as a Line Feed.  
Form Feed (ESC FF)  
1B  
0C  
This control causes a new page to be started. Form Feed is a line end and page  
end control; it causes all deferred printing that may have been buffered for the  
current page to be completed and the form physically advanced to eject the current  
page. The vertical print position advances to the top margin and the horizontal print  
position is set to the left margin for subsequent printing.  
Carriage Return (ESC CR)  
1B  
0D  
This control moves the current horizontal print position to the left margin. The  
vertical print position does not change unless automatic line feed mode is active  
(see “Set Auto Line Feed (ESC 5)” on page 197).  
Shift Out (ESC SO) / Double-Wide Print  
1B  
0E  
This control causes the printer to start double-width printing. Double-width printing  
prints the characters twice as wide as the current character spacing. This results in  
half as many characters per inch. Each character takes up the space of two  
single-width characters. A Carriage Return, Line Feed, Form Feed, Vertical Tab,  
194 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Double-Wide Continuous Mode, or Cancel Double-Wide Print with vertical  
movement specified cancels the Shift Out control code.  
Shift In (ESC SI) / Condensed Print  
1B  
0F  
This control prints graphic characters in condensed pitch (17.1 CPI or 20 CPI).  
Shift In is a buffer terminating control; if printable data at a different  
character-per-inch setting is buffered, that data is printed before the setting is  
changed. The current print position becomes the next printable column at the new  
character-per-inch setting. CPI can be changed within a print line, and this control  
changes the maximum number of characters that can be printed on one line.  
A combination of 10 CPI and Condensed Print sets the printer to 17.1 CPI  
regardless of the 20 CPI setting in the Power On Configuration menu.  
A combination of 12 CPI and Condensed Print sets the printer to 20 CPI when  
20 CPI=YES is set in the Power On Configuration Menu. A combination of 12 CPI  
and Condensed Print sets the printer to 12 CPI when 20 CPI=NO is set in the Power  
On Configuration menu.  
Device Control 1 (ESC DC1) / Select or XON  
1B  
11  
This control has different meanings depending upon the currently active interface.  
v Parallel interface (Select): DC1 selects the printer.  
v Serial interface (XON): DC1 is treated as a NUL if received from the host. The  
printer sends DC1 (XON) to the host to control data pacing if XON/XOFF pacing  
is selected.  
Device Control 2 (ESC DC2) / Select 10 CPI  
1B  
12  
This control sets 10 characters per inch. DC2 is a buffer terminating control; if  
printable data at a different characters-per-inch setting is buffered, that data is  
printed before the setting is changed. The current print position becomes the next  
printable column at the new character-per-inch setting. CPI can be changed within a  
print line.  
Device Control 3 (ESC DC3) / Deselect or XOFF  
1B  
13  
This control has different meanings depending upon the currently active interface.  
v Parallel interface (Deselect): DC3 is treated as a NUL.  
v Serial interface (XOFF): DC3 is treated as a NUL if received from the host. The  
printer sends DC3 (XOFF) to the host to control data pacing if XON/XOFF pacing  
is selected.  
Appendix D. Personal Printer Data Stream (PPDS) 195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Device Control 4 (ESC DC4) / Cancel Double-Wide Print  
1B  
14  
This control cancels double-wide printing if double wide was selected with the Shift  
Out control. The characters-per-inch setting returns to the previous value.  
Cancel (ESC CAN)  
1B  
18  
This control purges all data in the preceding print buffer. Any data received after  
Cancel is processed normally. Cancel does not change the current print position.  
Turn Auto Sheet Feeder On or Off (ESC EM)  
1B  
19  
NN  
This command selects or deselects the Automatic Sheet Feeder (ASF). This  
command must start and finish with a carriage return, line feed, or both; otherwise,  
it will be handled as if it were printable data.  
The following values are used for NN:  
0
1
2
3
4
Disable ASF. Ejects any form loaded from bin 1, 2, or 3, and selects Manual  
Sheet Feed paper path.  
Selects bin 1 if no forms are loaded; otherwise, the next form is loaded  
from bin 1 when data is received.  
Selects bin 2 if no forms are loaded; otherwise, the next form is loaded  
from bin 2 when data is received.  
Selects bin 3 if no forms are loaded; otherwise, the next form is loaded  
from bin 3 when data is received.  
Selects the last bin in use after the Deselect ASF command. A form will be  
loaded when data is received.  
C
R
Selects bin 1 for the first form; then selects bin 2 for all subsequent forms.  
Ejects the currently loaded cut-sheet form.  
Auto Underscore (ESC -)  
1B  
2D  
NN  
This control turns on and off the continuous underscore function.  
If NN is 1, the printer underscores all text characters and spaces following this  
sequence. The printer does not underscore white space caused by horizontal tabs.  
If NN is 0, the printers stops the underscore of all data following this sequence.  
Set 1/8 Inch Line Spacing (ESC 0)  
1B  
30  
This control sets the line spacing to eight lines per inch.  
196 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The application program is responsible for keeping track of the vertical position on  
the current page relative to the current line spacing. Changing the line spacing  
within a print job without changing the page length can cause printing on the page  
perforation. For additional information, see “Set Page Length (ESC C)” on  
page 200.  
Set 7/72 Inch Line Spacing (ESC 1)  
1B  
31  
This control sets the line spacing to 7/72 inch.  
The application program is responsible for keeping track of the vertical position on  
the current page relative to the current line spacing. Changing the line spacing  
within a print job without changing the page length can cause printing on the page  
perforation. For additional information, see “Set Page Length (ESC C)” on  
page 200.  
Invoke Text Line Spacing (ESC 2)  
1B  
32  
This control sets the line spacing at the value set by the last Set Text Line Spacing  
(ESC A) control received. The printer sets the line spacing to six lines per inch if no  
ESC A has been issued.  
Set Graphics Line Spacing (ESC 3)  
1B  
33  
NN  
This control changes the line spacing to the value specified by NN.  
NN is a value that specifies the line spacing in units of 1/216 inch. Valid values are  
0 to 255. If N equals 0, the printer ignores this control. The printer will adjust the  
line spacing to the nearest 1/144 inch.  
The application program is responsible for keeping track of the vertical position on  
the current page relative to the current line spacing. Changing the line spacing  
within a print job without changing the page length can cause printing on the page  
perforation. For additional information, see “Set Page Length (ESC C)” on  
page 200.  
Set Top of Form (ESC 4)  
1B  
34  
This control establishes the current vertical position as the top of form.  
Set Auto Line Feed (ESC 5)  
1B  
35  
NN  
This control sets the automatic line feed mode of the printer. When automatic line  
feed is on, the printer does a line feed each time it receives a carriage return. When  
Appendix D. Personal Printer Data Stream (PPDS) 197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
automatic line feed if off, a carriage return is processed normally. This control  
overrides the automatic line feed mode set in the operator panel Configuration  
menu.  
If NN is 1, the printer turns automatic line feed mode on.  
If NN is 0, the printer turns automatic line feed mode off.  
Select PC Character Set 2 (ESC 6)  
1B  
36  
This control selects PC character set 2 as the active character set. In PC character  
set 2, code points X'03' to X'06', X'15', and X'80' to X'9F' are treated as graphic  
characters (not controls). See “Graphic and Control Character Sequences” on  
page 187.  
Select PC Character Set 1 (ESC 7)  
1B  
37  
This control selects PC character set 1. In PC character set 1, code points X'03' to  
X'06', X'15', and X'80' to X'9F' are treated as controls (not printable graphics). See  
“Graphic and Control Character Sequences” on page 187.  
Set 12 CPI (ESC :)  
1B  
3A  
This control sets the pitch to 12 characters per inch. If the current font is  
proportionally spaced, this control selects a horizontal resolution of 240 dots per  
inch. If the active font is OCR, the printer does not prohibit the change in pitch;  
however, the printed OCR characters may be unreadable by automatic identification  
equipment.  
Unidirectional Printing (ESC <)  
1B  
3C  
This command selects unidirectional printing for one line only. The printhead moves  
to the home position at the left side of the printer and prints one line, left to right.  
The command is then cancelled by the carriage return that sends the printhead  
back to the home position.  
Character Font Image Download (ESC=)  
1B  
3D  
LL  
HH  
FF  
LF  
W
H
CP  
N
XX .. XX  
This control downloads special character images.  
A two-byte count (LL HH) indicates the number of bytes that follow in this control.  
LL is the least significant byte of the count; HH is the most significant byte of the  
count. The number of bytes that follows should equal HH × 256 + LL. If the count  
equals X'0000', the control is ignored.  
198 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FF is the format byte and must equal X'13'.  
LF is a one-byte font identifier that specifies the previously initialized or selected  
font to be modified. See “Change Font (ESC I)” on page 201.  
W is a one-byte value that specifies the width of the character cells in options. For  
DP fonts, the value is X'0A'. For fixed pitch DP Text and NLQ fonts, the value is  
X'14'. For DP Text and NLQ, proportional fonts values may vary. However, for all  
code points downloaded with this control, all character cells defined will be Width  
options wide.  
H is a one-byte value that specifies the height of the character cells in dots. Valid  
values are X'09' for DP and DP Text and X'12' for NLQ.  
CP is a one-byte value. This parameter specifies the first code point to download. A  
single code point or multiple code points can be downloaded. If the font being  
downloaded was previously initialized, the downloaded characters overlay the  
resident characters in the font.  
N is a one-byte value that specifies the number of code points defined by this  
control. If the starting code point plus the number of code points is greater than  
256, the control is ignored.  
XX .. XX is the font image download data. These data bytes define the character  
cells. Multiple bytes define each vertical slice of the character cell. The slice data  
for each code point is in a contiguous format (run-together) as follows:  
v If the slice data is nine-bits high, byte 1 is put into the high-order bits in slice 1  
and the high-order bit of byte 2 is the low order bit of slice 1. The remaining  
seven bits of byte 2 are put into the high-order seven bits of slice 2, and so on.  
v If the slice data is 18-bits high, bytes 1 and 2 are put into the high-order bits of  
the first slice and the two high-order bits of byte 3 complete the first slice. Slice 2  
is composed similarly, starting with the remaining six bits in byte 3.  
Note: The contiguous format (run-together) does not occur from one code point to  
the next. The top dot of the leftmost slice of each code point is always in the  
high-order bit of the first byte of image data for that code point.  
The number of data bytes required to define the image for each code point can be  
calculated as follows:  
Image Length = (Width × Height) ÷ 8  
Note: If there is a remainder from the division by 8, add 1 to the quotient.  
Example: To define an image for a standard DP font where Width = 10 and Height  
= 9:  
Image Length = (10 × 9) ÷ 8  
Image Length = 11 with a remainder of 2  
Image Length = 12 bytes per character  
If both printer provided images and downloaded images are to be printed from the  
same local font ID, IBM recommends that the downloaded images be sent, using  
this control, at the start of a print job when the print environment for the job is  
established. This ensures that the actual printed output appears as intended.  
Appendix D. Personal Printer Data Stream (PPDS) 199  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
It also is recommended that image data bits for the last vertical column of NLQ  
character patterns be all zeros. The last vertical column will be clipped if NLQ  
character patterns are expanded for graphics printing. Resident NLQ text character  
patterns do not contain image data (dots) in the last column of the character box.  
Select n/72 Inch Line Spacing (ESC A)  
1B  
41  
NN  
This control stores the line spacing value, in units of 1/72 inch, which is later  
selected by Invoke Text Line Spacing (ESC 2). The valid values for NN are X'01' to  
X'FF' (1 to 255). The default line spacing is X'0C' (six lines per inch).  
A value of 0 is not valid and causes the printer to ignore this command. Following  
are example values for NN:  
X'00' No Change  
X'18' 3 LPI  
X'12' 4 LPI  
X'0C' 6 LPI  
X'09' 8 LPI  
X'08' 9 LPI  
X'06' 12 LPI  
Set Vertical Tabs (ESC B)  
1B  
42  
TT .. TT  
00  
This control sets the vertical tab stops. The maximum number of tab stops  
supported is 64. The Null control code terminates this sequence. If the Null  
terminator is missing, the printer treats the next 64 bytes as tab stops and ignores  
all the data bytes following these 64 bytes until a Null is received. If the printer  
receives this sequence without any tabs specified, all tab stops are cleared.  
TT ...TT are the tab values that specify the tab stops as line numbers, relative to  
the top of the physical page. Tab stops must be specified in ascending order;  
entries not in ascending order are ignored.  
Set Page Length (ESC C)  
1B  
43  
LL  
IN  
This control sets the physical page length in lines or inches and resets skip  
perforation mode.  
LL is a one-byte hexadecimal number that specifies the page length in lines. The  
value is converted to inches based upon the current line spacing. Valid values for  
LL are X'01' to X'FF', but the resulting page length in inches must be less than  
113.8 inches (2890 mm). If LL equals 0, then parameter II (length is inches) is used.  
200 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IN is a one-byte hexadecimal number that specifies the page length in inches. IN is  
present only if parameter LL equals 0. Valid values for IN are X'01' to X'71'. If IN is  
greater than the maximum value, the maximum value is used. If both LL and IN are  
zero, the control is ignored.  
Set Horizontal Tabs (ESC D)  
1B  
44  
TT .. TT  
00  
This control sets the horizontal tab stops. The maximum number of tab stops  
supported is 28. The sequence terminates with the NUL control code. If the null  
terminator is missing, the printer treats the next 28 bytes as tab stops and ignores  
all the data bytes following the 28 bytes until a Null is received. If the printer  
receives this control code with no tabs, all horizontal tab stops are cleared.  
TT is the list of tab stops as character positions relative to the left edge of the  
physical page. Valid values are X'01' to X'FF'. Tab stops must be specified in  
ascending order. Entries not in ascending order are ignored.  
Begin Emphasized Print (ESC E)  
1B  
45  
This control starts emphasized print mode (bold style). Emphasized printing  
continues until the printer receives an End Emphasized Print (ESC F) control or the  
printer is initialized.  
End Emphasized Print (ESC F)  
1B  
46  
This control ends emphasized print mode (bold style).  
Begin Double-Strike Print (ESC G)  
1B  
47  
This control starts double-strike printing (all text characters are double struck).  
Double-strike printing continues until the printer receives an End Double-Strike Print  
control (ESC H) or the printer is initialized.  
End Double-Strike Print (ESC H)  
1B  
48  
This control ends double-strike printing.  
Change Font (ESC I)  
1B  
49  
NN  
This control selects the font to be used for printing.  
NN is the one-byte local font identifier number that specifies the font. The mapping  
of the local font identifier is dependent upon the printer’s emulation mode setting. In  
Appendix D. Personal Printer Data Stream (PPDS) 201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
the Power On Configuration menu, if the emulation mode is set to 4202 III XL, the  
Change Font control code selects fonts compatible with the 4202 Proprinter III XL. If  
the emulation mode is set to 2381 or Native 4247, Change Font selects the fonts  
compatible with the 2381 Personal Printer.  
Supported local font identifiers are shown in the following table.  
Local Font  
Identifier  
(Hex)  
Native 4247 and 2381 Emulation  
Mode  
4202 III XL  
00  
Default (op. panel selection)  
DP  
01  
DP  
DP  
02  
DP Text  
DP Text  
03  
NLQ (Courier/Gothic)  
DP Text Proportional  
NLQ Proportional (Courier/Gothic)  
DP  
NLQ (Courier/Gothic)  
DP (Download)  
DP (Download)  
DP Text (Download)  
NLQ (Download)  
Reserved  
04  
05  
06  
07  
Reserved  
08-0F  
10  
Reserved  
OCR-A  
Reserved  
11  
OCR-B  
Reserved  
12-5F  
60  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Default (operator panel selection)  
DP (Gothic)  
61  
Reserved  
62  
Reserved  
NLQ Proportional (Courier/Gothic)  
OCR-A  
63  
Reserved  
64  
Reserved  
OCR-B  
65  
Reserved  
DP  
66-FF  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Notes:  
1. If a downloaded font has not been previously downloaded with a Character Font  
Image Download control (CFID), a Change Font control to select a downloaded  
font is ignored.  
2. The NLQ font style is selected as defined in the Power On Configuration menu:  
NLQ=GOTHIC or NLQ=COURIER.  
Relative Move Baseline (ESC J)  
1B  
4A  
NN  
This control performs a vertical move relative to the current print position.  
NN is a one-byte hexadecimal value that specifies the move amount in units of  
1/216 inch. The printer will adjust the value to the nearest 1/144 inch. If Automatic  
Carriage Return on Line Feed is set in the operator panel Power On Configuration  
menu, a carriage return also is performed when a Relative Move Baseline code is  
received (see “Carriage Return (CR)” on page 190).  
202 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Normal Density Bit Image Graphics (ESC K)  
1B  
4B  
LL  
HH  
NN .. NN  
This control prints the supplied bit image data at 60 horizontal pel by 72 vertical pel.  
Bit image data can be mixed with text data on the same line.  
A two-byte count (LL HH) indicates the number of bytes that follow in this control.  
LL is the least significant byte of the count; HH is the most significant byte. (The  
number of bytes that follows should equal HH × 256 + LL.) If the count equals  
X'0000', the control is ignored.  
NN .. NN are the bytes containing the bit image data. The data format is in 8-bit  
vertical slices, with the least significant bit the bottom dot and the most significant  
bit the top dot. B'1' indicates a pel to be printed; B'0' indicates an unprinted pel.  
Data that exceeds the right margin is discarded.  
Dual Density Bit Image Graphics Type 1 (ESC L)  
1B  
4C  
LL  
HH  
NN .. NN  
This control prints the supplied bit image data at 120 horizontal by 72 vertical pel.  
Bit image data can be mixed with text data on the same line.  
A two-byte count (LL HH) indicates the number of bytes that follow in this control.  
LL is the least significant byte of the count; HH is the most significant byte. (The  
number of bytes that follows should equal HH × 256 + LL.) If the count equals  
X'0000', the control is ignored.  
NN .. NN are the bytes containing the bit image data. The data format is in 8-bit  
vertical slices, with the least significant bit the bottom dot and the most significant  
bit the top dot. B'1' indicates a pel to be printed; B'0' indicates an unprinted pel.  
Data that exceeds the right margin is discarded.  
Begin Skip Perforation (ESC N)  
1B  
4E  
NN  
This control sets the number of lines to be skipped at the bottom of each page.  
Once this function is activated, it stays active until the End Skip Perforation (ESC  
O) or Set Page Length (ESC C) control is received or the printer is initialized.  
NN is a one-byte hexadecimal value that specifies the number of lines to skip at the  
bottom of each page. This value must be zero or greater and less than the length of  
the page in lines (from 0 to 255). Once Begin Skip Perforation is activated, the  
number of lines that may be printed on a page is the page length minus NN.  
End Skip Perforation (ESC O)  
1B  
4F  
This control ends skip perforation.  
Appendix D. Personal Printer Data Stream (PPDS) 203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Proportional Space Mode (ESC P)  
1B  
50  
NN  
This control starts or stops proportional space mode.  
NN is a one-byte hexadecimal value that sets proportional space mode on or off.  
v If NN is 1, proportional space mode is on  
v If NN is 0, proportional space mode is off  
Note: Code pages OCR-A (code page 876), OCR-B (code page 877), Arabic (code  
page 864), Cyrillic (code page 855), Thai (code page 874), Extended Arabic  
(code page 1046), and Farsi Bilingual (code page 1098) are not supported in  
proportional space mode.  
Deselect on Positive Query Reply (ESC Q)  
1B  
51  
NN  
This control operates differently depending upon the interface in use.  
v Parallel interface: The printer is deselected if the response to the query is  
positive.  
v Serial interface: The printer transmits the printer ID back to the host if the  
response to the query is positive.  
NN is the query printer identifier. If the value matches the printer’s ID, the query  
response is positive and the printer deactivates the Select line (parallel interface) or  
echoes back to the ID (serial interface). If the query is not positive, the control is  
ignored. For the parallel interface, the printer must be reselected using a DC1  
control after a positive response to ESC Q if the printer is to be used.  
Query Identifiers: If the emulation mode is set to 4202 III XL, the printer ID is  
X'16'. If the emulation mode is set to Native 4247 or 2381, the printer ID is X'B8'.  
Set Default Tabs (ESC R)  
1B  
52  
This control resets both the horizontal and vertical tab stops. The horizontal tab  
stops are set to every eighth position starting with the ninth column (9, 17, 25,...).  
The vertical tab stops are cleared.  
Begin Subscript / Superscript Mode (ESC S)  
1B  
53  
NN  
This control activates subscript and superscript printing. Once this printing is active,  
it stays active until another Begin Subscript/Superscript Mode control changes the  
mode, an End Subscript/Superscript Mode control is received, or the printer is  
initialized.  
NN is a one-byte hexadecimal value that activates subscript or superscript printing.  
v If NN is 1, subscript mode is active.  
v If NN is 0, superscript mode is active.  
204 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
End Subscript/Superscript Mode (ESC T)  
1B  
54  
This controls stops subscript and superscript printing.  
Set Print Direction (ESC U)  
1B  
55  
NN  
This control specifies bidirectional or unidirectional printing.  
v If NN is 1, unidirectional printing is selected.  
v If NN is 0, bidirectional printing (default) is selected.  
Double-Wide Continuous Mode (ESC W)  
1B  
57  
NN  
This control turns double-wide printing on or off. When double-wide printing is on,  
the width of subsequent graphic characters is doubled (the characters per inch  
value is half of the single character value). For tabs, the font width is not doubled  
(tab distance is based upon single character width).  
NN is a one-byte hexadecimal value that turns double-wide printing on or off.  
v If NN is 1, double-wide printing is turned on.  
v If NN is 0, double-wide printing is turned off.  
Note: Double-Wide Continuous Mode does the same function as Shift Out, except  
double wide printing is not canceled when a new line begins.  
Set Horizontal Margins (ESC X)  
1B  
58  
LL  
RR  
This control sets the left and right margins. The margins are specified in character  
positions relative to the left edge of the physical page.  
LL is a one-byte hexadecimal value from X'00' to X'FF', which specifies the starting  
print position relative to the left edge of the physical page. If LL equals 0, the left  
margin is unchanged.  
RR is a one-byte hexadecimal number from X'00' to X'FF' that specifies the  
rightmost print position relative to the left edge of the physical page. If RR equals 0,  
the right margin is unchanged.  
Notes:  
1. Set Horizontal Margins should be followed by a carriage return (CR) control to  
set the print position to the new left margin.  
2. LL should be at least one character width less than the page width.  
3. If RR is greater than the page width or is less than LL, RR is set to the page  
width (MPP).  
Appendix D. Personal Printer Data Stream (PPDS) 205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Dual Density Bit Image Graphics Type 2 (ESC Y)  
1B  
59  
LL  
HH  
NN .. NN  
This control prints the supplied bit image data at 120 horizontal pel by 72 vertical  
pel. Bit image data can be mixed with text data on the same line. Horizontally  
adjacent dots are not allowed and will be removed if specified.  
A two-byte count (LL HH) indicates the number of bytes that follow in this control.  
LL is the least significant byte of the count; HH is the most significant byte. (The  
number of bytes that follows should equal HH × 256 + LL.) If the count equals  
X'0000', the control is ignored.  
NN .. NN are the bytes containing the bit image data. The data format is in 8-bit  
vertical slices, with the least significant bit the bottom dot and the most significant  
bit the top dot. B'1' indicates a pel to be printed; B'0' indicates an unprinted pel.  
Data that exceeds the right margin is discarded.  
High Density Bit Image Graphics (ESC Z)  
1B  
5A  
LL  
HH  
NN .. NN  
This control prints the supplied bit image data at 240 horizontal per by 72 vertical  
pel. Bit image data can be mixed with text data on the same line.  
A two-byte count (LL HH) indicates the number of bytes that follow in this control.  
LL is the least significant byte of the count; HH is the most significant byte. (The  
number of bytes that follows should equal HH × 256 + LL.) If the count equals  
X'0000', the control is ignored.  
NN .. NN are the bytes containing the bit image data. The data format is in 8-bit  
vertical slices, with the least significant bit the bottom dot and the most significant  
bit the top dot. B'1' indicates a pel to be printed; B'0' indicates an unprinted pel.  
Data that exceeds the right margin is discarded.  
Print All Characters (ESC \)  
1B  
5C  
LL  
HH  
This control forces a specified number of characters to be interpreted as graphic  
characters, including those that occur in the space normally reserved for controls.  
A two-byte count (LL HH) indicates the number of bytes to be interpreted as  
printable graphics. LL is the least significant byte of the count; HH is the most  
significant byte. (The number of bytes that follows should equal HH × 256 + LL.) If  
the count equals X'0000', the control is ignored.  
Reverse Line Feed (ESC ])  
1B  
5D  
This command causes the contents of the buffer to be printed and advances the  
paper one line in the reverse direction from the paper path.  
206 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Note: If AUTO CR=YES is set in the Power On Configuration menu, the next print  
position is print position 1 at the left margin. If AUTO CR=NO, the next print  
position is the current print position.  
Print Single Character (ESC |)  
1B  
5E  
This control specifies that the next character to follow is to be interpreted as a  
graphic character, including those characters that occur in the space normally  
reserved for controls.  
Continuous Overscore (ESC _)  
1B  
5F  
NN  
This control turns on and off the continuous overscore function. All graphic  
characters and spaces that are bounded by start and stop versions of this control  
are overscored. White space caused by horizontal tabs is not overscored.  
NN is a one-byte hexadecimal value that turns overscore on or off.  
v If NN is 1, continuous overscore is on.  
v If NN is 0, continuous overscore is off.  
Relative Move Right (ESC d)  
1B  
65  
N1  
N2  
This command moves the print position to the right (from the current position) in  
increments of 1/120 of an inch.  
Bytes N1 and N2 indicate the move distance based on the following:  
(N1 + [N2 x 256])/120.  
Relative Move Left (ESC e)  
1B  
64  
N1  
N2  
This command moves the print position to the left (from the current position) in  
increments of 1/120 of an inch.  
Bytes N1 and N2 indicate the move distance based on the following:  
(N1 + [(N2 x 256])/120.  
Select Line Scoring (ESC [ -)  
1B  
5B  
2D  
02  
00  
N1  
N2  
This command selects underscore, strikethrough, and overscore. This command is  
supported in Native 4247 and 2381 emulation modes only.  
The values for N1 are:  
X'01' Underscore  
Appendix D. Personal Printer Data Stream (PPDS) 207  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
X'02' Strikethrough  
X'03' Overscore  
The values for N2 are:  
X'00' Cancel  
X'01' Single Line  
X'02' Double Line  
Set Presentation Highlight (SPH) (ESC [ @)  
1B  
5B  
40  
LL  
HH  
M1  
M2  
M3  
M4  
SPH activates or deactivates double wide, double high, and italic printing. This  
command is supported in Native 4247, 4202 III XL, and 2381 emulation with some  
exceptions, as noted.  
Once these highlights are active, they remain active until terminated, either by  
another SPH command or an initialization. If double wide printing is activated by an  
SPH, a DC4 control also can cancel it.  
A two-byte count (LL HH) indicates the number of bytes that follow in this control.  
LL is X'00' to X'04'. HH is always X'00'. If the count equals X'0000', the control is  
ignored.  
M1 .. M4 turn double wide, double high, or italics on or off.  
M1 is a one-byte hexadecimal value that turns italics on or off as follows:  
X'00' No change  
X'01' Italics on (2381 and 4247 only)  
X'02' Italics off (2381 and 4247 only)  
M2 is always X'00'.  
M3 is a one-byte hexadecimal that controls line feeds and character height (vertical  
spacing) as follows:  
X'00' No change to line feed, no change to character height  
X'01' Line feeds unchanged, standard character height  
X'02' Line feeds unchanged, double character height  
X'10' Single line feeds, character height unchanged (4202 only)  
X'11' Single line feeds, standard character height  
X'12' Single line feeds, double character height  
X'20' Double line feeds, character height unchanged (4202 only)  
X'21' Double line feeds, standard character height  
X'22' Double line feeds, double character height  
M4 is a one-byte hexadecimal value that turns double wide on or off as follows:  
X'00' No Change  
208 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
X'01' Turn double wide off  
X'02' Turn double wide on  
X'10' Single line feeds (2381 and 4247 only)  
X'20' Double line feeds (2381 and 4247 only)  
Set Font Global (SFG) (ESC [ I)  
1B  
5B  
49  
02  
00  
HF  
LF  
This control selects font and pitch based on the values of HF and LF. (Supported in  
Native 4247 or 2381 emulation mode only.)  
HF  
00  
01  
01  
01  
01  
00  
00  
01  
01  
01  
01  
00  
LF  
0B  
EB  
EC  
ED  
EE  
AB  
24  
Font and Pitch  
Courier 10  
Courier 12  
Courier 15  
Courier 17  
Courier 20  
Courier Proportional  
Gothic 10  
8F  
8E  
8D  
8C  
AE  
Gothic 12  
Gothic 15  
Gothic 17  
Gothic 20  
Gothic Proportional  
Set Initial Conditions (SIC) (ESC [ K)  
1B  
5B  
4B  
LL  
HH  
INIT  
ID  
P1  
P2  
This control initializes the printer.  
A two-byte count (LL HH) indicates the number of bytes that follow in this control.  
LL is the least significant byte of the count; HH is the most significant byte. (HH is  
always X'00' for this command.) The number of bytes is counted from the INIT byte.  
The INIT byte is processed the same way in Native 4247, 4202 III XL, or 2381  
emulation mode, but causes different results in the P1 and P2 parameters,  
depending on the ID byte. The values for the INIT byte are:  
INIT  
Mode Byte  
X'00'  
Initializes printer to user-defined settings; downloaded fonts  
are not initialized.  
X'01'  
X'04'  
X'05'  
Initializes printer to user-defined settings; downloaded fonts  
are initialized.  
Initializes printer to factory settings; downloaded fonts are  
not initialized.  
Initializes printer to factory settings; downloaded fonts are  
initialized.  
Appendix D. Personal Printer Data Stream (PPDS) 209  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
X'FE'  
X'FF'  
Initializes printer to user-defined settings; downloaded fonts  
are initialized. Settings are saved in non-volatile memory  
(NVM).  
Initializes printer to factory settings; downloaded fonts are  
initialized. Settings are saved in non-volatile memory  
(NVM).  
ID  
Printer ID Byte:  
X'B6'  
For Native 4247 or 2381 emulation  
X'03' or X'16' For 4202 III XL emulation  
P1  
Parameter Byte for Native 4247 or 2381 Emulation  
X'00'  
X'01'  
X'02'  
No emulation change  
Switch to 2381 emulation  
Switch to Epson FX printer emulation  
X'03' to X'FF' No emulation change  
P1  
Bit  
Parameter Byte for 4202 III XL Emulation  
On  
Off  
7 Discard Byte  
6 Reserved  
5 Alarm  
Ignore  
Process  
Disable  
Enable  
4 Auto CR  
3 Auto LF  
CR on Vertical Movement  
Auto LF after CR  
12 inch forms  
No CR on Vertical Movement  
No Auto LF after CR  
11 inch forms  
2 Form Length  
1 Zero  
Slashed Zero  
Normal Zero  
0 Character Set  
PC Char Set 2  
PC Char Set 1  
P2  
Bit  
Parameter Byte for 4202 III XL Emulation  
On  
Off  
7 Discard Byte  
6 Print Language  
5 Direction  
Ignore  
Process  
CP 850 Multilingual  
Unidirectional  
12+Condense = 12 CPI  
NLQ Gothic  
CP 437 ASCII  
Bidirectional  
12+Condense = 20 CPI  
NLQ Courier  
Honor all FF  
13.6 inch line  
Disable  
4 20 Condense  
3 Select NLQ  
2 Form Feed  
1 Line Length  
0 Sheet Feeder  
Ignore FF if at TOF  
8 inch line  
Enable  
Note: The following parameters are NOT modified by the INIT control byte.  
Power On Configuration Menu:  
v Pull  
v Jam Sensors  
v Parallel Interface:  
– Interface Types, Select-In Signal, Data Bits, Buffer Size, and Emulation  
210 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v Serial Interface:  
– Interface Types, Baud Rate, Data Bits, Parity, Pacing, Connection Type, Buffer  
Size, and Emulation  
v Functions:  
– Front Tear, Rear Tear, Paper Overlay, Sequence, Automatic Load, and Display  
Language  
v Bidi Adjust  
Program Configuration Menu:  
v Tear Position Adjustment:  
– Front Path, Rear Path  
v Paper Path(s) Setup  
– 1 Form per Path, One Form Only  
v Perforation Safety  
v Adjustments:  
– AFTA, Horizontal, Vertical  
v Form Setting:  
– Line Spacing Lock, Top of Form, Perforation Skipping, and Pitch Lock  
Select Code Page (SCP) (ESC [ T)  
1B  
5B  
54  
04  
00  
00  
00  
HC  
LC  
This control selects a code page for printing where HC and LC specify the code  
page in hexadecimal. (Supported in 4247 or 2381 emulation mode only.)  
The following table shows the values for HC and LC:  
HC  
01  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
LC  
B5  
2D  
33  
52  
53  
54  
55  
57  
59  
5C  
5D  
5E  
5F  
60  
61  
62  
65  
Character Set  
CP437 USA (Personal Computer)  
CP813 Greek/Latin (ISO 8859-7)  
CP819 Latin 1 (ISO 8859-1)  
CP850 Multilingual  
CP851 Old Greek  
CP852 Latin/2 Roece  
CP853 Turkish  
CP855 Cyrillic  
CP857 Turkish  
CP860 Portuguese  
CP861 Icelandic  
CP862 Hebrew  
CP863 Canadian French  
CP864 Arabic  
CP865 Danish/Norwegian  
CP866 Cyrillic 2 (Personal Computer)  
CP869 New Greek  
Appendix D. Personal Printer Data Stream (PPDS) 211  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
HC  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
04  
04  
04  
04  
04  
04  
04  
LC  
6A  
6C  
6D  
90  
91  
92  
93  
94  
98  
99  
9A  
EE  
16  
41  
4A  
5C  
5D  
5E  
E3  
Character Set  
CP874 Thai  
CP876 OCR-A  
CP877 OCR-B  
CP912 Latin 2 (ISO 8859-2)  
CP913 Latin 3 (ISO 8859-3)  
CP914 Latin 4 (ISO 8859-4)  
CP915 Cyrillic (ISO 8859-5)  
CP916 Latin 8 (ISO 8859-8)  
CP920 Latin 5 (ISO 8859-9)  
CP921 Baltic Multilingual  
CP922 Estonian  
CP1006 Urdu  
CP1046 Arabic Extended  
CP1089 Latin 6 (ISO 8859-6)  
CP1098 Farsi (Personal Computer)  
CP1116 Estonian (Personal Computer)  
CP1117 Latvian (Personal Computer)  
CP1118 Lithuanian (Personal Computer)  
CP1251 Cyrillic Windows  
Note: The following languages are all supported within code page 850  
(PC Multilingual):  
Austrian/German  
Italian  
Austrian/German (alternate) Japanese English  
Belgian  
Spanish/Spanish speaking  
Brazilian  
Spanish (Spain-alternate)  
English (United Kingdom)  
Finnish/Swedish  
Finnish/Swedish (alternate) English (U.S.A./Canada)  
French/French Azerty  
Yugoslav  
Set Print Quality (SPQ) (ESC [ d)  
1B  
5B  
64  
01  
00  
QQ  
This control allows the host application to specify the desired print quality when the  
printer is in Native 4247 mode or emulating the IBM 2381 Personal Printer. The  
setting remains in effect until changed by another Set Print Quality control or until  
the printer is initialized. Bit image graphics (ESC K, L, Y, and Z) are not affected.  
Highlighting modes, such as italics, emphasized, and double wide remain active if  
they were active when the SPQ control was activated.  
QQ specifies the quality of subsequent printing. Valid values are X'00' to X'FE' as  
follows:  
212 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Hex  
Function  
X'00'  
No change (Default)  
X'01 - 3F'  
X'40 - 7F'  
X'80 - FE'  
X'FF'  
Low quality level (highest speed)  
Medium quality level (medium speed)  
High quality level (lowest speed)  
Printer Initialization (Default)  
Buffer Terminating Conditions  
The following controls cause buffered data to be released for printing:  
v Carriage Return  
v Line Feed  
v Reverse Line Feed  
v Form Feed  
v Horizontal Tab (if there is printhead movement)  
v Vertical Tab  
v Backspace  
v Set 1/8 Inch Line Spacing  
v Set 7/72 Inch Line Spacing  
v Set Graphics Line Spacing  
v Select n/72 Inch Line Spacing  
v Invoke Text Line Spacing (if the line spacing is changed)  
v Relative Move Right  
v Relative Move Left  
v Relative Move Baseline  
v Shift In/Condensed Print  
v Shift Out/Double-Wide Print  
v Device Control 4/Cancel Double-Wide Print  
v Begin Subscript/Superscript  
v End Subscript/Superscript  
v Begin Double-Strike Print  
v End Double-Strike Print  
v Begin Emphasized Print  
v End Emphasized Print  
v Set Presentation Highlight  
v Continuous Overscore  
v Auto Underscore  
v Device Control 2/Select 10 CPI  
v Set 12 CPI  
v Proportional Space Mode  
v Change Font  
v Normal Density Bit Image Graphics  
v Dual Density Bit Image Graphics Type 1  
v Dual Density Bit Image Graphics Type 2  
v High Density Bit Image Graphics  
Appendix D. Personal Printer Data Stream (PPDS) 213  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v Set Initial Conditions  
v Select Score Line (2381 and 4247 only)  
v Unidirectional Printing  
v Set Horizontal Margins  
The following conditions also cause buffered data to be released for printing:  
v Serial BREAK or parallel -INIT  
v Automatic Line Wrap  
An automatic line wrap consists of a carriage return and line feed inserted after  
the maximum number of characters has been printed on a line. The next  
character is then printed at the left margin on the following line. Automatic line  
wrap occurs for text data but not for bit image graphics.  
214 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix E. Epson FX-1050 Data Stream  
About This Appendix  
Print Job Processing  
Page Printing Concept.  
Page Presentation .  
One-Byte Controls .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 217  
. 217  
. 217  
. 218  
. 219  
. 220  
. 220  
. 220  
. 220  
. 220  
. 221  
. 221  
. 221  
. 221  
. 221  
. 222  
. 222  
. 222  
. 222  
. 222  
. 222  
. 223  
. 223  
. 225  
. 225  
. 225  
. 225  
. 225  
. 225  
. 226  
. 226  
. 226  
. 226  
. 226  
. 227  
. 227  
. 227  
. 227  
. 227  
. 227  
. 228  
. 228  
. 228  
. 229  
. 229  
. 229  
. 230  
. 230  
. 230  
. 230  
. 231  
. 231  
. 231  
.
.
.
.
.
Null (NUL) .  
Bell (BEL) .  
.
.
.
.
Backspace (BS) .  
Horizontal Tab (HT) .  
Line Feed (LF)  
.
.
.
.
Vertical Tab (VT) .  
Form Feed (FF) .  
Carriage Return (CR) .  
Shift Out (SO) / Double-Wide Print .  
Shift In (SI) / Condensed Print .  
Device Control 1 (DC1) / Select or XON .  
Device Control 2 (DC2) / Cancel Condensed Print  
Device Control 3 (DC3) / Deselect or XOFF .  
Device Control 4 (DC4) / Cancel Double-Wide Print .  
.
.
.
.
Cancel (CAN) .  
Space (SP) .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Delete Character (DEL) .  
Escape Sequence Controls .  
Escape (ESC) .  
Null (ESC NUL) .  
Bell (ESC BEL)  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Backspace (ESC BS) .  
Horizontal Tab (HT) .  
Line Feed (ESC LF)  
Vertical Tab (ESC VT) .  
Form Feed (ESC FF) .  
Carriage Return (ESC CR) .  
Shift Out (ESC SO) / Double-Wide Print .  
Shift In (ESC SI) / Condensed Print .  
Device Control 1 (ESC DC1) / Select or XON .  
Device Control 2 (ESC DC2) / Cancel Condensed Print  
Device Control 3 (ESC DC3) / Deselect or XOFF .  
Device Control 4 (ESC DC4) / Cancel Double-Wide Print .  
Cancel (ESC CAN) .  
Turn Auto Sheet Feeder On or Off (ESC EM) .  
Set Intercharacter Spacing (ESC SP) .  
Master Select (ESC !) .  
Cancel MSB Control (ESC #) .  
Set Absolute Print Position (ESC $) .  
Select User-Defined Set (ESC %)  
Define User-Defined Characters (ESC &) .  
Select Graphics Mode (ESC *).  
Auto Underscore (ESC –)  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Select Vertical Tab Channel (ESC /) .  
Set 1/8 Inch Line Spacing (ESC 0) .  
Set 7/72 Inch Line Spacing (ESC 1).  
Set 1/6 Inch Line Spacing (ESC 2) .  
Set n/216 Inch Line Spacing (ESC 3) .  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1995, 1998  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
215  
 
Select Italic Mode (ESC 4) .  
Cancel Italic Mode (ESC 5) .  
Printable Code Area Expansion (ESC 6) .  
Cancel Printable Code Area Expansion (ESC 7) .  
Copy ROM into Ram (ESC : NUL) .  
Select Unidirectional Mode (one line only) (ESC <) .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 231  
. 231  
. 231  
. 232  
. 232  
. 232  
. 232  
. 232  
. 232  
. 233  
. 233  
. 233  
. 233  
. 234  
. 234  
. 234  
. 234  
. 234  
. 235  
. 235  
. 235  
. 235  
. 236  
. 236  
. 236  
. 236  
. 236  
. 236  
. 237  
. 237  
. 237  
. 237  
. 238  
. 238  
. 238  
. 239  
. 239  
. 239  
. 239  
. 240  
. 240  
. 240  
. 240  
. 240  
. 240  
. 241  
. 241  
. 241  
. 241  
.
.
.
.
.
Set MSB to 0 (ESC =) .  
Set MSB to 1 (ESC >) .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Reassign Graphics Mode (ESC ?)  
Initialize Printer (ESC @). .  
.
.
Select n/72 Inch Line Spacing (ESC A)  
Set Vertical Tabs (ESC B)  
Set Page Length (ESC C)  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Set Horizontal Tabs (ESC D)  
Begin Emphasized Print (ESC E) .  
End Emphasized Print (ESC F)  
Begin Double-Strike Print (ESC G) .  
End Double-Strike Print (ESC H) .  
Printable Code Area Expansion (ESC I)  
Perform n/216 Inch Line Feed (ESC J).  
.
.
Select Single Density Graphics Mode (ESC K) .  
Select Double Density Graphics Mode (ESC L)  
Select 12 CPI (ESC M)  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Begin Skip Perforation (ESC N) .  
End Skip Perforation (ESC O) .  
Select 10 CPI (ESC P)  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Select Right Margin (ESC Q) .  
Select Character Set (ESC R) .  
Begin Subscript/Superscript Mode (ESC S) .  
End Subscript/Superscript Mode (ESC T) .  
Set Print Direction (ESC U) .  
Double-Wide Continuous Mode (ESC W) .  
Dual Density Bit Image Graphics Type 2 (ESC Y) .  
High Density Bit Image Graphics (ESC Z)  
Set Relative Position (ESC \) .  
Set Letter Quality Justification (ESC a).  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Select Vertical Tabs in Channels (ESC b) .  
Move Right n/120 (ESC d) .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Move Left n/120 (ESC e) .  
Set 15 CPI (ESC g).  
.
.
.
.
Feed Paper n/216 Reverse (ESC j) .  
Select NLQ Font (ESC k).  
Set Left Margin (ESC l)  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Turn Proportional Mode On/Off (ESC p) .  
Quiet Printing (ESC s) .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Select Character Table (ESC t)  
Double High Printing (ESC w) .  
Select NLQ or DP Print Quality (ESC x) .  
Buffer Terminating Conditions . .  
.
.
.
.
216 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Unsupported Command Processing .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 243  
About This Appendix  
If you are using the Epson FX-1050 data stream commands, you use the  
commands in this appendix, as well as those in Appendix C. Native 4247  
Commands.  
When the 4247 Printer is in Epson emulation mode, the printer can print files coded  
for the Epson FX-1050 printer using the Epson ESC/P printer control language. Use  
the Power On Configuration menu to select Epson FX emulation mode as the active  
printer configuration.  
Print Job Processing  
There are no Epson FX-1050 controls that explicitly define print job boundaries. A  
print job for the 4247 Printer is established by the host system and consists of any  
set of related print objects. A print job could be as short as one character or could  
be many pages long.  
Program Configuration parameter values can be changed at any time; however, to  
obtain predictable results, changes to operator panel configuration parameter values  
should be made before the print job is sent to the printer and after the previous  
print job has completed printing. Changing configuration parameter values while a  
print job is in progress may cause unpredictable results.  
IBM recommends the following to ensure that your print jobs run correctly:  
v Establish a known print environment, and end any previous print job. Start each  
print job with an Initialize Printer control. This control resets the printer  
environment to the default settings. You can then set additional controls  
depending on your print job environment.  
v End each print job with a Form Feed control. This control causes all data to be  
printed, and the current position is set to the top-of-form position.  
v If a print job is abnormally terminated, the job should be canceled. To cancel a  
print job:  
– Press Online to stop printing.  
– Stop the print job at the host computer.  
– Press Menu/Enter and then Online.  
The print buffers are cleared and the printer is in an offline not ready state. Press  
Online again to make the printer online and ready.  
Page Printing Concept  
The 4247 processes print jobs in terms of pages, as well as in lines and columns. A  
page is a logical entity whose boundaries are defined by the width and the page  
length. These boundaries are established during printer initialization using the  
printer defaults, and can be changed using the Configuration menu or by issuing  
the appropriate data stream controls.  
Appendix E. Epson FX-1050 Data Stream 217  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
As a job prints, the printer controller maintains both the logical position and the  
physical position on the page. If a print job does not end with a proper job  
terminator (for example, Form Feed), then:  
v All data for the current page may not print  
v The next print job may be misaligned on the form  
v Residual data from a previous job could print with the new job.  
Page Presentation  
Many Epson ESC/P commands (tabs, margins, line spacing, for example) are  
described in terms of the presentation surface. A presentation surface is a  
two-dimensional surface upon which the printer positions symbols according to  
controls embedded in the incoming data stream. The presentation surface is  
defined in absolute terms by the width and depth parameters of the page size  
control commands (Set Page Length, Set Horizontal Margins, for example). The  
physical print position does not move outside the range of these two parameters.  
The left margin (LM) and right margin (RM) are variable parameters within the  
presentation surface. The logical print position does not move outside the range of  
the vertical margins nor outside the horizontal margins + 1. The following figure  
shows the presentation surface and the relationships of some of these parameters.  
n
CPP = 1  
CPL = 1  
TOF  
Physical  
Page  
LM  
RM  
SOP  
PL  
n
CPP  
CPL  
TOF  
LM  
Current Print Position (LM ≤ CPP ≤ RM)  
Current Print Line  
Top of Form  
Left Margin  
218 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
RM  
Right Margin  
SOP Skip Over Perforation  
PL  
Page Length  
Notes:  
1. The host should set the limits of the presentation surface if the default or  
previous values are not acceptable.  
2. The operator should align the physical paper so that it matches the logical  
presentation surface.  
Also created with this surface is a pair of numbers (CPL and CPP) which specify  
the line number and column number where the next graphic will be printed. These  
internal values are the logical position on the presentation surface.  
The variable parameters have default values which are established when the printer  
is initialized. The standard power-on defaults are:  
TOF  
PL  
Operator panel setting  
Operator panel setting  
Operator panel setting  
Operator panel setting  
0 inches (Column 1)  
Operator panel setting  
CPI  
LPI  
LM  
RM  
SOP Operator panel setting  
HT  
Horizontal tabs are set at each 8th column, starting with column 9 (9, 17,  
25, 33, and so on)  
VT  
Vertical tabs are all cleared  
One-Byte Controls  
Note: Control hex values within parentheses are recognized only within PC  
Character Set 1.  
The printer uses the following one-byte controls:  
Control  
NUL  
BEL  
BS  
Hex  
Name  
00 (80)  
07 (87)  
08 (88)  
09 (89)  
0A (8A)  
0B (8B)  
0C (8C)  
0D (8D)  
0E (8E)  
0F (8F)  
11 (91)  
Null (no operation)  
Bell  
Backspace  
HT  
Horizontal Tab  
LF  
Line Feed  
VT  
Vertical Tab  
FF  
Form Feed  
CR  
Carriage Return  
SO  
Shift Out (Double-Wide Print)  
Shift In (Condensed Print)  
Device Control 1 (Parallel Select, Serial XON)  
SI  
DC1  
Appendix E. Epson FX-1050 Data Stream 219  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Control  
DC2  
DC3  
DC4  
CAN  
SP  
Hex  
Name  
12 (92)  
13 (93)  
14 (94)  
18 (98)  
20  
Device Control 2 (Cancel Condensed Print)  
Device Control 3 (Parallel Deselect, Serial XOFF)  
Device Control 4 (Cancel Double-Wide Print)  
Cancel  
Space  
DEL  
7F  
Delete Character  
Null (NUL)  
00  
This control terminates the Set Horizontal Tab and Set Vertical Tab control codes.  
The printer ignores NUL by itself.  
Bell (BEL)  
07  
This control causes the audible alarm to sound.  
Backspace (BS)  
08  
This control moves the print position horizontally one character width to the left. If  
the current print position is at the left margin, the printer ignores this command.  
Horizontal Tab (HT)  
09  
This control moves the print position to the next horizontal tab stop. If there are no  
tab stops to the right, or if the next tab stop is beyond the current right margin, the  
control is ignored.  
Line Feed (LF)  
0A  
This control advances the paper one line. The horizontal position does not change  
unless automatic carriage return mode is activated from the operator panel  
Configuration menu. If the paper advance crosses the bottom margin, the printer  
completes all deferred printing on the current page and then does an automatic  
form feed.  
If skip perforation mode is active and the bottom margin is crossed, the vertical  
position on the new page following the automatic form feed will be the top-of-form  
position. If skip perforation is not active, the vertical position on the new page is the  
point immediately following the previous print line.  
220 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Vertical Tab (VT)  
0B  
This control causes the vertical presentation position to be advanced to the next  
vertical tab stop. The horizontal position is not affected unless automatic carriage  
return mode is activated from the operator panel Configuration menu. If there are  
no tab stops past the current vertical presentation position, Vertical Tab is treated as  
a Line Feed.  
Form Feed (FF)  
0C  
This control causes a new page to be started. Form Feed is a line end and page  
end control; it causes all deferred printing that may have been buffered for the  
current page to be completed and the form physically advanced to eject the current  
page. The vertical presentation position advances to the top margin and the  
horizontal presentation position is set to the left margin for subsequent printing.  
Carriage Return (CR)  
0D  
This control moves the current horizontal print position to the left margin. If Carriage  
Return equals Carriage Return + Line Feed, a Line Feed is executed when  
Carriage Return is received. Otherwise, the vertical position does not change.  
Carriage Return is a line ending control code that causes buffered data to print.  
Shift Out (SO) / Double-Wide Print  
0E  
This control causes the printer to start double-width printing. Double-width printing  
prints the characters twice as wide as the current character spacing. This results in  
half as many characters per inch. Each character takes up the space of two  
single-width characters. A Carriage Return, Line Feed, Form Feed, Vertical Tab,  
Double-Wide Continuous Mode, Cancel Double-Wide Print, or Set Presentation  
Position with vertical movement specified cancels the Shift Out control code.  
Shift In (SI) / Condensed Print  
0F  
This control prints graphic characters in condensed pitch (15, 17.1, or 20 CPI). If  
the current print option is 10 CPI this control will condense printing to 17.1 CPI. If  
the current print option is 12 CPI this control will condense printing to 20 CPI. If the  
current print option is 15 CPI there is no change in density. This control changes  
the maximum number of characters that can be printed on one line. Shift In is a  
buffer terminating control; if printable data at a different character-per-inch setting is  
buffered, that data is printed before the setting is changed. The current presentation  
position becomes the next printable column at the new character-per-inch setting.  
CPI can be changed within a print line.  
Appendix E. Epson FX-1050 Data Stream 221  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Device Control 1 (DC1) / Select or XON  
11  
This control has different meanings depending upon the currently active interface.  
v Parallel interface (Select): DC1 selects the printer.  
v Serial interface (XON): DC1 is treated as a NUL if received from the host. The  
printer sends DC1 (XON) to the host to control data pacing if XON/XOFF pacing  
is selected.  
Device Control 2 (DC2) / Cancel Condensed Print  
12  
This control cancels or ends condensed (17.1 or 20 CPI) printing. DC2 is a buffer  
terminating control; if printable data at a different characters-per-inch setting is  
buffered, that data is printed before the setting is changed. The current presentation  
position becomes the next printable column at the new character-per-inch setting.  
CPI can be changed within a print line.  
Device Control 3 (DC3) / Deselect or XOFF  
13  
This control has different meanings depending upon the currently active interface.  
v Parallel interface (Deselect): DC3 is treated as a NUL.  
v Serial interface (XOFF): DC3 is treated as a NUL if received from the host. The  
printer sends DC3 (XOFF) to the host to control data pacing if XON/XOFF pacing  
is selected.  
Device Control 4 (DC4) / Cancel Double-Wide Print  
14  
This control cancels double-wide printing if double wide was selected with the Shift  
Out control. The characters-per-inch setting returns to the previous value.  
Cancel (CAN)  
Space (SP)  
18  
This control purges all buffered data. All data received after the most recent buffer  
terminating control is discarded. For a list of buffer terminating controls, see “Buffer  
Terminating Conditions” on page 241. Any data received after Cancel is processed  
normally. Cancel does not change the current presentation position.  
20  
This control moves the print position one character space to the right.  
222 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Delete Character (DEL)  
7F  
This control removes the last text character on the print line and does not affect  
control codes.  
Escape Sequence Controls  
Escape sequence controls have an ESC followed by one or more control  
parameters. Supported escape sequence controls are:  
Control  
ESC  
Hex  
Name  
1B  
Escape  
ESC NUL  
ESC BEL  
ESC BS  
ESC HT  
ESC LF  
ESC VT  
ESC FF  
ESC CR  
ESC SO  
ESC SI  
ESC DC1  
ESC DC2  
ESC DC3  
ESC DC4  
ESC CAN  
ESC EM  
ESC SP  
ESC !  
1B 00  
1B 07  
1B 08  
1B 09  
1B 0A  
1B 0B  
1B 0C  
1B 0D  
1B 0E  
1B 0F  
1B 11  
1B 12  
1B 13  
1B 14  
1B 18  
1B 19  
1B 20  
1B 21  
1B 23  
1B 24  
1B 25  
1B 26  
1B 2A  
1B 2D  
1B 2F  
1B 30  
1B 31  
1B 32  
1B 33  
1B 34  
Null (no operation)  
Bell  
Backspace  
Horizontal Tab  
Line Feed  
Vertical Tab  
Form Feed  
Carriage Return  
Shift Out (Double-Wide Print)  
Shift In (Condensed Print)  
Device Control 1 (Select, XON)  
Device Control 2 (Cancel Condensed Print)  
Device Control 3 (Deselect, XOFF)  
Device Control 4 (Cancel Double-Wide Print)  
Cancel  
Turn Automatic Sheet Feeder On or Off  
Set Intercharacter Spacing  
Master Select  
ESC #  
Cancel MSB Control  
ESC $  
Set Absolute Print Position  
Select User–defined Set  
Define User–defined Characters  
Select Graphics Mode  
Auto Underscore  
ESC %  
ESC &  
ESC *  
ESC -  
ESC /  
Select Vertical Tab Channel  
Set 1/8 Inch Line Spacing (8 LPI)  
Set 7/72 Inch Vertical Spacing  
Set 1/6 Inch Line Spacing (6 LPI)  
Set n/216 Inch Line Spacing  
Select Italic Mode  
ESC 0  
ESC 1  
ESC 2  
ESC 3  
ESC 4  
Appendix E. Epson FX-1050 Data Stream 223  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Control  
ESC 5  
ESC 6  
ESC 7  
ESC : NUL  
ESC <  
ESC =  
ESC >  
ESC ?  
ESC @  
ESC A  
ESC B  
ESC C  
ESC D  
ESC E  
ESC F  
ESC G  
ESC H  
ESC I  
Hex  
Name  
1B 35  
1B 36  
1B 37  
1B 3A  
1B 3C  
1B 3D  
1B 3E  
1B 3F  
1B 40  
1B 41  
1B 42  
1B 43  
1B 44  
1B 45  
1B 46  
1B 47  
1B 48  
1B 49  
1B 4A  
1B 4B  
1B 4C  
1B 4D  
1B 4E  
1B 4F  
1B 50  
1B 51  
1B 52  
1B 53  
1B 54  
1B 55  
1B 57  
1B 59  
1B 5A  
1B 5C  
1B 61  
1B 62  
1B 64  
1B 65  
1B 67  
1B 6A  
1B 6B  
Cancel Italic Mode  
Printable Code Area Expansion  
Cancel Printable Code Area Expansion  
Copy ROM to RAM  
Set Unidirectional Mode (1 line only)  
Set MSB to 0  
Set MSB to 1  
Reassign Graphics Mode  
Initialize Printer  
Select n/72 Inch Line Spacing  
Set Vertical Tabs  
Set Page Length (Lines or Inches)  
Set Horizontal Tabs  
Begin Emphasized Print  
End Emphasized Print  
Begin Double-Strike Print  
End Double-Strike Print  
Printable Code Area Expansion  
Perform N/216 Inch Line Feed  
Select Single Density Graphics Mode  
Select Double Density Graphics Mode  
Select 12 CPI  
ESC J  
ESC K  
ESC L  
ESC M  
ESC N  
ESC O  
ESC P  
ESC Q  
ESC R  
ESC S  
ESC T  
ESC U  
ESC W  
ESC Y  
ESC Z  
ESC \  
Begin Skip Perforation  
End Skip Perforation  
Select 10 CPI  
Set Right Margin  
Select Character Set  
Begin Subscript/Superscript  
End Subscript/Superscript  
Set Print Direction  
Double-Wide Continuous Mode  
Dual Density Bit Image Graphics Type 2  
High Density Bit Image Graphics  
Set Relative Position  
ESC a  
ESC b  
ESC d  
ESC e  
ESC g  
ESC j  
Set Letter Quality Justification  
Set Vertical Tabs in Channel  
Relative Move Right (n/120)  
Relative Move Left (n/120)  
Set 15 CPI  
Feed Paper n/216 Reverse  
Select NLQ Font  
ESC k  
224 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Control  
ESC l  
Hex  
Name  
1B 6C  
1B 70  
1B 73  
1B 74  
1B 77  
1B 78  
Set Left Margin  
ESC p  
ESC s  
ESC t  
Turn Proportional Mode On/Off  
Quiet Printing  
Select Character Table  
Double High Printing  
Select NLQ or DP Print Quality  
ESC w  
ESC x  
Escape (ESC)  
1B  
This control is a prefix used in combination with supplementary control bytes to  
provide an extended set of control functions.  
Null (ESC NUL)  
1B  
00  
The printer ignores the NUL control by itself.  
Bell (ESC BEL)  
1B  
07  
This control causes the audible alarm to sound, if enabled. The alarm may be  
disabled or enabled from the Power On Configuration menu.  
Backspace (ESC BS)  
1B  
08  
This control moves the print position horizontally one character width to the left. If  
the current print position is at the left margin, the printer ignores this command.  
Horizontal Tab (HT)  
1B  
09  
This control moves the print position to the next horizontal tab stop. If there are no  
tab stops to the right, or if the next tab stop is beyond the current right margin, the  
control is ignored.  
Line Feed (ESC LF)  
1B  
0A  
This control advances the paper one line. The horizontal position does not change  
unless automatic carriage return mode is activated from the operator panel  
Configuration menu. If the paper advance crosses the bottom margin, the printer  
completes all deferred printing on the current page and then does an automatic  
form feed.  
Appendix E. Epson FX-1050 Data Stream 225  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If skip perforation mode is active and the bottom margin is crossed, the vertical  
position on the new page following the automatic form feed will be the top-of-form  
position. If skip perforation is not active, the vertical position on the new page is the  
point immediately following the previous print line.  
Vertical Tab (ESC VT)  
1B  
0B  
This control causes the vertical presentation position to be advanced to the next  
vertical tab stop. The horizontal position is not affected unless automatic carriage  
return mode is activated from the operator panel Configuration menu. If there are  
no tab stops past the current vertical presentation position, Vertical Tab is treated as  
a Line Feed.  
Form Feed (ESC FF)  
1B  
0C  
This control causes a new page to be started. Form Feed is a line end and page  
end control; it causes all deferred printing that may have been buffered for the  
current page to be completed and the form physically advanced to eject the current  
page. The vertical presentation position advances to the top margin and the  
horizontal presentation position is set to the left margin for subsequent printing.  
Carriage Return (ESC CR)  
1B  
0D  
This control moves the current horizontal print position to the left margin. The  
vertical print position does not change unless automatic line feed mode is active.  
Shift Out (ESC SO) / Double-Wide Print  
1B  
0E  
This control causes the printer to start double-width printing. Double-width printing  
prints the characters twice as wide as the current character spacing. This results in  
half as many characters per inch. Each character takes up the space of two  
single-width characters. A Carriage Return, Line Feed, Form Feed, Vertical Tab,  
Double-Wide Continuous Mode, Cancel Double-Wide Print, or Set Presentation  
Position with vertical movement specified cancels the Shift Out control code.  
Shift In (ESC SI) / Condensed Print  
1B  
0F  
This control prints graphic characters in condensed pitch (15, 17.1, or 20 CPI). If  
the current print option is 10 CPI this control will condense printing to 17.1 CPI. If  
the current print option is 12 CPI this control will condense printing to 20 CPI. If the  
current print option is 15 CPI there is no change in density. This control changes  
the maximum number of characters that can be printed on one line. Shift In is a  
buffer terminating control; if printable data at a different character-per-inch setting is  
buffered, that data is printed before the setting is changed. The current presentation  
position becomes the next printable column at the new character-per-inch setting.  
CPI can be changed within a print line.  
226 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Device Control 1 (ESC DC1) / Select or XON  
1B  
11  
This control has different meanings depending upon the currently active interface.  
v Parallel interface (Select): DC1 selects the printer.  
v Serial interface (XON): DC1 is treated as a NUL if received from the host. The  
printer sends DC1 (XON) to the host to control data pacing if XON/XOFF pacing  
is selected.  
Device Control 2 (ESC DC2) / Cancel Condensed Print  
1B  
12  
This control cancels or ends condensed (17.1 or 20 CPI) printing. DC2 is a buffer  
terminating control; if printable data at a different characters-per-inch setting is  
buffered, that data is printed before the setting is changed. The current presentation  
position becomes the next printable column at the new character-per-inch setting.  
CPI can be changed within a print line.  
Device Control 3 (ESC DC3) / Deselect or XOFF  
1B  
13  
This control has different meanings depending upon the currently active interface.  
v Parallel interface (Deselect): DC3 is treated as a NUL.  
v Serial interface (XOFF): DC3 is treated as a NUL if received from the host. The  
printer sends DC3 (XOFF) to the host to control data pacing if XON/XOFF pacing  
is selected.  
Device Control 4 (ESC DC4) / Cancel Double-Wide Print  
1B  
14  
This control cancels double-wide printing if double wide was selected with the Shift  
Out control. The characters-per-inch setting returns to the previous value.  
Cancel (ESC CAN)  
1B  
18  
This control purges all buffered data. All data received after the most recent buffer  
terminating control is discarded. For a list of buffer terminating controls, see “Buffer  
Terminating Conditions” on page 241. Any data received after Cancel is processed  
normally. Cancel does not change the current presentation position.  
Turn Auto Sheet Feeder On or Off (ESC EM)  
1B  
19  
NN  
This command selects or deselects the Automatic Sheet Feeder (ASF). This  
command must start and finish with a carriage return, line feed, or both; otherwise,  
it will be handled as if it were printable data.  
Appendix E. Epson FX-1050 Data Stream 227  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The following values are used for NN:  
0
1
2
3
4
Disable ASF. Ejects any form loaded from bin 1, 2, or 3, and selects Manual  
Sheet Feed forms path.  
Selects bin 1 if no forms are loaded; otherwise, the next form is loaded  
from bin 1 when data is received.  
Selects bin 2 if no forms are loaded; otherwise, the next form is loaded  
from bin 2 when data is received.  
Selects bin 3 if no forms are loaded; otherwise, the next form is loaded  
from bin 3 when data is received.  
Selects the last bin in use after the Deselect ASF command. A form will be  
loaded when data is received.  
C
R
Selects bin 1 for the first form; then selects bin 2 for all subsequent forms.  
Ejects the currently loaded cut-sheet form.  
Set Intercharacter Spacing (ESC SP)  
1B  
20  
NN  
This control sets the amount of space to be added to the right of each character.  
The number of units of space is equal to NN, from 0 to 127. Each unit of space is  
1/120th of an inch.  
Master Select (ESC !)  
1B  
21  
NN  
This control selects any valid combination of the modes in the table below. To  
determine the value of the NN, add together the values of the modes you select  
from the table.  
Mode  
Decimal  
Hex  
00  
01  
02  
04  
08  
10  
20  
40  
80  
10 CPI  
0
12 CPI  
1
Proportional  
Condensed  
Emphasized  
Double-Strike  
Double-Wide  
Italic  
2
4
8
16  
32  
64  
128  
Underline  
This control applies to DP and NLQ. Proportional cannot be condensed and 10 CPI  
cannot be combined with 12 CPI. Proportional overrides condensed if both  
proportional and condensed are selected. Double-strike is ignored in NLQ.  
Cancel MSB Control (ESC #)  
1B  
23  
228 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Cancels the most significant bit (MSB) control.  
Set Absolute Print Position (ESC $)  
1B  
24  
N1  
N2  
This control specifies the distance that subsequent characters are to be printed  
from the set left margin in 1/60 inch units. Where the total number of dots equals  
N1 + (N2 × 256). If the position is beyond the right margin, the control is ignored  
and the previous setting remains active. If the position is within the right margin,  
subsequent characters will be printed at (N1 + [N2 × 256])/60 inches.  
Select User-Defined Set (ESC %)  
1B  
25  
NN  
00  
This control specifies the character set as default or user-defined. The following are  
the values of NN:  
0
1
Selects the default character set.  
Selects the user-defined character set.  
Define User-Defined Characters (ESC &)  
1B  
26  
NN  
MM  
W0  
W1  
W2  
D0 .. DN  
This control allows the definition of special characters that are not present in the  
character sets.  
NN and MM are two decimal numbers that define the first and last characters to be  
replaced in the character set in use. If you want to replace only one character, MM  
must be equal to NN. Any value in the range of 0 to 127 is accepted, even code 32,  
which is the space character.  
W0, W1, and W2 are numbers that specify the width of the character and the space  
around it. The space on the left of the character (in columns of dots) is specified by  
W0; the space on the right of the character is specified by W2. W1 specifies the  
number of columns of dots that must be printed to design the character.  
The following table lists the maximum value for W0, W1, and W2:  
Printing  
W0 + W1  
W0 + W1 + W2  
DP  
9
12  
36  
30  
42  
NLQ at 10 CPI  
NLQ at 12 CPI  
Proportional  
35  
29  
41  
D0 .. DN is the data of the character that is printed. Three bytes are needed for  
each column because it is composed of 24 dot positions. In this way, the number of  
data bytes is W1 x 3. You can define a character in superscript or subscript. Two  
bytes are needed for each column because it is composed of 16 dot positions. The  
number of data bytes is W1 x 2.  
Appendix E. Epson FX-1050 Data Stream 229  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Select Graphics Mode (ESC *)  
1B  
2A  
MM  
N1  
N2  
This control selects the graphics mode MM from the table below. The total number  
of columns equals N1 + (N2 × 256).  
Horizontal  
Alternate  
Code  
Density  
(dots/in.)  
Option  
MM  
0
Single-Density  
Double-Density  
High-Speed Double-Density *  
Quadruple-Density *  
CRT I  
ESC K  
ESC L  
ESC Y  
ESC Z  
NONE  
NONE  
NONE  
NONE  
60  
1
120  
120  
240  
80  
2
3
4
Plotter (1:1)  
5
72  
CRT II  
6
90  
Double-Density Plotter  
7
144  
Note: (*) Adjacent dots cannot be printed in this mode  
Auto Underscore (ESC –)  
1B  
2D  
NN  
This control turns on and off the continuous underscore function.  
If NN is an odd value (1, 3, 5 ...), the printer underscores all text characters and  
spaces following this sequence. The printer does not underscore white space  
caused by horizontal tabs.  
If NN is an even value (0, 2, 4 ...), the printers stops the underscore of all data  
following this sequence.  
Select Vertical Tab Channel (ESC /)  
1B  
2F  
CH  
This control selects the vertical tab channel. The values for CH are 0 to 7. The  
channel selected by this control is used for all subsequent vertical tab commands.  
Channel 0 is used if no channel has been selected.  
Set 1/8 Inch Line Spacing (ESC 0)  
1B  
30  
This control sets the line spacing to eight lines per inch.  
The application program is responsible for keeping track of the vertical position on  
the current page relative to the current line spacing. Changing the line spacing  
within a print job without changing the page length can cause printing on the page  
perforation. For additional information, see “Set Page Length (ESC C)” on  
page 233.  
230 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Set 7/72 Inch Line Spacing (ESC 1)  
1B  
31  
This control sets the line spacing to 7/72 inch.  
The application program is responsible for keeping track of the vertical position on  
the current page relative to the current line spacing. Changing the line spacing  
within a print job without changing the page length can cause printing on the page  
perforation. For additional information, see “Set Page Length (ESC C)” on  
page 233.  
Set 1/6 Inch Line Spacing (ESC 2)  
1B  
32  
This control sets the line spacing at the value set by the last Set Text Line Spacing  
(ESC A) control received. The printer sets the line spacing to six lines per inch if no  
ESC A has been issued.  
Set n/216 Inch Line Spacing (ESC 3)  
1B  
33  
NN  
This control changes the line spacing to the value specified by NN.  
NN is a value that specifies the line spacing in units of 1/216 inch. Valid values are  
0 to 255. If NN equals 0, the printer ignores this control. The printer will adjust the  
line spacing to the nearest 1/144 inch.  
The application program is responsible for keeping track of the vertical position on  
the current page relative to the current line spacing. Changing the line spacing  
within a print job without changing the page length can cause printing on the page  
perforation. For additional information, see “Set Page Length (ESC C)” on  
page 233.  
Select Italic Mode (ESC 4)  
1B  
34  
This control turns on italic character printing. This control is valid even if the Epson  
Extended Graphics character set has been selected by the Character Table (ESC t)  
or the operator panel, but character graphics cannot be italicized. This control is  
used in both DP and NLQ.  
Cancel Italic Mode (ESC 5)  
1B  
35  
NN  
This control cancels italic character printing.  
Printable Code Area Expansion (ESC 6)  
1B  
36  
Appendix E. Epson FX-1050 Data Stream 231  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
This control enables codes X'80' through X'9F' from the active character set to  
become printable characters instead of control characters.  
Cancel Printable Code Area Expansion (ESC 7)  
1B  
37  
This control cancels Printable Code Area Expansion (ESC 6).  
Copy ROM into Ram (ESC : NUL)  
1B  
3A  
00  
00  
00  
This control copies the characters in ROM into RAM. Specific characters may be  
redefined.  
Select Unidirectional Mode (one line only) (ESC <)  
1B  
3C  
This control selects unidirectional printing from left to right for one line only. ESC <  
is cancelled by a Carriage Return. The printhead begins the line at the Home  
position, prints to the end of the line, then is cancelled by the CR that returns the  
printhead to Home.  
Set MSB to 0 (ESC =)  
1B  
3D  
This control sets the most significant bit (MSB) of all incoming data to 0. The MSB  
is bit 7. This control only affects text and control code data. This control can prevent  
the problem of some system applications that always send data with the MSB set to  
1, which results in italic or graphics printing in Epson printers.  
Set MSB to 1 (ESC >)  
1B  
3E  
This control sets the most significant bit (MSB) of all incoming data to 1. The MSB  
is 7. This control only affects text and control code data.  
Reassign Graphics Mode (ESC ?)  
1B  
3F  
S
NN  
This control reassigns a graphics command (ESC K, ESC L, ESC Y, or ESC Z) to a  
different mode (K, L, Y, or Z).  
Horizontal  
Alternate  
Code  
Density  
(dots/in.)  
Option  
NN  
0
Single-Density  
ESC K  
ESC L  
ESC Y  
60  
Double-Density  
High-Speed Double-Density *  
1
120  
120  
2
232 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Horizontal  
Density  
(dots/in.)  
Alternate  
Code  
Option  
NN  
3
Quadruple-Density *  
CRT I  
ESC Z  
NONE  
NONE  
NONE  
NONE  
240  
80  
4
Plotter (1:1)  
CRT II  
5
72  
6
90  
Double-Density Plotter  
7
144  
Note: (*) Adjacent dots cannot be printed in this mode  
Initialize Printer (ESC @)  
1B  
40  
This control resets all print-related parameters to values previously saved and  
clears the buffer of printable data.  
Select n/72 Inch Line Spacing (ESC A)  
1B  
41  
NN  
This control sets a line spacing value for subsequent line feeds.  
NN is a one-byte hexadecimal number that specifies the line spacing value of  
NN/72 inches. The value of NN is 0 to 85.  
Following are example values for NN:  
X'18' 3 LPI  
X'12' 4 LPI  
X'0C' 6 LPI  
X'09' 8 LPI  
X'08' 9 LPI  
X'06' 12 LPI  
Set Vertical Tabs (ESC B)  
1B  
42  
N1  
N2...00  
This control sets the vertical stops. The maximum number of tab stops supported is  
16. The settings are not affected by subsequent changes in line spacing. The tab  
settings must be in ascending order (N1, N2, etc.) with the 0 character indicating  
the end of the command. Values of N are 1 to 255. All settings are stored in  
Channel 0. See “Select Vertical Tabs in Channels (ESC b)” on page 239. To clear  
the tab settings, use ESC B 0.  
Set Page Length (ESC C)  
1B  
43  
LL  
IN  
Appendix E. Epson FX-1050 Data Stream 233  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
This control sets the physical page length in lines or inches and resets skip  
perforation mode.  
LL is a one-byte hexadecimal number that specifies the page length in lines. The  
value is converted to inches based upon the current line spacing. Valid values for  
LL are X'01' to X'FF', but the resulting page length in inches must be less than  
113.8 inches (2890 mm). If LL equals 0, then parameter II (length is inches) is used.  
IN is a one-byte hexadecimal number that specifies the page length in inches. IN is  
present only if parameter LL equals 0. Valid values for IN are X'01' to X'71'. If IN is  
greater than the maximum value, the maximum value is used. If both LL and IN are  
zero, the control is ignored.  
Set Horizontal Tabs (ESC D)  
1B  
44  
TT .. TT  
00  
This control sets the horizontal tab stops. The maximum number of tab stops  
supported is 32. The sequence terminates with the NUL control code. If the null  
terminator is missing, the printer treats the next 32 bytes as tab stops and ignores  
all the data bytes following the 32 bytes until a Null is received. If the printer  
receives this control code with no tabs, all horizontal tab stops are cleared.  
TT is the list of tab stops as character positions relative to the left edge of the  
physical page. Valid values are X'01' to X'FF'. Tab stops must be specified in  
ascending order. Entries not in ascending order are ignored.  
Begin Emphasized Print (ESC E)  
1B  
45  
This control starts emphasized print mode (bold style). Emphasized printing  
continues until the printer receives an End Emphasized Print (ESC F) control, or the  
printer is initialized.  
End Emphasized Print (ESC F)  
1B  
46  
This control ends emphasized print mode (bold style).  
Begin Double-Strike Print (ESC G)  
1B  
47  
This control starts double-strike printing (all text characters are double struck).  
Double-strike printing continues until the printer receives an End Double-Strike Print  
control (ESC H), or the printer is initialized.  
End Double-Strike Print (ESC H)  
1B  
48  
This control ends double-strike printing.  
234 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Printable Code Area Expansion (ESC I)  
1B  
49  
This control defines whether codes X'00' through X'1F' and codes X'80' through  
X'9F' are printable characters or control characters of the active character set.  
When NN equals X'01', the codes become printable characters, which allows them  
to be used as user-defined characters.  
When NN equals X'00', the codes are returned to non-printable characters.  
Perform n/216 Inch Line Feed (ESC J)  
1B  
4A  
NN  
This control performs a vertical move relative to the current presentation position.  
NN is a one-byte hexadecimal value that specifies the move amount in units of  
1/216 inch. The printer will adjust the value to the nearest 1/144 inch. This control  
performs an immediate line feed, but does not affect subsequent line spacing and  
does not produce a CR.  
Select Single Density Graphics Mode (ESC K)  
1B  
4B  
LL  
HH  
NN .. NN  
This control prints the supplied bit image data at 60 horizontal pel by 72 vertical pel.  
Bit image data can be mixed with text data on the same line.  
A two-byte count (LL HH) indicates the number of bytes that follow in this control.  
LL is the least significant byte of the count; HH is the most significant byte. (The  
number of bytes that follow should equal HH × 256 + LL.) If the count equals  
X'0000', the control is ignored.  
NN .. NN are the bytes containing the bit image data. The data format is in 8-bit  
vertical slices, with the least significant bit the bottom dot and the most significant  
bit the top dot. B'1' indicates a pel to be printed; B'0' indicates an unprinted pel.  
Data that exceeds the right margin is discarded.  
Select Double Density Graphics Mode (ESC L)  
1B  
4C  
LL  
HH  
NN .. NN  
This control prints the supplied bit image data at 120 horizontal by 72 vertical pel.  
Bit image data can be mixed with text data on the same line.  
A two-byte count (LL HH) indicates the number of bytes that follow in this control.  
LL is the least significant byte of the count; HH is the most significant byte. (The  
number of bytes that follow should equal HH × 256 + LL.) If the count equals  
X'0000', the control is ignored.  
NN .. NN are the bytes containing the bit image data. The data format is in 8-bit  
vertical slices, with the least significant bit the bottom dot and the most significant  
bit the top dot. B'1' indicates a pel to be printed; B'0' indicates an unprinted pel.  
Data that exceeds the right margin is discarded.  
Appendix E. Epson FX-1050 Data Stream 235  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Select 12 CPI (ESC M)  
1B  
4D  
This control selects 12 characters-per-inch printing.  
Begin Skip Perforation (ESC N)  
1B  
4E  
NN  
This control sets the number of lines to be skipped at the bottom of each page.  
Once this function is activated, it stays active until the End Skip Perforation (ESC  
O) or Set Page Length (ESC C) control is received, or the printer is initialized.  
NN is a one-byte hexadecimal value that specifies the number of lines to skip at the  
bottom of each page. This value must be greater than zero and less than the length  
of the page in lines (from 0 to 127). If the value is not valid, the control is ignored.  
Once Begin Skip Perforation is activated, the number of lines that may be printed  
on a page is the page length minus NN.  
End Skip Perforation (ESC O)  
1B  
4F  
This control ends skip perforation.  
Select 10 CPI (ESC P)  
1B  
50  
This control selects 10 CPI printing and is normally used to cancel 12 CPI.  
Select Right Margin (ESC Q)  
1B  
51  
NN  
This control sets the right margin to N columns at the current character width.  
Where NN is the number of columns from the right edge of the physical page to the  
end of the print line.  
Select Character Set (ESC R)  
1B  
52  
NN  
This control specifies an international character set as shown in the table below and  
is available in both DP and NLQ. The following values for NN are:  
Hex Codes  
Character  
N
0
1
2
3
Set  
23 24 40 5b 5c 5d 5e 60 7b 7c 7d 7e  
USA  
#
#
#
£
$
$
$
$
@
à
[
\
]
|
|
|
|
‘
‘
‘
‘
{
¦
}
˜
France  
Germany  
°
Ä
[
ç
Ö
\
§
Ü
]
é
ä
{
ù
ö
¦
è
ü
}
..  
β
˜
§
United  
@
Kingdom  
236 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Hex Codes  
Character  
Set  
N
4
5
6
7
8
9
a
b
c
23 24 40 5b 5c 5d 5e 60 7b 7c 7d 7e  
Denmark I  
Sweden  
Italy  
#
#
#
s
#
#
#
#
#
$
¤
$
$
$
¤
$
$
$
@
É
Æ
Ä
°
Ø
Ö
\
Å
Å
é
¿
]
|
‘
æ
ä
à
..  
{
ø
ö
ò
ñ
¦
å
å
è
}
˜
Ü
|
é
ù
‘
ü
ì
@
@
@
É
Spain I  
Japan  
¡
Ñ
¥
|
˜
[
|
‘
}
˜
Norway  
Denmark II  
Spain II  
Æ
Æ
¡
Ø
Ø
Ñ
Ñ
Å
Å
¿
¿
Ü
Ü
é
é
é
é
‘
æ
æ
í
ø
ø
ñ
ñ
å
å
ó
ó
ü
ü
ú
ú
É
á
Latin  
á
¡
ü
í
America I  
d
e
French  
Canadian  
#
#
$
$
à
â
[
ç
ê
]
î
ô
í
é
ó
ù
á
è
é
û
ü
Latin  
@
Ñ
ú
America II  
Begin Subscript/Superscript Mode (ESC S)  
1B  
53  
NN  
This control activates subscript and superscript printing. Once this printing is active,  
it stays active until another Begin Subscript/Superscript Mode control changes the  
mode, an End Subscript/Superscript Mode control is received, or the printer is  
initialized.  
NN is a one-byte hexadecimal value that activates subscript or superscript printing.  
v If NN is an odd value (1, 3, 5, ...), subscript mode is active.  
v If NN is an even value (0, 2, 4, ...), superscript mode is active.  
End Subscript/Superscript Mode (ESC T)  
1B  
54  
This controls stops subscript and superscript printing.  
Set Print Direction (ESC U)  
1B  
55  
NN  
This control specifies bidirectional or unidirectional printing.  
v If NN is an odd value (1, 3, 5, ...) unidirectional printing is selected.  
v If NN is an even value (0, 2, 4, ...), bidirectional printing (default) is selected.  
Double-Wide Continuous Mode (ESC W)  
1B  
57  
NN  
This control turns double-wide printing on or off. When double-wide printing is on,  
the width of subsequent graphic characters is doubled (the characters-per-inch  
Appendix E. Epson FX-1050 Data Stream 237  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
value is half of the single character value). For tabs, the font width is not doubled  
(tab distance is based upon single character width).  
NN is a one-byte hexadecimal value that turns double-wide printing on or off.  
v If NN is an odd value (1, 3, 5, ...), double-wide printing is turned on.  
v If NN is an even value (0, 2, 4, ...), double-wide printing is turned off.  
Note: Double-Wide Continuous Mode does the same function as Shift Out, except  
double wide printing is not canceled when a new line begins.  
Dual Density Bit Image Graphics Type 2 (ESC Y)  
1B  
59  
LL  
HH  
NN .. NN  
This control prints the supplied bit image data at 120 horizontal pel by 72 vertical  
pel. Bit image data can be mixed with text data on the same line. Horizontally  
adjacent dots are not allowed and will be removed if specified.  
A two-byte count (LL HH) indicates the number of bytes that follow in this control.  
LL is the least significant byte of the count; HH is the most significant byte. (The  
number of bytes that follow should equal HH × 256 + LL.) If the count equals  
X'0000', the control is ignored.  
NN .. NN are the bytes containing the bit image data. The data format is in 8-bit  
vertical slices, with the least significant bit the bottom dot and the most significant  
bit the top dot. B'1' indicates a pel to be printed; B'0' indicates an unprinted pel.  
Data that exceeds the right margin is discarded.  
High Density Bit Image Graphics (ESC Z)  
1B  
5A  
LL  
HH  
NN .. NN  
This control prints the supplied bit image data at 240 horizontal per by 72 vertical  
pel. Bit image data can be mixed with text data on the same line.  
A two-byte count (LL HH) indicates the number of bytes that follow in this control.  
LL is the least significant byte of the count; HH is the most significant byte. (The  
number of bytes that follow should equal HH × 256 + LL.) If the count equals  
X'0000', the control is ignored.  
NN .. NN are the bytes containing the bit image data. The data format is in 8-bit  
vertical slices, with the least significant bit the bottom dot and the most significant  
bit the top dot. B'1' indicates a pel to be printed; B'0' indicates an unprinted pel.  
Data that exceeds the right margin is discarded.  
Set Relative Position (ESC \)  
1B  
5C  
N1  
N2  
This control moves the printhead to a horizontal print position relative to the current  
print position using 1/120 inch increments. To calculate the correct values for N1  
and N2, determine the displacement required in 1/120 of an inch. Send the resulting  
number using the formula total number of dots equals N1 + (N2 × 256). If the  
desired formula is to the left, subtract the number from 65536 before using the  
238 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
formula. The printhead will move (N1 + [N2 × 256])/120 inches relative to the  
current print position. The control is ignored if it would move the printhead beyond  
the page margins.  
Set Letter Quality Justification (ESC a)  
1B  
61  
NN  
This control selects print justification according to the following values of NN:  
0
Selects left justification  
Selects center justification  
Selects right justification  
Selects full justification  
1
2
3
Notes:  
1. Left justification is the default setting (NN = 0).  
2. The commands HT and BS are valid only when left justification is active.  
3. For full justification, there must be no carriage returns within a paragraph.  
Select Vertical Tabs in Channels (ESC b)  
1B  
62  
CH  
N1  
N2..00  
This control sets vertical tabs to channels selected by the Set Vertical Tab Channel  
(ESC /) control. The value of CH is 0 through 7 and the value of N1 is 0 through  
255.  
The distance of each tab stop from top of form is the current line spacing times the  
number of lines given in N1.  
If paper movement is commanded to a value of N1 greater than the page length,  
the paper movement command is ignored. The values of N1 must be in ascending  
order. If they are not, the sequence up to and including the out of sequence number  
is ignored. Skip over perforation is ignored. You can clear any channel by sending  
ESC b CH 0, where CH is the channel number.  
Move Right n/120 (ESC d)  
1B  
64  
N1  
N2  
This control spaces forward in 1/120s of an inch. To find the values for N1 and N2,  
determine the required displacement in 1/120s of an inch. Send the resulting  
number in the formula: N1 + (N2 X 256).  
Move Left n/120 (ESC e)  
1B  
65  
N1  
N2  
This control spaces backward in 1/120s of an inch. To find the values for N1 and  
N2, determine the required displacement in 1/120s of an inch. Send the resulting  
number in the formula: N1 + (N2 X 256).  
Appendix E. Epson FX-1050 Data Stream 239  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Set 15 CPI (ESC g)  
1B  
67  
This control prints any data stored in the print buffer, and initializes following text to  
print at 15 CPI.  
Feed Paper n/216 Reverse (ESC j)  
1B  
6A  
This command causes fanfold paper to feed backwards n/216 of an inch.  
Select NLQ Font (ESC k)  
1B  
6B  
NN  
This control selects an NLQ font based on the following values of NN:  
0
1
Courier  
Gothic  
This control affects only NLQ.  
Set Left Margin (ESC l)  
1B  
6C  
NN  
This control sets the left margin to NN columns from the left edge of the physical  
page to the beginning of the print line. Where NN is a hex value. The number of  
inches in the margin does not vary if the font, character width, or horizontal dot  
density changes. This command automatically clears and resets horizontal tabs to  
every eight characters, then performs a cancel operation. The smallest possible  
space between the left margins is the width of one double-wide, 10 CPI character. If  
a margin control code violates this minimum distance, it is ignored. Settings in  
proportional mode are treated as 10 CPI.  
Turn Proportional Mode On/Off (ESC p)  
1B  
70  
NN  
This control sets proportional mode on or off to the following values of NN:  
0
1
Mode is Off  
Mode is On  
This control overrides condensed and is available for DP, NLQ, and user-defined  
characters.  
Quiet Printing (ESC s)  
1B  
73  
NN  
This control activates and deactivates Quiet Mode. Quiet mode creates half-speed  
printing. The following are the values for NN:  
240 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
0
1
Set Quiet Mode Off  
Set Quiet Mode On  
Select Character Table (ESC t)  
1B  
74  
NN  
This control selects italic characters from the Epson Italic character set. The  
characters selected are ASCII codes 128 to 255 (X'80' through X'FF').  
The following values of NN are:  
X'0'  
X'1'  
Select Epson Italic character set  
Selects Epson Extended Graphics Italic character set (actually  
Code Page 437)  
X'2'  
Remap DLL character set from positions 0 - 127 to 128 - 255.  
Selecting Epson Extended Graphics does not disable italic printing. The value of  
NN must equal X'00' or X'01'.  
Double High Printing (ESC w)  
1B  
77  
NN  
This control activates and deactivates double-high printing. The following are the  
values for NN:  
0
1
Set Double-High Mode Off  
Set Double-High Mode On  
Superscript, subscript, and condensed modes are not valid in double-high mode.  
This command is available for both DP and NLQ printing.  
Select NLQ or DP Print Quality (ESC x)  
1B  
78  
NN  
This control selects NLQ or DP from the following values of NN:  
0
1
Selects DP mode  
Selects NLQ mode  
This control overrides the operator panel print quality selections.  
Buffer Terminating Conditions  
The following controls cause buffered data to be released for printing:  
v Carriage Return  
v Line Feed  
v Form Feed  
v Reverse Line Feed  
v Horizontal Tab  
v Vertical Tab  
Appendix E. Epson FX-1050 Data Stream 241  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v Backspace  
v Set 1/8 Inch Line Spacing  
v Set 7/72 Inch Line Spacing  
v Set 1/6 Inch Line Spacing  
v Set n/216 Inch Line Spacing  
v Set n/72 Inch Line Spacing  
v Invoke Text Line Spacing (if the line spacing is changed)  
v Move Right n/120  
v Move Left n/120  
v Feed Paper n/216 Reverse  
v Relative Move Baseline  
v Shift Out/Double-Wide Print  
v Device Control 4/Cancel Double-Wide Print  
v Begin Subscript/Superscript  
v End Subscript/Superscript  
v Begin Double-Strike Print  
v End Double-Strike Print  
v Begin Emphasized Print  
v End Emphasized Print  
v Set Presentation Highlight  
v Continuous Overscore  
v Auto Underscore  
v Device Control 2/Select 10 CPI  
v Set 12 CPI  
v Shift In/Condensed Print  
v Proportional Space Mode  
v Change Font  
v Normal Density Bit Image Graphics  
v Dual Density Bit Image Graphics Type 1  
v Dual Density Bit Image Graphics Type 2  
v High Density Bit Image Graphics  
v Unidirectional Printing  
v Set Horizontal Margins  
v Set Initial Conditions  
The following conditions also cause buffered data to be released for printing:  
v Serial BREAK or parallel -INIT  
v Automatic Line Wrap An automatic line wrap consists of a carriage return and  
line feed inserted after the maximum number of characters has been printed on a  
line. The next character is then printed at the left margin on the following line.  
Automatic line wrap occurs for text data but not for bit image graphics or  
advanced function graphics.  
242 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Unsupported Command Processing  
The following Epson controls are not supported by the 4247 Printer. If any of these  
commands are received, they are ignored.  
v Select 9-Pin Graphic Mode (ESC |)  
v Disable Paper-Out Sensor (ESC 8)  
v Enable Paper-Out Sensor (ESC 9)  
v Select Color (ESC r)  
v Assign Character Table (ESC (t)  
Appendix E. Epson FX-1050 Data Stream 243  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
244 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix F. Code Pages  
ASCII Code Pages .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 245  
. 247  
. 248  
. 249  
. 250  
. 251  
. 252  
. 253  
. 254  
. 255  
. 256  
. 257  
. 258  
. 259  
. 260  
. 261  
. 262  
. 263  
. 264  
. 265  
. 266  
. 267  
. 268  
. 269  
. 270  
. 271  
. 272  
. 273  
. 274  
. 275  
. 276  
. 277  
. 278  
. 279  
. 280  
. 281  
. 282  
. 283  
. 283  
. 283  
. 284  
USA (Personal Computer)  
Greek/Latin (ISO 8859-7).  
Latin 1 (ISO 8859-1)  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Multilingual .  
Old Greek .  
Latin 2/ROECE  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Turkish  
Cyrillic.  
Turkish  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Portuguese .  
Icelandic .  
Hebrew .  
.
.
Canadian French.  
Arabic .  
.
.
.
.
Danish/Norwegian .  
Cyrillic 2 (Personal Computer) .  
New Greek .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Thai  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
OCR-A  
OCR-B  
Latin 2 (ISO 8859-2)  
Latin 3 (ISO 8859-3)  
Latin 4 (ISO 8859-4)  
Cyrillic (ISO 8859-5)  
Latin 8 (ISO 8859-8)  
Latin 5 (ISO 8859-8)  
Baltic Multilingual.  
.
Estonian .  
Urdu .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Arabic Extended .  
Latin 6 (ISO 8859-6)  
Farsi (Personal Computer) .  
Estonian (Personal Computer) .  
Latvian (Personal Computer)  
Lithuanian (Personal Computer) .  
.
Cyrillic Windows .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Epson FX-series Code Pages .  
Extended Graphics Character Table .  
Italic Character Table .  
Epson Extended Character Variables  
.
.
.
.
.
ASCII Code Pages  
The table below lists the ASCII code pages used by the 4247 Printer, and also  
provides page references so you can determine what code page contains the  
characters you want to use.  
Code Page  
Character Set Name  
See Page  
437  
USA (Personal Computer)  
247  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1995, 1998  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
245  
 
Code Page  
813  
Character Set Name  
Greek/Latin (ISO 8859-7)  
Latin 1 (ISO 8859-1)  
Multilingual  
See Page  
248  
249  
250  
251  
252  
253  
254  
255  
256  
257  
258  
259  
260  
261  
262  
263  
264  
265  
266  
267  
268  
269  
270  
271  
272  
273  
274  
275  
276  
277  
278  
279  
280  
281  
282  
283  
283  
819  
850  
851  
Old Greek  
852  
Latin 2/ROECE  
Turkish  
853  
855  
Cyrillic  
857  
Turkish  
860  
Portuguese  
861  
Icelandic  
862  
Hebrew  
863  
Canadian French  
Arabic  
864  
865  
Danish/Norwegian  
Cyrillic 2 (Personal Computer)  
New Greek  
866  
869  
874  
Thai  
876  
OCR-A  
877  
OCR-B  
912  
Latin 2 (ISO 8859-2)  
Latin 3 (ISO 8859-3)  
Latin 4 (ISO 8859-4)  
Cyrillic (ISO 8859-5)  
Latin 8 (ISO 8859-8)  
Latin 5 (ISO 8859-9)  
Baltic Multilingual  
Estonian  
913  
914  
915  
916  
920  
921  
922  
1006  
1046  
1089  
1098  
1116  
1117  
1118  
1251  
Urdu  
Arabic Extended  
Latin 6 (ISO 8859-6)  
Farsi (Personal Computer)  
Estonian (Personal Computer)  
Latvian (Personal Computer)  
Lithuanian (Personal Computer)  
Cyrillic Windows  
Epson Extended Graphic  
Epson Italic  
246 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
USA (Personal Computer)  
Appendix F. Code Pages 247  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Greek/Latin (ISO 8859-7)  
248 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Latin 1 (ISO 8859-1)  
Appendix F. Code Pages 249  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Multilingual  
250 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Old Greek  
Appendix F. Code Pages 251  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Latin 2/ROECE  
252 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Turkish  
Appendix F. Code Pages 253  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Cyrillic  
254 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Turkish  
Appendix F. Code Pages 255  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Portuguese  
256 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Icelandic  
Appendix F. Code Pages 257  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Hebrew  
258 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Canadian French  
Appendix F. Code Pages 259  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Arabic  
260 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Danish/Norwegian  
Appendix F. Code Pages 261  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Cyrillic 2 (Personal Computer)  
262 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
New Greek  
Appendix F. Code Pages 263  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Thai  
264 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
OCR-A  
Appendix F. Code Pages 265  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
OCR-B  
266 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Latin 2 (ISO 8859-2)  
Appendix F. Code Pages 267  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Latin 3 (ISO 8859-3)  
268 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Latin 4 (ISO 8859-4)  
Appendix F. Code Pages 269  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Cyrillic (ISO 8859-5)  
270 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Latin 8 (ISO 8859-8)  
Appendix F. Code Pages 271  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Latin 5 (ISO 8859-8)  
272 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Baltic Multilingual  
Appendix F. Code Pages 273  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Estonian  
274 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Urdu  
Appendix F. Code Pages 275  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Arabic Extended  
276 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Latin 6 (ISO 8859-6)  
Appendix F. Code Pages 277  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Farsi (Personal Computer)  
278 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Estonian (Personal Computer)  
Appendix F. Code Pages 279  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Latvian (Personal Computer)  
280 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Lithuanian (Personal Computer)  
Appendix F. Code Pages 281  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Cyrillic Windows  
282 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Epson FX-series Code Pages  
The following Epson code charts provide information on the character tables  
available for Epson FX-series emulation mode.  
Extended Graphics Character Table  
0
1
2
sp  
!
3
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
4
5
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
6
‘
7
p
q
r
8
Ç
ü
é
â
ä
à
å
ç
ê
ë
è
ï
9
A
á
í
B
Š
‹
Œ
│
┤
╡
╢
╖
╕
╣
║
╗
╝
╜
╛
┐
C
└
┴
┬
├
─
┼
╞
╟
╚
╔
╩
╦
╠
═
╬
╧
D
╨
╤
╥
╙
╘
╒
╓
╫
╪
┘
┌
"
ª
«
¬
-
E
α
β
Γ
π
Σ
ς
F
≡
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
É
æ
Æ
ô
a
b
c
d
e
f
±
≥
≤
¹
º
÷
≈
°
″
ó
ú
ñ
Ñ
ª
#
$
%
&
'
s
t
ö
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
ò
û
µ
τ
Φ
Θ
ó
δ
∞
φ
ε
"
G
H
I
g
h
i
ù
º
(
ÿ
¿
±
)
Ö
Ü
¢
*
v
*
J
j
¬
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
½
'
n
<
=
>
?
\
¦
î
£
¼
2
−
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
ì
¥
¡
∧
_
˜
Ä
Å
s
<<  
>>  
u
/
,
0
Italic Character Table  
0
1
2
sp  
!
3
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
4
5
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
6
‘
7
p
q
r
8
9
A
B
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
C
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
D
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
E
‘
F
p
q
r
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
a
b
c
d
e
f
!
a
b
c
d
e
f
″
″
#
$
%
&
'
#
$
%
&
'
s
t
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
G
H
I
g
h
i
G
H
I
g
h
i
(
(
)
)
*
J
j
*
J
j
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
<
=
>
?
\
¦
<
=
>
?
\
¦
−
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
−
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
∧
_
˜
∧
_
˜
/
/
0
Appendix F. Code Pages 283  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Epson Extended Character Variables  
The following table shows characters that vary, by language, from the Epson  
Extended Character Graphics set.  
The code points shown are the only ones that vary. For example, in the United  
Kingdom, only code point X'23' is different from the basic Epson table shown on  
283.  
Code Point (in hexadecimal)  
Country  
23  
24  
40  
@
à
5b  
[
5c  
\
5d  
]
5e  
60  
7b  
{
7c  
¦
7d  
}
7e  
˜
U S A  
#
$
|
‘
France  
°
ç
§
é
ù
è
}
Germany  
U K  
§
Ä
Ö
Ü
ä
ö
ü
β
£
Denmark - 1  
Sweden  
$
¤
Æ
Ä
°
Ø
Ö
\
Å
Å
é
æ
ä
ø
ö
ò
ñ
å
å
è
É
Ü
é
ù
ü
ì
Italy  
à
Spain - 1  
Japan  
s
¡
Ñ
¥
¿
}
Norway  
¤
É
É
á
á
à
Æ
Æ
¡
Ø
Ø
Ñ
Ñ
ç
Å
Å
¿
¿
ê
Ü
Ü
é
é
î
é
é
æ
æ
í
ø
ø
ñ
ñ
ù
á
å
å
ó
ó
è
é
ü
ü
ú
ú
û
ü
Denmark - 2  
Spain - 2  
Latin America I  
French Canadian  
Latin America II  
¡
ü
ô
í
í
â
é
ó
Ñ
ú
284 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Glossary  
The following terms are defined as they apply to the 4247 Printer documentation.  
Italicized text indicates terms found elsewhere in this glossary. If you do not find the  
term you need, refer to the index or to the IBM Dictionary of Computing ,  
ZC20-1699.  
A
A2-size paper. Paper that measures 420 by 594 mm (16.5 x 23.4 in.).  
A3-size paper. Paper that measures 297 by 420 mm (11.7 x 16.5 in.).  
A4-size paper. Paper that measures 210 by 297 mm (8.3 x 11.7 in.).  
A5-size paper. Paper that measures 148 by 210 mm (5.8 x 8.3 in.).  
adhesive label. Special-application material; typically consists of paper labels coated on one side with an adhesive  
mixture temporarily affixed to backing material. See also carrier.  
AFTA. Automatic Forms Thickness Adjustment.  
application. The use to which an information processing system is put.  
application program. A program written for or by a user that applies to the user’s work, such as a program that  
does inventory control or payroll.  
application programmer. A person who develops application programs. Contrast with system programmer.  
ASF. Automatic Sheet Feeder option.  
automatic load. A Manual Sheet Feed function that automatically feeds a form.  
B
B4-size paper. Paper that measures 257 mm x 363 mm (10.1 in. x 14.33 in.).  
B5-size paper. Paper that measures 182 mm x 257 mm (7.17 in. x 10.12 in.).  
bar code. A code representing characters by sets of parallel bars of varying thickness and separation that are read  
optically by transverse scanning.  
basis weight. The weight in pounds of a ream (500 sheets) of paper cut to a given standard size for that grade; for  
example, 25 x 38 inches for book papers, 17 x 22 inches for bond papers, and other sizes for other grades.  
baud. A unit of signaling speed equal to the number of signals usually expressed in bits per second.  
binder holes. A series of holes or slots punched at set intervals that allow a sheet to be inserted in a loose-leaf or  
ring binder.  
bond (paper). Paper formulated with at least 80% wood pulp. Bond-paper works best in the printer.  
C
caliper. The thickness of forms. This is usually expressed in thousandths-of-an-inch.  
carrier. The backing material for labels. Labels consist of the printable material, the adhesive, and the carrier. See  
also adhesive label.  
character. A letter, number, punctuation mark, or special graphic used for the production of text.  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1995, 1998  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
285  
 
character set. (1) A finite set of different characters that is complete for a given purpose; for example, the character  
set in ISO Standards 646, “7-bit Coded Character Set of Information Processing Interchange.” (2) A group of  
characters used for a specific reason; for example, the set of characters a printer can print. character set.  
code page. A font library member that associates code points and character identifiers.  
code point. An element of a code page or site in a code table to which a character can be assigned.  
command. A control signal that initiates an action or the beginning of a sequence of actions.  
configuration. The arrangement of a computer system or network as defined by the nature, the number, and the  
chief characteristics of its functional units. More specifically, the term configuration may refer to a hardware  
configuration or a software configuration.  
configure. The procedure used to customize the printer to a specific operating and/or communication environment.  
connector. A mechanical device for establishing electrical flow.  
constant data. Data that does not change; for example, the company letterhead and standard text in form letters, or  
the headings and boxes on a preprinted form. Contrast with variable data.  
constant-spaced font. A font in which the graphic characters are contained in character cells of uniform size. The  
distance between reference points of adjacent graphic characters is constant in the in-line progression. The white  
spaces between graphic characters may vary. Synonymous with fixed-space font. Contrast with proportionally-spaced  
font.  
controlling computer. The processing unit to which the printer is attached through a communication attachment.  
controlling computer system. The data processing system to which a network is connected and with which the  
system can communicate.  
control storage. A portion of storage that contains microcode and other data.  
control unit (CU). (1) A device that controls input and output operations at one or more devices. (2) The electronics  
and code that control the printer and the communication attachment.  
CPI. characters-per-inch  
CU. See control unit.  
curl. See paper curl.  
customer engineer (CE). An IBM service representative who performs maintenance services for IBM hardware.  
Synonymous with IBM service representative.  
cut-sheet paper. Paper that, unlike continuous forms, is cut into sheets.  
D
data stream. (1) All data transmitted through a data channel in a single read or write operation. (2) A continuous  
stream of data elements being transmitted, or intended for transmission, in character or binary-digit form, using a  
defined format.  
default. An alternative value, attribute, or option that is assumed when none has been specified.  
degraded operation. A loss in performance caused by environmental or system conditions.  
diagnostic. Pertaining to the detection and isolation of errors in programs and faults in equipment.  
disable. To make non-functional. Contrast with enable.  
DOD. document on demand.  
DP. data processing. This describes the quality of certain fonts.  
286 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E
Electronic Industries Association (EIA). A business association whose members set standards for electrical and  
electronic equipment.  
enable. To make functional. Contrast with disable.  
end-of-forms. A condition sensed by the printer that assumes it is time to add forms to the input area of the printer.  
EPROM. erasable programmable read-only memory.  
Ethernet. A 10-megabit baseband local area network that allows multiple stations to access the transmission medium  
at will without prior coordination, avoids contention by using carrier sense and deference, and resolves contention by  
using collision detection and transmission. Ethernet uses carrier sense multiple access with collision detection  
(CSMA/CD).  
executive-size paper. Paper that measures 184.2 mm x 266.7 mm (7.25 in. x 10.5 in.).  
F
factory default. A value, attribute, or option that is set or chosen at the time of manufacture. Synonym for  
manufacturing default.  
feature code. A code used by IBM to process hardware and software orders.  
firmware. (1) An ordered set of instructions and data stored in a way that is functionally independent of main  
storage; for example, microprograms stored in read-only memory. (2) another term for microcode.  
fixed-space font. Synonym for uniformly-spaced font.  
font. (1) A family or assortment of characters of a given size and style; for example, 6-point Courier. (2) A font is data  
used to create an image of each graphic character; for example, a raster pattern.  
format. (1) The arrangement or layout of data on a data medium. (2) The size, style, type of page, margins, printing  
requirements, and so on, of a printed page.  
forms. A continuous length of media such as paper or labels, upon which the printer can be instructed to print.  
forms path. The entire route that forms travel through the printer from an input stack to an output stack.  
G
graphic. A symbol produced by a process such as handwriting, drawing, or printing.  
H
hardware. Physical equipment used in data processing, as opposed to programs, procedures, rules, and associated  
documentation. Contrast with software.  
host processor. The processing unit to which the printer is attached through a defined interface.  
host system. (1) The primary or controlling computer in a multiple-computer installation. (2) A computer used to  
prepare programs for use on another computer or on another data processing system; for example, a computer used  
to compile, link edit, or test programs to be used on another system.  
Hz. Hertz.  
Glossary 287  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
I
IBM branch office. The local IBM sales or service office.  
IBM customer engineer (CE). An IBM representative who services IBM products.  
IBM marketing representative. An IBM representative who takes product orders.  
IBM service representative. An IBM representative who services IBM products. See also customer engineer (CE).  
icon. A pictorial representation of an object.  
impact printer. A printer in which printing is the result of mechanical impacts.  
input. The data that is entered into a device for processing or storage.  
input key. A key that performs a specified set of operations when it is pressed.  
installation. (1) In system development, preparing and placing a functional unit in position for use. (2) A particular  
computing system, including the work it does and the people who manage it, operate it, apply it to problems, service it,  
and use the results it produces.  
interface. A shared boundary. An interface might be a hardware component to link two devices or it might be a  
portion of storage or registers accessed by two or more computer programs.  
internal print job. A print job originated on the printer itself; for example, a test print or a configuration print-out.  
intervention. An unexpected condition that requires user intervention to clear it; for example, out of toner.  
ISO paper sizes. Pertaining to a set of paper sizes selected from those standardized by the International  
Organization for Standardization (ISO) for use in data processing.  
J
jam. In a printer, a condition where forms have become blocked or wedged in the forms path so the printer cannot  
operate.  
K
key. A switch on the operator panel that allows the user to communicate with the printer.  
key operator. A user assigned to perform routine maintenance and configuration of the printer.  
L
lean. See stack lean.  
LED. light-emitting diode.  
ledger-size paper. Paper that measures 279 mm x 432 mm (11 in. x 17 in.).  
legal-size paper. Paper that measures 216 mm x 356 mm (8.5 in. x 14.0 in.).  
letter-size paper. Paper that measures 216 mm x 279 mm (8.5 in. x 11.0 in.).  
line printer. A printer that formats a line of characters as a unit.  
linking. While using the same type of forms in the Front Push and Rear Push tractors, you choose to allow the  
printer to switch automatically from one forms path to the other forms path, when the first forms path reaches an  
end-of-forms.  
logo. An identifying emblem, statement, or motto of a company.  
288 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
lpi. lines-per-inch. A measure of the number of lines per vertical inch of paper.  
M
Manual Sheet Feed option. This option allows you to feed into the printer a single sheet of paper or a single,  
multi-part form.  
manufacturing default. A value, attribute, or option that is set or chosen at the time of manufacture. Synonymous  
with factory default.  
MB. Megabyte; 1 048 576 bytes.  
menu. A list of procedures or actions available for selection.  
microcode. Refers to the microprogramming stored in the printer. Microcode is used by the control unit to manage  
the printer and its functions.  
mm. millimeter.  
MSF. Manual Sheet Feed option.  
multi-part form. Printer forms that contain more than a single sheet.  
N
nonvolatile memory (NVM). Memory that retains its contents after electrical power is shut off.  
NPS. Network Print Server  
NVM. nonvolatile memory  
O
offline. Not connected to an installed and enabled attachment. Contrast with online.  
online. Connected to an installed and enabled attachment. Contrast with offline.  
operating environment. The physical environment; for example, temperature, humidity, layout, or power  
requirements.  
operating requirements. A list of requirements, such as environmental, electrical, and space, that must be satisfied  
before the printer can be installed.  
operator panel overlay. See overlay.  
overlay. (1) A plastic sheet that is superimposed over the operator panel, and contains text. (2) The printer operating  
mode that allows print media from the MSF to simultaneously process with forms from another forms path.  
P
paper curl. The curve or bend of the paper.  
paper path. The entire route that paper travels through the printer from a tray to a stacker. Deprecated term for  
forms path.  
parameter. A variable that is given a constant value during printer and attachment configuration.  
parking. A printer state in which a forms type is unloaded from the print area, but still remains on the tractors. When  
the forms in one forms path are parked, another forms path or the manual sheet feed can be selected, and the forms  
in that path will be loaded into the print area.  
pica. A typographer’s unit of measurement for the size of characters. 6 picas equal 1 inch.  
Glossary 289  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
pitch. A unit of measurement for the width of type (or a printed character), based on the number of characters that  
can be set (or printed) in one linear inch; for example, 10-pitch has 10 characters-per-inch. Uniformly-spaced fonts are  
measured in pitch.  
point. A unit of measurement for describing type sizes. There are 12 points to a pica, about 72 points to 1.008  
inches.  
power off. The action you take to remove power from the printer.  
power on. The action you take to provide power to the printer.  
power on configuration mode. A printer state that allows you to personalize printer parameters. You store these  
parameters in nonvolatile memory (NVM).  
preprinted form. A sheet of paper (form) containing a preprinted design of constant data on which variable data can  
be printed.  
preventive maintenance. Maintenance specifically intended to prevent faults from occurring. Corrective maintenance  
and preventive maintenance are both performed during maintenance time.  
printer. A device that writes output data from a system onto paper or other media.  
printer stand. An optional printer table available from your IBM marketing representative.  
print position. The physical positions of the characters constituting a print line relative to the form.  
print quality. The quality of printed output relative to existing standards and in comparison with jobs printed earlier.  
print surface. The side of a form that receives the printed image.  
process direction. Describes a direction that is parallel to the movement of the paper path.  
program configuration mode. (1) A printer state that allows you to set the functions you use in your daily job. You  
can save these values in nonvolatile memory (NVM). (2) A diagnostic condition.  
PROM. programmable read-only memory.  
prop. A short form of the term “proportional” meaning proportionally-spaced font.  
proportionally-spaced font. A font in which the graphic characters are contained in character cells that may vary  
with the size of each graphic character and have varying character increments. This allows for even spacing between  
printed characters and eliminates excess white space around narrow characters. Contrast with constant-spaced font.  
R
RAM. random access memory.  
read-only. A type of access to data that allows it to be read but not copied, printed, or modified.  
registration. In printing, refers to the relative print positions of images that are printed at different times. For  
example, when you process preprinted forms, the registration is good if the new image printed by the printer aligns  
correctly with the preprinted image. Print that extends beyond box edges and text that overlaps other text are  
examples of poor registration.  
resident font. Those font data sets that are resident within the printer.  
ROM. read-only memory.  
S
scrolling. Moving a display image vertically in order to view data not otherwise visible within the boundaries of the  
display.  
scroll keys. Keys which are used to move through menus. They are marked with arrows that indicate direction.  
290 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
sheet. In reference to print media, a single, two-sided page of print media like paper or labels.  
shielded twisted-pair (STP). A transmission medium of two twisted conductors with a foil or braided shield. Contrast  
with unshielded twisted pair.  
sizing. A process where paper is treated to give it resistance against penetration of liquids.  
skew. Refers to the angle that the paper is taking while going through the forms path. This will cause the printing  
lines to not be aligned properly.  
software. Programs, procedures, rules, and associated documentation pertaining to the operation of a computer  
system or word-processing system. Contrast with hardware.  
special-application materials. Materials such as adhesive labels and preprinted paper on which the printer can  
print.  
stack lean. A measurable slope from the vertical of a stack of forms. Excessive stack lean can cause failures when  
feeding paper.  
storage. (1) The retention of data in a storage device. (2) In word processing, a unit into which recorded text can be  
entered, in which it can be retained and processed, and from which it can be retrieved. (3) A device, or part of a  
device, that can retain data.  
STP. shielded twisted-pair.  
system administrator. The person at a computer installation who designs, controls, and manages the use of the  
computer system.  
system programmer. A programmer who plans, generates, maintains, extends, and controls the use of an operating  
system, with the aim of improving overall productivity of an installation. Contrast with application programmer.  
T
task. A basic unit of work to be accomplished by a device or an operator.  
text. A graphic representation of information on an output medium. Text can consist of alphanumeric characters and  
symbols arranged in paragraphs, tables, columns, and other shapes.  
throughput. A measure of the amount of work performed by the printer over a period of time; for example, number  
of jobs per day.  
token ring. A network with a ring topology that passes tokens from one attaching device to another; for example, the  
IBM Token-Ring Network.  
transmission. The sending of a print data set to a printer.  
twisted pair. A transmission medium that consists of two insulated electrical conductors twisted together to reduce  
electrical noise. Contrast with shielded twisted-pair.  
typeface. A specific type style, such as Courier or Gothic.  
U
uniformly-spaced font. A font in which the character increment for each character is the same. Contrast with  
proportionally-spaced font.  
unshielded twisted-pair (UTP). A transmission medium of two twisted conductors with no shield. Contrast with  
shielded twisted pair.  
user. Anyone who requires the services of a computing system.  
UTP. unshielded twisted-pair.  
Glossary 291  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
V
variable data. Data that can vary. Examples are the names and addresses in form letters. Contrast with constant  
data.  
X
xerographic paper. A paper that is manufactured specifically for the xerographic process, in which key paper  
qualities are carefully controlled.  
Z
zero tear. Conserves forms by not requiring the operator to tear off any of the forms when parking or changing forms  
types.  
292 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
changing (continued)  
forms path 41  
ribbon cartridge 133  
checking  
configuration 27  
tear off position 25  
choosing  
A
adjustments  
automatic forms thickness (AFTA) 111  
bidirectional 104  
fixed AFTA 111  
forms guide deflector 46  
horizontal 112  
sensor tune 103  
tear off position 25, 108  
vertical 112  
forms path 34  
forms path for special forms 35  
tear off options 25  
cleaning printer  
covers 137  
inside 137  
clearance  
operator 161, 166  
service 161, 166  
clearing forms jams 137  
code pages 245  
commands  
bar code commands 173  
Epson FX-1050 data stream 217, 245  
native 4247 171, 183  
personal printer data stream (PPDS) 187, 213  
configuration  
advance knob 17, 135  
airflow specifications 166  
alarm  
configure 102  
purpose  
quiet 102  
7
alignment mark  
forms tractor 20, 55  
manual sheet feed 30  
attaching  
Network Print Server  
ethernet 128  
token-ring (UTP or STP) 131  
parallel cable 123, 157  
parallel interface 84  
serial cable 124, 154  
serial interface 91  
entering 81  
exiting 82  
function keys 80  
menu tree  
to computer 123  
power on 84  
program 107  
automatic forms thickness (AFTA) adjustment 34, 111  
power on  
bidirectional adjustment 104  
functions 99  
jam sensors 84  
menu tree 84  
parallel interface 84  
printing 27, 105  
B
bail, paper  
installing 48  
removing 48  
bar code commands 173  
bidirectional adjustment 104  
bidirectional adjustment test 104  
black light threshold level 103  
blinking status indicators 7, 8, 9  
branch circuit requirements 165  
pull 84  
restore manufacturing defaults 104, 118  
sensor tune 103  
serial interface 91  
program  
1 form per path 109  
adjustments 111  
another path 119  
config menu 119  
entry point to power on configuration menu 119  
form setting 113  
forms path setup 39  
forms paths 41  
hexadecimal dump 120  
impact strength 110  
menu tree 107  
path 109, 119  
perforation safety 111  
printing 28, 121  
C
cable, signal  
configurations 155  
ordering 153  
parallel 123  
serial 124  
cancel print job 142, 185, 217  
cartridge, ribbon  
advance knob 17, 135  
installing 17, 135  
ordering 151  
removing 133  
changing  
store 120  
tear position adjustment 108  
configuration 82  
display language 19  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1995, 1998  
293  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
configuring  
front push forms path 52  
F
firmware level 23  
fixed AFTA 111  
forms  
linking dual push forms paths 59  
push pull forms path 71  
rear pull forms path 63  
rear push forms path 54  
your printer 80  
jam  
clearing 137  
sensor 84  
loading  
connecting  
ethernet 128  
power 18  
token ring 131  
dual push 58  
front push 20  
manual sheet feed 30  
push pull 72  
rear pull 64  
connector pin assignments, parallel cable 157  
consumption, power 165  
cord, power  
rear push 55  
parking 29, 59  
selecting 35  
specifications 151  
stacking  
ethernet 128  
getting started  
2
Network Print Server 128  
plugging 18  
specifications 162  
dual push 58  
front push 20  
push pull 72  
rear pull 64  
token-ring (UTP and STP) 131  
creating print test sample 23  
D
rear push 55  
tearing off 24  
thickness adjustment 111  
forms guide deflector 44  
forms path  
data stream commands  
Epson FX-1050 217, 245  
personal printer data stream (PPDS) 187, 213  
default  
change 118  
configuration settings 84, 107  
forms path 13  
power on 27, 105  
program 28, 121  
choosing 34  
default 13  
description 36  
dual push  
configuring 59  
setting up 57  
front push  
configuring 52  
setting up 14  
installing  
restore manufacturing 104, 118  
description of each forms path 36  
dimensions of printer 161  
display  
language changing 19  
layout  
7
front tractor 15  
rear tractor 53, 61  
linking 59  
driver installation, printer 125  
dual push forms path  
configuring for linking 59  
preparing 58  
push pull  
configuring 71  
setting up 70  
rear pull  
setting up 57  
stacking forms 58  
configuring 63  
setting up 60  
rear push  
E
electrical requirements 162  
emissions, noise 166  
entering printer configuration 81  
environment  
configuring 54  
setting up 53  
setting up manual sheet feed 30  
summary of set up 39  
forms tractor  
nonoperating 160  
operating 160  
installing  
shipping 160  
front 15  
storage 161  
rear 53, 61  
EPA Energy Star 165  
Epson FX-1050 data stream commands 217, 245  
locations 41  
setting 50  
error messages  
ethernet connection 128  
existing forms path, identifying 42  
exiting printer configuration 82  
7
front push forms path  
configuring 52  
installing tractors 14  
loading forms 20  
294 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
front push forms path (continued)  
setting up 3, 52  
stacking forms 20  
function keys  
identifying (continued)  
new forms path 42  
impact strength, printing 110  
installing  
↑
→
↓
←
11  
12  
12  
11  
dual push forms path 57  
front push tractor 15  
paper bail 48  
parallel cable 123  
power cord 18  
Font 11  
for configuration 80  
Line Feed 12  
Load/Form Feed 12  
printer drivers 125  
push pull tractors 71  
rear pull tractor 61  
rear push tractor 53  
ribbon cartridge 17, 135  
serial cable 124  
locations  
9
Menu/Enter 13  
Micro ↑ 11  
Micro ↓ 12  
Online 13  
Park 11  
wire forms guide  
5
Path 10  
Pitch 12  
Quiet 10  
Tear 10  
K
keys, function  
↑
→
↓
←
11  
12  
12  
11  
functions  
alarm 7, 102  
automatic load 102  
Font 11  
bidirectional adjustment 104  
display language 103  
front tear mode 99  
paper overlay 100  
rear tear mode 100  
restore manufacturing defaults 118  
sensor tune 103  
sequence 101  
for configuration 80  
Line Feed 12  
Load/Form Feed 12  
locations  
9
Menu/Enter 13  
Micro ↑ 11  
Micro ↓ 12  
Online 13  
Park 11  
FX-1050 data stream 217, 245  
Path 10  
Pitch 12  
Quiet 10  
Tear 10  
G
getting started  
attaching to computer  
parallel cable 123  
serial cable 124  
configuring 80  
installing forms tractor 15  
installing ribbon cartridge 17  
installing wire forms guide  
loading forms 20  
location of access areas  
power cord 18  
L
language, changing display 19  
LEDs  
lighted status indicators  
7
5
7
linking, dual push forms paths 59  
loading forms  
5
dual push 58  
front push 20  
manual sheet feed 30  
push pull 72  
rear pull 64  
printing first document 23  
summary 32  
unpacking  
2
glossary 285  
grounding requirements 165  
rear push 55  
location  
H
function keys  
operator areas and controls  
operator panel display  
power switch 19  
9
heat output specifications 165  
hexadecimal printing 120  
horizontal adjustment 112  
5
7
printer on optional printer stand 32  
site 159  
I
status indicators  
7
identifying  
tractor in forms path 36  
existing forms path 42  
Index 295  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
locking levers, tractor 20, 55, 64  
operator panel (continued)  
status indicators (continued)  
Online 8, 9  
Push Pull  
Rear Pull  
Rear Push  
9
8
8
M
maintenance  
cleaning printer  
optional features  
covers 137  
automatic sheet feeder 3, 36, 42  
list of 169  
printer stand 32  
inside 137  
installing ribbon cartridge 17, 135  
removing ribbon cartridge 133  
manual sheet feed  
description 30  
setting up 30  
uses 37  
menu trees  
ordering  
parallel or serial cable 153  
printer stand option 32  
ribbon cartridge 133, 151  
supplies 151  
power on configuration 84  
program configuration 107  
messages  
P
error  
7
paper bail  
installing 48  
status 139  
removing 48  
parallel interface  
20 CPI 89  
attachment 157  
automatic carriage return on line feed 87  
automatic line feed on carriage return 89  
buffer size 86  
character set 87  
data bit 86  
emulation 86  
N
native 4247 commands 171, 183  
Network Print Server attaching 128  
new forms path, identifying 42  
noise emissions 166  
nonoperating environment 160  
nonvolatile memory (NVM) 81  
interface type 85  
near letter quality (NLQ) 90  
print language 87  
select-in signal 85  
parking forms 29, 59  
perforation safety 111  
personal printer data stream (PPDS) commands 187,  
213  
physical requirements 161  
plugs and receptacles  
by country 162  
O
operating environment 160  
operator  
attention  
clearance 161, 166  
controls 5, 6, 7  
7
operator panel  
audible alarm  
display 6, 7  
function keys  
7
depictions 164  
power  
↑
→
↓
←
11  
12  
12  
11  
connecting 18  
consumption 165  
cord  
Font 11  
installing 18  
Line Feed 12  
Load/Form Feed 12  
Menu/Enter 13  
Micro 11, 12  
Online 13  
Park 11  
Path 10  
Pitch 12  
Quiet 10  
Network Print Server 132  
specifications 165  
Network Print Server 128  
plugs 162  
receptacles 162  
requirements 162, 165  
switch 19  
power on configuration menu 84  
preparing  
dual push forms paths 58  
printer for selected forms path 44  
print job  
Tear 10  
overlay  
status indicators  
Auto Sheet Feed  
4
8
canceling 142, 185, 217  
restarting 137  
Front Push  
8
Manual Sheet Feed  
8
296 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
print test 23  
print test sample  
starting 23  
removing (continued)  
forms tractor 42  
packing material  
paper bail 48  
3
stopping 13  
printer  
ribbon cartridge 133  
replacing  
paper bail 47  
ribbon cartridge 133  
requirements  
cleaning 137  
dimensions 161  
driver installation 125  
set up  
3
stand 32  
status codes 139  
branch circuit 165  
electrical 162  
unpacking  
weight 162  
printing  
2
environmental 160  
grounding 165  
noise limits 166  
nonoperating 160  
operating 160  
firmware level 23  
first document 23  
hexadecimal 120  
physical 161  
impact 110  
plug 162  
power on configuration 27, 105  
program configuration 28, 121  
self test printout 23  
test sample 23  
power 162, 165  
power cord 165  
receptacle 162  
shipping 160  
printouts  
storage 161  
power on configuration setup 27, 105  
program configuration setup 28, 121  
self test 23  
temperature 160  
wet bulb 160  
restore manufacturing defaults 118  
ribbon cartridge  
problem determination  
status codes and messages 139  
without status code 142  
problems with  
advance knob 17, 135  
installing 17, 135  
ordering 151  
configuration 143, 150  
print quality 143, 147  
printed output 142  
removing 133  
ribbon 143, 147  
program configuration menu 106  
push pull forms path  
S
safety  
electrical 162  
configuring 71  
installing tractors 71  
loading forms 72  
setting up 70  
stacking forms 72  
perforation 111  
specifications 162  
selecting  
forms path 33  
forms type 35  
push-pull selector 46  
language sets 150  
self test printout 23  
sensor  
R
rear pull forms path  
configuring 63  
forms jam 84  
tune 103  
installing tractors 61  
loading forms 64  
setting up 60  
serial interface  
20 CPI 98  
attachment 154  
automatic carriage return on line feed 97  
automatic line feed on carriage return 97  
baud rate 92  
stacking forms 64  
rear push forms path  
configuring 54  
installing tractors 53  
loading forms 55  
setting up 53  
buffer size 94  
character set 95  
connection type 93  
data bit 92  
stacking forms 55  
rear tractor paper door 140  
receptacles and plugs  
by country 162  
depictions 164  
removing  
emulation 94  
interface type 91  
near letter quality (NLQ) 98  
pacing protocol 93  
parity 93  
forms jam 137  
Index 297  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
serial interface (continued)  
print language 95  
service clearance 161, 166  
setting up  
specifications (continued)  
physical requirements (continued)  
weight 162  
power 165  
dual push forms paths 57  
forms guide deflector 44  
forms path 13, 42  
forms tractors 14, 50  
front push forms path 14  
manual sheet feed 30  
new forms path 41  
paper bail 48  
temperature 160  
stacking forms  
dual push forms paths 58  
front push forms path 20  
push pull forms path 72  
rear pull forms path 64  
rear push forms path 55  
stand, printer 32  
printer  
3
status indicators  
7
push pull forms path 70  
push-pull selector 46  
rear pull forms path 60  
rear push forms path 53  
storage environment 161  
store mode 120  
STP connection 131  
summary  
setup  
forms path set up 39  
printer set up 32  
supplies  
attaching to computer 123  
configuring 27  
forms tear off adjustment 25  
forms tractor 14  
forms 151  
ordering 151  
installing overlay  
installing ribbon cartridge 17  
4
ribbon cartridge 151  
switch  
installing wire forms guide  
loading forms 20  
5
forms paths 60  
power 19  
manual sheet feed 30  
power cord 18  
printing first document 23  
stacking forms 20  
T
tear off  
unpacking  
2
option choices 25  
position adjustment 26, 108  
temperature specifications  
non-operating 160  
operating 160  
shipping environment 160  
signal cable  
configurations 155  
ordering 153  
parallel 123  
test sample  
serial 124  
starting 23  
stopping 13  
thickness adjustment, automatic forms 111  
token-ring connection 131  
troubleshooting 139  
site location 159  
special forms  
choosing forms path for 35  
other considerations 35  
specifications  
electrical requirements  
branch circuits and grounding 165  
plug and receptacle 164  
power consumption 165  
power cord 165  
U
unpacking printer  
2
UTP connection 131  
safety 162  
environmental requirements  
nonoperating 160  
operating 160  
V
vertical adjustment 112  
shipping 160  
storage 161  
temperature 160  
forms 151  
physical requirements  
airflow 166  
W
weight, printer 162  
wire forms guide  
installing  
unpacking  
5
2
clearances 161, 166  
heat output 165  
noise emission values 166  
site location 159  
298 4247 Printer Model A00 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IBMR  
Part Number: 63H6366  
Printed in the United States of America  
on recycled paper containing 10%  
recovered post-consumer fiber.  
SA24-4404-02  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Haier Refrigerator A2FE635CBJ User Manual
Harbor Freight Tools Battery Charger 45005 User Manual
Havis Shields Automobile Accessories P MFK 9 User Manual
Heat Glo LifeStyle Gas Heater 8000TVLP OAKIPI User Manual
Honeywell Mouse HWC BELT WEH QS User Manual
HP Hewlett Packard Calculator HP 17bII+ User Manual
HP Hewlett Packard Computer Monitor W19B User Manual
Hypertec Carrying Case 3507 User Manual
Hypertec Carrying Case 5702 User Manual
IBM Personal Computer 4190 User Manual